09 1HAZOPStudyTrainingCourse

Study, Design, Construction, Operation & Maintenance of Pumping
Station, Waste Water Treatment Plant and Pressure Mains in South of

Amgara and South of New Jahra Scrap Area.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
DIVISION 2 – SITE WORKS
Section 02210 Sub-surface Investigation 1

Section 02220 Demolition and Abandonment 1-7
Section 02240 Dewatering 1-6
Section 02260 Excavation Support and Protection 1-3
Section 02300 Earthworks 1-8
Section 02302 Non-disruptive method of pipeline construction 1-8
Section 02315 Structure excavation and backfill 1-9
Section 02321 Trench excavation, pipe installation, backfill & testing 1-30
Section 02361 Termite control 1-4
Section 02462 Pre-cast concrete piles 1-3
Section 02463 Load test to pile work 1-2
Section 02539 Sanitary Sewers (open cut method) 1-13
Section 02584 Service Protection Ducts 1
Section 02630 Storm-water Drainage System 1-18
Section 02631 Reinforced Concrete Pipes and Fittings 1-5
Section 02632 HDPE Gravity Sewer Pipe & Fitting. 1-7
Section 02634 Polymer concrete pipes 1-9
Section 02636 Vitrified Clay Pipes 1-9
Section 02638 Concrete Manholes & Chambers 1-7
Section 02740 Roads 1-10
Section 02750 Portland cement concrete paving. 1-11
Section 02770 Pre-cast concrete curbs. 1-3
Section 02783 Interlocking pre-cast concrete pavers. 1-3
Section 02786 Stone Pavers 1-5
Section 02810 Irrigation System 1-12
Section 02815 Water Displays 1-11
Section 02826 Motorized Gate 1-2
Section 02900 Landscape Planting 1-4
________________________________________________________________________________________
Tender No. SE/100 INDEX
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02210
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
Investigation of the soil conditions and other subsurface and concealed site conditions.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

General Earthworks and Site Preparation
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Soil Report. The Report is not available. The Contractor to investigate the nature of the site
and sub-soil condition at his own cost and risk and submit report to the Engineer for all
sites of the project, i.e. Kubd WWTP, New Jahra Pumping Station site, Over flow lines,
Force Main, TSE transfer line to DMC site etc.
B. Contractor’s Responsibility:
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the Site prior to submitting his Tender and
made all necessary inspections and investigations and to have decided for himself the
means of access and working space, the nature of the ground and sub-soil, the presence of
existing foundations or other hidden obstructions, the level of the water table, the extent of
rock, support to neighbouring properties and structures and all factors affecting the Works
and shall be deemed to have allowed for these in his Tender. Any information made
available to the Contractor, either in these documents or by any other source, will not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to decide for himself the nature and extent of the
Works, nor will it guarantee that similar conditions will apply on other parts of the Site.
C. The Contractor shall be deemed to have contacted the relevant statutory bodies to establish
the existence of any existing live or redundant services adjacent to or passing through the
Works and shall be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for their diversion or removal.
D. The borehole logs and related information (if available) depict subsurface conditions only
at the specific locations and at the particular time designated on the logs. Soil conditions at
other locations may differ from conditions occurring at the borehole locations. Also, the
passage of time may result in a change of the subsurface conditions or water levels at the
borehole locations. The Employer does not guarantee any statements, opinions, or
conclusions contained in the report. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for
deductions and conclusions made by him regarding the nature of the materials to be
excavated, the difficulties involved, dewatering, maintaining the required excavations and
of carrying out the work affected by the subsurface conditions at the Site of the Works.
Neither the Employer nor the Engineer shall be liable for any loss sustained, indicated by
or deduced from said borings, samples, tests and/or reports and the actual conditions
encountered during progress of the Works.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02210-1 Sub-surface Investigation
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02220
DEMOLITION AND ABANDONMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
Summary of Work
Submittals
Regulatory Requirements
Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
Site Safety and Security
Traffic Control
Field Engineering and Surveying
Structure Excavation and Backfill
Dewatering
1.02 SUMMARY
This Section specifies requirements for demolition and removal and includes, but is
not limited to, the following:
Demolition of designated existing buildings and/or structures.
Pre-cleaning of areas such as wet wells, sewers and force mains to remove sewage,
sludge, or other contaminates.
Pre-testing to identify hazardous materials and working areas.
Removal of existing underground tanks, manholes and pipes.
Capping and sealing existing pipelines for abandonment.
Cutting into existing structures and pipelines to make connections to new and
existing work.
Removal of existing protective coatings from concrete surfaces to permit
resurfacing, patching and recoating of surfaces.
Removal and salvage of designated mechanical, electrical or other equipment and
materials to area to be designated by MPW within the State of Kuwait after
cleaned, tested and packed.
Removal from site and disposal of trash, debris and demolished materials to an
approved area.
Removal from site, cleaning, inventory and transport salvable materials.
Handling all flows, protection of existing and new work from damage.
Removal and disposal of any hazardous material relating to or associated with
demolition or new work in accordance with all applicable rules and regulations.
Identification, location and disconnection or relocation of utilities.
Contractor shall make all arrangements with the relevant utility owners required at no
additional cost to the Ministry.
14. Removal and disposal of asbestos pipe according to EPA regulations and
requirements.
Contractor shall provide protection and maintenance of existing trees.
Contractor shall provide all measures necessary to ensure safe working conditions.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02220-1 DEMOLITION AND ABANDONMENT
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall visit the site as necessary prior to bidding to review conditions
and determine the actual extent of demolition required.
No demolition can be started without prior approval of Engineer.
Conditions of facilities requiring demolition.
All facilities shall be handed over to the Contractor in an “as is” condition.
Any preliminary work necessary to permit the main works to start shall be at the
Contractors expense.
This may include, but not be limited to, removal of tanks, pipelines or other structures
containing raw or treated sewage, sludge, methane gas, chemicals, effluent, asbestos or
other materials.
Conditions existing at the beginning of the project will be maintained by the
Ministry, so far as is practical; however the Ministry makes no guarantee that
conditions will be exactly the same when demolition is to be undertaken.
All facilities will continue to be used for their intended purpose until turned over to
the Contractor for demolition.
The site shall be left in a condition that meets with the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall minimize nuisances and dust to the local residents and work in a
safe manner.
1.04 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall demolish the existing Structures of Jahra WWTP site to a depth
of at least 1 meter below grade or to the extent of polluted soil and backfill with
clean soil.
The tank shall be cleaned and all wastewater and sludge removed prior to
demolition.
The contractor shall remove all accumulated sludge from the existing soak away at
Jahra WWTP site.
Tree Maintenance and replacement.
Existing trees larger than 60mm in diameter measured 300mm above the ground
shall be maintained.
All trees on the site shall be protected and watered by the Contractor from the start
of the demolition until the Project is turned over to the Ministry.
Contractor shall replace all trees that are destroyed, regardless of size, in
accordance with applicable Codes and regulations.
1.05 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The Contractor shall complete all demolition and abandonment work as required and
shall include as a minimum.
Pre-contamination survey.
Remove all manholes and pipes to a depth of 2.5 meters and filling of any
remaining items.
Backfill voids created by demolition and removal.
Filling and sealing existing pipelines and manhole sections to be abandoned in
place.
Removal from site to location approved by Engineer and disposal in a legal manner
all debris and non-salvageable and demolished materials without on-site
accumulation thereof.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Fill all voids and holes and make good all disturbed surfaces.
Protect existing and new work from damage.
The Contractor shall handle all flows and temporary diversion of flows.
This work shall be coordinated with MPW but shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
Diversions of wastewater shall be conducted such that no wastewater is discharged
to the ground or a pathway to the gulf.
All diverted wastewater flows shall be redirected to sanitary sewers.
All work on utilities and facilities of other agencies to be performed as per concerned
agency’s requirements and latest specifications.
Clean the area of debris prior to final backfill with approved material.
During demolition process, the Contractor is required to contain and neutralize or
mask foul odors to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall remove asbestos cement pipes that are uncovered and replaced
during the work.
No action shall be performed that will produce airborne asbestos dust from the
pipe or surrounding soil.
Asbestos pipe shall be removed and immediately sealed in heavy plastic bags prior
to storage on site, transport and disposal.
Asbestos pipe shall be disposed of in an approved landfill in accordance with all
applicable rules and regulations of the EPA.
1.06 MATERIALS TO BE SALVAGED

The Contractor shall remove, clean and deliver the following items to MPW at a place
in Kuwait to be determined by the Engineer.
Steel and ductile iron pipe greater than 100mm diameter.
All mechanical equipment including but not limited to pumps, valves, motors,
cranes, winches, generators, fans and air conditioning equipment.
Electrical panels, control panels, transformers, SCADA equipment and
instrumentation components.
Structural steel and aluminum elements not embedded in concrete.
Manhole lids frames and covers.
The Contractor shall include all cost for this work in the bid.
A complete inventory of the salvaged items shall be made and in addition bills of laden
for each truckload of material cleaned, tested and packed and delivered with the
material for verification.
1.07. VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

Prior to performance of demolition work, the Contractor shall inspect the site, review
the as-built drawings and specifications at the office of MPW and perform the
following as a minimum.
Thoroughly investigate on and off-site conditions as they affect the Work and
determine type of structures, improvements, and applicable requirements of
governing authorities.
Dig test pits to accurately determine the location of under ground piping that may interfere
with the execution of this work.
Obtain and pay for all incidental licenses, permits and inspections required by
governing authorities.
Perform work in a fully coordinated manner with work of other Contractors and/or
other trades to assure completion without interference or delay to progress of
the work.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1.08 SUBMITTTALS
A. The Contractor is to prepare a method statement, which shall detail all aspects of the proposed
demolition and associated work.
B. The method statement shall be approved by the Engineer before any demolition work commences.
C. In addition to the General Requirements in the method statement shall incorporate at least the
following items:
1. Detailed description of the methods and equipment to be used for each
operation, as well as proposed sequence of demolition operations.
2. Safety precautions required to ensure the safety of the workers, members of the
public, and users of adjacent facilities or properties.
3. The controlled demolition, removal and disposal of hazardous materials.
4. The removal, protection and transportation of salvageable materials.
5. Coordination of the demolition work with other work in progress and with any
existing facility operations.
6. Shut down schedule of equipment and disconnection sequence of the utilities
involved.
7. Accurate record of disconnected services and utilities.
8. All bypass and over-pumping arrangements.
9. Measures to avoid excessive dust, noise and odor.
Photographs of existing conditions prior to demolition.
Plan of all above ground objects such as tress to remain after demolition is complete.
1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to applicable code for demolition work, safety of structure, dust and noise
control.
Obtain all required permits from authorities.
Notify affected utility agencies before starting work and comply with their
requirements.
Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits.
Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or contaminated
materials.
Conform to all applicable EPA rules and regulations for the removal and disposal of
asbestos and asbestos cement pipe and products.
All dewatering activities shall be performed such that discharged water and air quality
parameters, noise level and dust level do not exceed the limits set by the rules and
regulations of the EPA or Municipality.
1.10 REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to commencing any particular demolition work, the Contractor shall submit in writing to
the Engineer a detailed proposal including time sequence and the methods to be used for the
particular demolition operation. Approvals by the Engineer of methods to be used in no way
limits the responsibility of the Contractor under any clause in any of the Specifications.
B. The Contractor will be held responsible for the costs of any repairs to any structures built or
under construction, but also for any other costs, which are attributable to his actions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BACKFILL MATERIAL
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Contractor shall backfill all voids created by the demolition. Backfill material shall comply with
the requirements specified in Specification Section “Structure Excavation and Backfill”.
1. Areas to be filled which cannot be compacted to the minimum compaction level such as pipes
shall be filled with a 1:10 sand cement grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall Inspect each area prior to performing any demolition work and record with
photographs, existing conditions as well as the condition of surrounding areas, clearly marking
the location, date, time taken and the items which are to be demolished/retained.
1. The original film and a print, must be submitted to the Engineer prior to starting any
demolition works.
B. The Contractor shall ascertain that the property to be demolished lies within the project area.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing and support as necessary to prevent movement,
settlement or collapse, of both facilities to be demolished and adjacent facilities, which are
designated to remain.
1. Stop all demolition work and notify the engineer immediately, if the stability of the facilities
that are to remain appears to be in danger. If required, extra support shall be provided by the
Contractor as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
B. Temporary barricades and other forms of protection shall be provided to safeguard personnel.
C. Temporary barricades and other forms of protection shall be provided to safeguard the facilities,
which are to remain.
1. Remaining facilities must be protected during demolition.
2. Cover and protect equipment, fixtures, surface finishes and floors remaining in the
demolition area, to prevent soiling or damage.
3. Maintain and protect utilities, which are to remain, against damage during demolition.
D. Ensure free and safe access for Ministry personnel to move to and from occupied portions of the
facility.
E. Prevent the migration of dust and dirt to occupied areas by constructing temporary partitions.
F. Remove protective measures when work is completed
G. Provide bypass connections where necessary to serve occupied portions of facilities.
H. Notify Engineer at least 72 hours prior to shutting down any utility service.
1. Do not shut down any utilities without prior approval of Engineer.
I. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied facilities, unless authorised in writing by the
Engineer.
J. Dewatering, if necessary, shall be conducted according to Section “Dewatering”.
3.03 DEMOLITION
A. General
1. Support or reinforce existing construction that is weakened by demolition in
order not to overload structural elements.
2. Completely backfill voids and below grade areas resulting from demolition work.
3. Dust must be kept to a minimum by sprinkling any rubbish with water at least twice daily
and more often when required to minimize dust.
4. Maintain adequate fire protection, including extinguishers and operative water-hose lines
during demolition of flammable materials.
5. Explosives shall not be used in the demolition.
B. Traffic Control
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Demolition work and debris removal operations are to be carried out in such a manner that
shall minimise interference with roads, streets, walks and/or other adjacent facilities.
2. Provide alternative routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways as directed by the
Engineer.
3. Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct roads or facilities, without written permission from
the Ministry.
C. Concrete and Masonry

1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections.
2. Saw cut concrete along straight lines to a depth of not less than 50 mm.
3. Make cuts in walls perpendicular to the face and aligned with the cut in the opposite wall
face and break out the remainder of the concrete.
4. Use removal methods which will not crack or structurally disturb the concrete which will
remain.
5. Distribute demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid
overloading supporting walls, slabs, and framing.
6. Seal all wall and floor openings, as directed by the Engineer.
D. Pipes, Utilities and Conduits
1. All pipelines to be cut shall be cleaned and purged as necessary, to ensure a safe environment
before any cutting activities.
2. The pipe or conduit shall be removed back to the first joint or valve, or to a location approved
in advance by the Engineer.
a. Seal all remaining pipe ends, as directed by the Engineer.
3. Contractor shall inform the Engineer 72 hours prior to the cutting of any pipes
or conduits leading to or from a structure to be demolished or to be relocated.
These operations shall be coordinated with the relevant Authority to ensure
that no interruptions are caused.
4. All pipes or conduits which are encountered shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer.
5. Pipes, conduits, utilities, etc. which are not removed shall be rerouted carefully cut and
permanently capped.
6. Utility lines not specifically noted for demolition, but which are encountered in the Work
shall be capped, extended, protected or reworked as necessary for completion of the work as
directed by the Engineer.
E. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements are encountered which interfere
with intended demolition or construction activities, investigate and measure both the nature and
extent of the conflict.
1. Submit detailed written report to Engineer.
2. Pending Engineer’s decision as to how to proceed, Contractor shall rearrange his selective
demolition schedule as necessary, to continue the overall job progress without delay.
F. The Contractor shall keep on site, an accurate, up to date record of all disconnected services and
utilities.
1. Upon completion of the works, the Contractor shall provide reproducible drawings indicating
the size, depth, location and type of services for all disconnected utilities.
3.04 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS
A. Remove debris, rubbish, dust, fluids and other demolition materials not intended for salvage from
the project site by transporting and legally disposing of the materials off site to a dumping area,
which is approved by all relevant authorities. The Contractor is responsible to pay all costs
associated with transport and disposal.
1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to seek and obtain such approval and to file with the
Engineer copies of all approvals or agreements so obtained.
B. All rubble, debris and waste materials generated during the demolition procedures shall be
removed by the Contractor from the site as it accumulates. The whole of the site occupied by the
Contractor shall be kept in a clean and orderly state.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. If any hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, the Contractor must
comply with all applicable regulations, laws and ordinances concerning removal, handling and
protection against exposure or environmental pollution.
D. Burning of removed materials shall not be permitted on the project site.
E. Restore all remaining structures, surfaces and facilities which may have been damaged during
demolition work to their original condition, as required by the Engineer.
3.05 PROTECTION
The Contractor shall protect the public, people working on the sites and facilities. In
particular the Contractor shall at least perform the following activities.
Take care to prevent spread of dust and flying particles.
Sprinkle rubbish and debris with water to keep dust to a minimum.
Maintain adequate fire protection, including extinguishers and operative water-
hose lines during demolition of inflammable portions of Work.
Provide temporary barricades, fences and safeguards to eliminate hazards to
persons and property without interference to use of adjacent property, public
right-of-way, utilities and structures.
3.06 COMPLETION
The Contractor shall keep work sites and adjacent areas affected, free and clear from
all debris caused by the work of this Section.
During and upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from buildings
and site all debris, unused materials and equipment resulting form the work of this
Section and leave work sites in a clean, acceptable condition to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
The site shall be graded to drain and to prevent ponding of water.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02240
DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies general requirements for control of ground water and
includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. General Requirements
2. Qualified Personnel
3. Monitoring
4. Contractor’s Responsibilities
5. Submittals
6. Well-Point Systems
7. Sump Pumping.
A. Submittals
B. Quality Assurance/Quality Control, Inspection and Testing
C. Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
D. Site Safety and Security
E. Traffic Control
F. Field Engineering and Surveying
G. Demolition and Removal
H. General Earthworks and Site Preparation
I. Structure Excavation and Backfill
J. Trench Excavation, Pipe Installation and Backfill
K. Microtunnelling
L. Service Roads, Parking Areas and Footpaths
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Dewatering operations shall comply with the following references, unless otherwise specified or
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. CIRIA Report 113 - Control of groundwater for temporary works.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. The Following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilised in this Section:
1. “Draw-down” shall mean the effective depth to which the ground water is removed by a
single stage.
2. “Single stage” shall mean dewatering at one level.
3. “Multi-stage” shall mean dewatering at more than one level.
4. “Dry conditions” shall mean minor or no seepage from excavation faces with minor or no
surface run off at formation level
5. “Formation level” shall mean the designated bottom of excavation.
6. “Trimming” shall mean adjusting the dewatering system to obtain maximum draw-down and
optimum performance.
7. “Priming” shall mean adding sufficient amount of water into the pump to make the pump
operational.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02240- 1 DEWATERING
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Dewatering operations shall comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
1. The Contractor must furnish, install, operate and maintain all equipment and appliances
necessary to keep excavations free from water at all times during construction.
a. The Contractor must also provide sufficient backup equipment (including
pumps) in order to sustain the dewatering systems at all times.
2. Water from other construction activities shall be prevented from entering an
excavation by suitable means.
3. All water must be removed in a manner to avoid damage to property and minimise
nuisance or menace to the public and in compliance with all rules and regulations of
the EPA of State of Kuwait and Municipality.
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for any structures subjected to hydrostatic pressure
from ground water during construction.
b. The Contractor shall treat the contaminated water prior to discharge so that it is in
compliance with MPW and EPA of Kuwait Standards.
c. Dewatering system and contaminated water treatment system shall be designed and
operated to prevent emission of H2S gas or solution into the environment at levels greater
than those allowed by the rules and regulations of the EPA of Kuwait.
d. The Contractor shall continuously monitor the atmosphere at the project boundary when
H2S is present in the ground water to ensure that EPA of Kuwait regulations are met.
e. All water discharge to the environment shall be properly treated so that it is safe and
harmless to the marine environment, and also chemical or biological treatment must be
carried out to make sure that the discharged waste water must be within the requirement
of E.P.A of the State of Kuwait as in Article 210.
4. All dewatering shall be performed by well-point systems, unless otherwise approved

by the Engineer.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that the static water level will be drawn down to a
depth sufficient to keep the bottom of the excavation dry (at least 300mm below
formation level).
6. No excavation shall be allowed in wet conditions (as per Specifications) and no
pipelaying or concrete activities shall commence until the Contractor demonstrates
that he can maintain the excavations in dry conditions, acceptable to the Engineer.
7. The Contractor must maintain dewatering at all times during construction so that no
groundwater comes into contact with any reinforcement or unprotected concrete
surfaces.
a. Failure to comply with the above shall entitle the Engineer to condemn the
section of work affected and demand complete removal and replacement, at
the Contractor’s expense.
8. If the Contractor fails to maintain the excavations in dry conditions (acceptable to

the Engineer), the Ministry reserves the right to employ a professional dewatering
subcontractor on the Contractor’s behalf.
a. All costs attributed to the above shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
B. Qualified Personnel
1. The Contractor must provide experienced, qualified personnel to perform the dewatering
operations.
2. If approved by the Engineer, the Contractor may furnish the services of an experienced,
qualified and properly equipped Dewatering Subcontractor to design and operate the
dewatering and groundwater recharging systems required for the work.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Monitoring
1. Where required to do so by the Engineer, the Contractor shall establish a specified number of
groundwater level monitoring stations at each site, which will be observed during the work.
2. These shall be located as directed by the Engineer and consist of acceptable open tube
piezometers.
3. If required by the Engineer, settlement gauges shall be provided as designated by the
Engineer, to monitor settlement existing structures and facilities.
D. Contractor's Responsibility
1. The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the Site prior to submitting his Tender and to
have made all necessary inspections and investigations and allowed in his Tender for the
following:
a. Means of access and working space
b. Nature of the ground and sub-soils
c. Presence of existing foundations or other hidden obstructions
d. Level of the water table
e. Extent of rock
f. Support to neighbouring properties and structures
g. All factors affecting the Work.
h. Presence of H2S and other contaminants in the groundwater.
- Contractor shall review all geotechnical information (if any) provided by the
Ministry. Accuracy of information provided by the Ministry is not guaranteed to be
indicative of conditions that will exist during construction. Contractor shall take
any additional tests deemed necessary to determine the present conditions and those
that will result during dewatering operations.
i. Contractor shall provide all tests prior to and during construction required by the EPA or
Municipality to determine impacts of dewatering.
2. Any information made available to the Contractor, either in these documents or by any other
source, will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to decide for himself the nature
and extent of the Work, nor will it guarantee that similar conditions will apply on other parts
of the Site.
3. The Contractor shall be deemed to have contacted the relevant authorities to establish the
presence of any existing, live or redundant services, adjacent to or passing through the area
of work and shall be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for their location, diversion,
demolition or removal.
4. Borehole logs and related information depict subsurface conditions only at the specific
locations and at the particular time designated on the logs.
a. Soil conditions at other locations may differ from conditions occurring at the borehole
locations.
b. Passage of time may result in a change of the subsurface conditions or water levels at the
borehole locations.
c. The Ministry does not guarantee any statements, opinions, or conclusions contained in
the soil report.
5. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for:

a. Deductions and conclusions made by him regarding the nature of the soil to be
dewatered.
b. Difficulties involved.
c. Maintaining the dewatering at required elevations.
d. Carrying out his own investigation to satisfy himself of the validity of any subsoil
information.
6. Neither the Ministry nor the Engineer shall be liable for any loss sustained from dewatering
activities.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples
1. Samples shall be supplied for at least the following products, or as requested by the
Engineer.
a. Well pipe
b. Gravel surround for well pipe.
B. Method Statement
1. The Contractor shall submit, for the Engineering’s approval, a separate Method
Statement for dewatering operations, meeting the general requirements of
Specifications.
2. The method statement shall be submitted not less than 30 days before the start of dewatering
operations.
3. No dewatering operations shall commence until the Engineer has approved the Contractor’s
method statement.
4. Capacity calculations, locations and details for well-points, pumps, sumps,
collection and discharge lines, retention ponds, standby units, water recharge
system, water disposal system, monitoring equipment, settlement measuring
equipment, data collection and dissemination shall be included.
5. Treatment system for H2S and/or other contaminants shall be included.
Contract or shall include in the Tender all cost for treatment including, but not
limited to, treatment works, power, chemicals and labour.
6. A baseline survey of the elevations of existing buildings, roadways and utilities
shall be included.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. All dewatering operations shall be preformed by well-point systems, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
1. If necessary sheet piling is to be provided around the dewatered area.
B. Well-point systems shall be installed sufficiently in advance of excavation activities to allow

adequate time for the required draw-down.
C. Contractor shall at all times have on hand sufficient dewatering equipment in good working
condition.
1. Sufficient backup equipment (including pumps) must be installed and ready to sustain the
dewatering system at all times.
D. The Contractor shall have available at all times qualified, competent workmen for the operation
of the pumping equipment.
E. The work site must be kept in dry conditions during excavation, installation of pipelines,
construction of chambers, backfilling, testing, etc.
F. Static water level shall be drawn-down a minimum of 300mm below the bottom of formation
level.
G. The Contractor shall provide treatment facilities to remove contamination in the ground water.
The treatment facility shall treat the ground water prior to discharge to the environment in
compliance with MPW, Municipality and EPA Standards.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3.02 WELL-POINT SYSTEMS
A. All well-point systems shall conform to the following requirements, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
1. The well-point system shall be placed on both sides of a trench or completely around isolated
excavations.
2. Maximum allowable draw-down for a single stage system shall be 4.0 meters.
a. Multi-stage well-point systems shall be used for excavations requiring a draw-down of
more than 4 meters.
b. Well-points at all levels of multi-stage systems shall be installed on both sides of a trench
or completely around isolated excavations.
3. Maximum spacing of well-points shall be 1.0m.
4. Well-points shall be placed by jetting methods.
a. If necessary, auger boring shall be used in hard soils.
b. Well-points set in bored holes shall be backfilled with coarse sand.
5. All well-points shall have a suitable valve for “trimming” the system to obtain maximum
draw-down.
6. Vacuum assisted pumps of suitable size and quantity shall be used to maintain the system.
3.03 SUMP PUMPING
A. Sump pumps may not be used, unless approved by the Engineer.

B. If approved, sump pumping shall comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
1. At least two sumps shall be placed in each excavation (preferably in opposite corners).
a. For long trenches, sumps shall be placed on each side of the trench.
b. Each sump shall be provided with a separate pump, suction hose and discharge line.
2. Sumps shall be large enough to hold sufficient water for priming, pumping and maintaining
the excavation floor in a relatively dry condition.
3. All sumps shall be fitted with a suitably sized cage for graded filter material.
4. Drains leading to the sump must be so arranged as to allow drainage of the entire excavation
and given sufficient fall to prevent silting up, unless steps are taken to keep them cleared out.
5. Ditches shall be sufficiently wide to allow a water velocity low enough to prevent erosion.
6. Elevation of the sump shall be at least 300mm below formation level.
7. Maximum draw down shall be 5-6m.
a. For greater draw-downs, use pumps at lower levels or use suspended submersible pumps.
C. If excavation faces become unstable, the sump shall be abandoned and other methods of
dewatering shall be utilised.
3.04 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING WATER TABLE LEVEL
A. Dewatering systems shall be installed and operated so that the groundwater level outside the
excavation is not reduced to the extent that would damage or endanger adjacent structures or
property.
B. If necessary, a water injection recharging system shall be maintained to replenish the
groundwater supply as required to maintain the water table, including pumps, piping, well-points,
standby units, other required equipment and a source of water sufficient to meet the recharge
requirements, should supply of water from dewatering operations be interrupted or become
inadequate.
C. The Contractor shall repair all damage or settlement to foundations, structures, existing facilities,
or works due to failure of excavation protection, operations of dewatering or recharging system,
or failure to maintain the existing ground water outside the dewatering area.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
D. Check discharge pipes at regular intervals, to ensure that the pumping system is
functioning properly.
3.05 WATER TREATMENT
A. The Contractor shall treat contaminated water to meet EPA of Kuwait

requirements prior to discharge so that it is in compliance with EPA standards.
1. All water discharged shall be safe and shall not harm the marine environment.
2. Contractor shall include all cost for treatment in the Tender.
3. Contractor shall monitor water removed during dewatering for the full duration
of the dewatering activities and start treatment immediately if and when
contaminants are present.
3.06 DISPOSAL OF WATER
A. Water not injected back into the ground shall be disposed of lawfully without damage to new and
existing facilities or adjoining properties.
B. No water shall be pumped in to the drainage system, unless approved by the Engineer.
C. Water removed from the excavations shall be pumped only to an approved area.
D. Where necessary, the Contractor shall divert natural and artificial waterways encountered at the
site, until the works have been completed.
E. The discharge from site dewatering equipment shall not be pumped into a stream or watercourse,
unless the local water authority has given consent.
F. The route of the dewatering discharge main shall be approved by the Engineer.
G. All disposal means and cost shall be the Contractor’s responsibility including but not limited for
obtaining approvals and permits from authorities.
3.07 REMOVAL OF DEWATERING SYSTEMS
A. No dewatering system shall be removed without the approval of the Engineer.

B. Release of groundwater back to its static level shall be performed in a manner to prevent
disturbance of natural foundation soils, compacted fill or backfill and to prevent flotation or
movement of structures, pipelines and sewers.
C. Equipment shall only be removed when no longer required.
1. Monitoring and settlement measurement systems shall be maintained in operation as required by the Engineer.
D. If approved by the Engineer, well-points and like items may be abandoned in place.
1. Any such approvals must be in writing.
E. Drainage Provisions
1. Drainage ditches, diversions and temporary pipes shall be constructed as required to
maintain proper drainage in the work areas.
2. Drainage ditches shall be constructed with cross-sectional area and gradient at least equal to
that of the intercepted watercourses or as approved by the Engineer.
3. Berms shall be provided to prevent surface water from draining into excavations.
4. Earth banks shall be suitably protected from erosion damage during construction.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02260
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
To be read with General Specifications.
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Design, furnish, install and leave in place all steel sheet piling support systems for
deep excavations located within and adjacent to building areas as permanent or
temporary sheeting. Excavation support systems for other areas not designated
on the drawings as temporary or permanent sheeting left in place to be removed
at Contractor's option.
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Subsurface Investigation
B. Earthworks
C. Trench, Excavation and Backfill Pipelines
D. Dewatering
E. Structural Steel
1.03 REFERENCES:
A. AWPA: American Wood Preservers Association.

B. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials.
1. ASTM A 328-81: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Piling
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
At least four (4) weeks prior to installation of excavation support systems, submit
the following to the Engineer:
A. Design Responsibility for Temporary Excavation Support Systems.

1. Submit design calculations for temporary excavation support systems for
review.
a. Design, signed by Contractor stating that all members, elements and
connections are designed to withstand required loads and forces.
b. Reference to codes and specifications to which structural design
conforms.
c. The design and installation of excavation supporting system shall be in
full compliance with the application and requirements of rules, codes,
regulations and laws of applicable Kuwaiti Laws.
B. Submit for approval by the Engineer all design calculations, details and drawings
for sheet piling as indicated on the drawings. Calculations and drawings to bear
the Contractor's Professional Registered Engineer's seal and signature.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02260-1 EXCAVATION SUPPORT
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Submit layout of temporary and permanent excavation support systems. Detail
drawings bearing Contractor's Professional Registered Engineer's seal and
signature.
1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA:
A. Design excavation support system to support earth pressures, equipment and

construction loads, and other surcharge loads, to allow safe and expeditious
construction of permanent structures with minimal movement or settlement of
ground, and to prevent damage to, or movement or settlement of, adjacent
buildings, structures, or utilities. Allowable lateral and vertical ground movement,
including earth support system and soil and limited to a maximum of 6mm.
Ground movements to be monitored.
B. Design of excavation support systems to include penetration to depth below

bottom of excavation adequate to prevent lateral and vertical earth movement,
and to permit lowering of indicated bottom of excavation at least two feet without
any change in support system as installed.
C. Design support system to furnish sufficient reaction to maintain stability in

excavation bottom and walls to prevent displacement of ground and movement of
structures.
D. Do not cast permanent structure walls directly against excavation support walls.
E. Selection and design of the temporary excavation support techniques to be by

Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer for areas not designated as steel
sheet piling left in place (permanent and temporary) on the drawings.
F. Temporary unsupported open cut excavation with sloping sides for excavations
greater than a depth of 2.5 meters not allowed.
G. The Engineer’s review/ approval do not relieve the Contractor of their responsibility
in performing their excavation supporting system intact and safe.
H. The designer and installer of supporting system must have a minimum of 10 years
local experience of track record to show their capabilities of performing such work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. General: All materials free of defects.

B. Structural Steel
C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328, continuous interlocking type.
D. Timber Lagging Left in Place: Treated per appropriate AWPA standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Do not start excavation until Design and Drawing has been accepted by Engineer
and groundwater lowered in accordance with Specifications.
B. Install excavation support systems in accordance with prepared working drawings.

Install, maintain, and remove excavation support so as to prevent: movement,
settlement, loss of ground, or damage to or movement of existing adjacent
structures.
C. Monitor performance of excavation support system with inclinometers, settlement

markers, and strain gauges. Contractor's Professional Registered Engineer to
formulate corrective action if monitored movements in inclinometers or settlement
markers exceed 6mm or loads monitored from strain gauges exceed pre-stress
load.
3.02 REMOVAL:
A. Remove all portions of excavation support systems except where in physical

interference with permanent structures, or where otherwise indicated or directed
by the Engineer. In areas where excavation support systems are left in place,
remove all portions of excavation support systems to depth of 1 meter below
finished grade or below bottom of adjacent structures.
B. Immediately fill all voids created by removal of excavation support members with
lean concrete or well-graded bank run gravel.
C. Removal of sheeting protecting vertical trench sides shall conform to requirements

mentioned in drawings.
D. Preparation of as-built drawings showing locations and cut off elevations of

support systems left in place.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02300
GENERAL EARTHWORK AND SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies general requirements for earthworks and site preparation and includes, but
is not limited to, the following:
1. General Requirements.
2. Submittals and samples.
3. Quality Control.
4. Site Investigation.
5. Suitable fill material.
6. Clearing.
7. Preparation of existing ground.
8. Placement of fill materials.
B. For roadworks, paved parking areas and footpaths see Section 02700.
A. Submittals
C. Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
D. Site Security and Safety
E. Traffic Control
G. Demolition and Removal
H. Dewatering
K. Microtunnelling
L. Service Roads, Parking Areas and Footpaths
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Earthworks shall comply with the following references, unless otherwise specified or otherwise
1. BS 812 - Testing aggregates
2. BS 1377 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes ( refer to Cl.2.02 B
below)
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. The Following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilised in this Section:
1. “Topsoil or Sweet Sand” shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation.
2. “Bulk Excavation” shall mean open cut excavation over a wide area.
3. “Trench Excavation” shall mean excavation of trenches into which pipes or cables are to be
laid.
4. “Structure Excavation” shall mean excavation for the construction of pump stations, tanks,
footings and other structures, in accordance with Specifications.
5. “Excess Excavation” shall mean excavation outside the limits shown on the drawings.
6. “Rock” shall mean material that cannot be excavated by normal means and / or excavation
equipment (crushing strength of not less than 7N/mm 2 dry or not less than 4 N/mm 2 soaked
24 hrs).
7. “MDD” shall mean maximum dry density of the soil.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02300- 1 GENERAL EARTHWORK
AND SITE PREPARATION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
8. “CBR” shall mean California Bearing Ratio.
9. “OMC” shall mean Optimum Moisture Content.
A. Earthwork shall comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
1. No trees or shrubs shall be disturbed, unless approved by the Engineer in writing.
2. Blasting is not permitted.
3. All excavation and backfilling shall be performed in dry conditions, maintained in
accordance with Specifications.
4. Earthwork shall be constructed to the lines, grades, elevations, slopes, and cross sections indicated
on the Drawings.
a. Allowance shall be made as required for the thickness of any pavement, blinding
concrete, lining and riprap.
5. Levels to be recorded:
a. Bench marks and baselines are to be agreed with the Engineer.
b. Before the surface of any part of the Site is disturbed, the Contractor shall take and
record levels on 10.0m grids, unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
c. Two working days notice is to be given to the Engineer, so that the recording of levels
can be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
6. Slopes shall be smooth and uniform upon completion of the work.

7. All excavated materials shall be utilised for the construction of embankment, shoulders and
other such places as directed by the Engineer, unless the material is found to be unsuitable.
a. If not immediately re-used, the excavated material shall be stockpiled in an area
b. Before excavating any material, the Contractor shall test the existing material to
determine if it is suitable for the requirements of fill or subgrade material as specified.
c. Suitable and unsuitable materials shall be stockpiled separately.
8. The Contractor shall not waste, or otherwise dispose of, suitable excavated materials, without
written permission of the Engineer
9. Any excavated material not required or not suitable for use as filling material shall become
the property of the Contractor and the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for its removal
from the Site and for its appropriate disposal.
10. If unsuitable materials are encountered in fill areas, such unsuitable materials shall be
removed as instructed by the Engineer.
a. Cross-sections shall be taken before and after cutting.
11. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove from the Site all material resulting from
excess excavations below that required for the foundation, lining or bedding and shall restore
the same with Grade C20 concrete, or as instructed by the Engineer.
12. If the bottom of any trench or structure excavation, while acceptable to the Engineer at the time of
his inspection, may subsequently become unacceptable due to exposure to weather conditions,
equipment traffic, flooding or other conditions encountered during the progress of the works, the
Contractor shall remove such damaged, softened or loosened material as directed by the Engineer.
a. The cost of the extra excavation and of the additional foundation materials required will
be the Contractor’s responsibility, if necessitated by his negligence.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Approval.
1. The Contractor shall submit sufficient information to the Engineer, prior to purchase,
according to appropriate Section in order to verify compliance with the specifications. Such
information shall include at least the following:
a. Manufacturers name.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Suppliers name.
c. Product name (if applicable).
d. Product description.
e. Manufacturers technical data.
f. Storage instructions.
g. Application instructions.
h. Suppliers name (borrow materials)
i. Borrow pit location
j. Material name (if applicable)
k. Borrow pit material description
l. MDD and OMC
m. Soaked CBR at 95% MDD
n. Liquid and plastic limits
o. Sieve analysis
p. Percentage of water soluble salts
q. Test results as requested by the Engineer
C. Samples
1. Samples shall be supplied for at least the following products or as requested by the Engineer.
a. Borrow pit material (50 kgs)
b. Excavated material (50 kgs)
c. Water for soil compaction (1.5 litres)
d. Geotextile (30cm x 30cm)
C. Method Statement
1. The Contractor shall provide separate Method Statements, meeting the requirements of
appropriate Section for at least the following activities, or as requested by the Engineer.
a. General excavation, backfill and compaction.
b. Dewatering activities
c. Installation of geotextiles
D. Shop Drawings
1. The Contractor shall submit drawings according to appropriate Section for at least the following
items.
a. Cross sections for cut and fill areas.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
A. “Inspection Requests” shall be submitted to the Engineer during the on site installation work
prior to proceeding with at least the following activities. Minimum notification time shall be 24
hours.
1. Start of excavation (at new location)
2. Start of backfilling (at new location)
3. Sampling and testing
B. Testing Laboratory
1. Testing of all fill materials shall be carried out by a suitably equipped laboratory as described
in appropriate Section.
a. The proposed laboratory shall be submitted to the Engineer for his review and approval
at least 30 days before commencing earthwork.
2. During the course of the work, tests shall be carried out under the supervision of the Engineer, to:
a. Identify materials, and determine suitability.
b. Determine compaction characteristics.
c. Determine moisture content and field density.
C. Test Methods
1. Maximum dry density of all soils shall be determined by BS 1377: Part 4:
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Method 3.5/3.6.
2. In situ field density of compacted soils shall be determined by BS 1377: Part 9 Method 2.1
or 2.2 (Sand Replacement Method).
D. Testing
1. Density tests shall be made prior to removal of dewatering systems.
2. The Contractor shall adjust his operations so as to permit time to make tests and shall
excavate and fill such holes as may be required for sampling and testing.
3. A subsequent layer cannot be placed until the density of the proceeding layer has been tested
and the area is approved by the Engineer.
4. The minimum number of field density tests to be performed shall be one for every 1000 m 2 per
layer of compacted existing ground or fill, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
5. The minimum number of compaction tests to determine the MDD of the soil shall be at least
one for every 30 consecutive field density tests conducted, or as directed by the Engineer, due
to changes in the soil.
6. All other specified tests shall be carried out on every 2500m 3 of fill material or as directed by
the Engineer due to changes in materials.
7. The Contractor shall maintain a daily log of all tests carried out for the Engineer’s review.
E. Allowable Tolerances
1. Finished surfaces: +25mm from specified level, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery, stockpiling, storage and handling of materials shall be according to the Method
Statement or manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Do not store products directly on ground, unless approved by the Engineer.
1. Ensure adequate timber blocking is utilised to provide sufficient support.
C. All excavated or borrow materials shall be stockpiled at least two metres away from the edge of the
trenches.
D. Stockpiling of the materials shall be in such a manner that segregation shall be kept to a
minimum.
E. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the
Engineer.
1. Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked by the Contractor
and set aside.
2. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall be removed from site
and replaced at the Contractors expense.
1.09 SITE INVESTIGATION
A. Soil Investigation Report

1. A soil investigation report is attached to the end of the specification.
2. Such reports are for information only and without any warranty as to the correctness of the
information contained therein.
3. Availability of this report to the Contractor does not relieve him of his:
a. Obligation, thoroughly to investigate for himself, the nature of the Site and the sub-soil
conditions therein;
b. Obligations and responsibilities under the terms and conditions of the Contract.
B. Contractor's Responsibility
1. The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the Site prior to submitting his Tender and
made all necessary inspections and investigations and allowed for the following in his
Tender:
a. Means of access and working space.
b. Nature of the ground and sub-soils.
c. Presence of existing foundations or other hidden obstructions.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
d. Level of the water table.
e. Extent of rock.
f. Support to neighbouring properties and structures.
g. All factors affecting the Work.
2. Any information made available to the Contractor, either in these documents or by any other
source, will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to decide for himself, the exact
nature and extent of the Work nor will it guarantee that similar conditions will apply on other
parts of the Site.
3. The Contractor shall be deemed to have contacted the relevant authorities to establish the
existence of any existing, live or redundant services adjacent to or passing through the area
of work and shall be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for their location, diversion,
demolition or removal.
4. Borehole logs and related information depict subsurface conditions only at the specific
locations and at the particular time designated on the logs.
a. Soil conditions at other locations may differ from conditions occurring at the borehole
locations.
b. Passage of time may result in a change of the subsurface conditions or water levels at the
borehole locations.
c. The Ministry does not guarantee any statements, opinions, or conclusions contained in
the report.
d. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for:
i. Deductions and conclusions made by him regarding the nature of the materials to be
excavated
ii. Difficulties involved
iii. Dewatering
iv. Maintaining the required excavations
v. Carrying out the work affected by the subsurface conditions at the site of the works.
vi. Carrying out his own investigation to satisfy himself of the validity of the above
data.
e. Neither the Ministry nor the Engineer shall be liable for any loss sustained, if the actual
conditions encountered during progress of the work differs from the borings, samples,
tests, and/or reports provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EXISTING GROUND
A. After site clearing, the top compacted 200mm of the existing ground shall be comprised of
material having the minimum qualities of suitable fill (load bearing material) and shall be
compacted to 95% of the MDD, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
2.02 FILL MATERIAL
A. Suitable fill material shall consist of excavated or borrow material free from rubbish, vegetation,
perishable matter, tree and plant stumps and other objectionable matter.
B. Suitable fill material shall comply with the requirements in Table 1 below, unless otherwise
1. Load bearing material shall be utilised below all foundations.
2. Non-load bearing materials shall be utilised in open areas and around structures.
3. Dune sand or uniformly graded sand meeting AASHTO classification A-3 with low binding
properties may only be utilised in areas approved by the Engineer.
C. When sufficient quantities of suitable fill materials cannot be obtained from site excavations,
additional material meeting the requirements of Table 1 below, shall be obtained from approved
borrow areas.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the arrangement and payment for all borrow material.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 1
SUITABLE FILL MATERIAL
LOAD NON-LOAD
TEST STANDARD BEARING BEARING
MATERIAL MATERIAL
Max. particle
- 75 mm 150mm
size (rocks)
Passing
BS 1377: Part 2: Method 9.2 25% Max. -
0.075mm
Liquid limit BS 1377: Part 2: Method 4.5 35% Max. 40% Max
Plasticity index BS 1377: Part 4: Method 5 10% Max. 10% Max.
CBR BS 1377: Part 4: Method 5 15% Min.  -
Water Soluble
BS 1377: Part 3: Methods 5 & 7 5% Max. -
Salts
 Compacted to 95% MDD and soaked for 96 hours.
2.03 WATER
A. Water used for compacting fill shall be clean and free from oil, grease, organic matter, suspended
fine sediment or deleterious materials, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2.04 GEOTEXTILES
A. Geotextiles for general earthworks shall comply with the requirements of Specifications.
B. Geotextiles for granular pipe surround and French drains shall comply with the requirements of
Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION
A. Protect bench marks and other permanent structures in the Site area from damage or
displacement.
3.02 CONTROL OF WATER
A. Comply with all requirements in Section 02240 “Dewatering”.
3.03 CLEARING
A. General
1. The Contractor shall clear the Site area of all vegetation, rubbish, debris and other
objectionable materials.
a. Soils suitable for landscaping or agricultural purposes shall be stockpiled separately for
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
replacement, if directed by the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall also clear the access routes to the Site and any other areas deemed
necessary by the Engineer, to facilitate the construction of the Works.
3. When clearing vegetation, the Contractor shall ensure that tree roots, bushes, shrubs, etc. are
fully removed.
a. Holes left by stumps or roots shall be filed with suitable material to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
4. The Contractor shall dispose of all cleared vegetation, rubbish, debris and other objectionable
materials in a controlled manner, to a location approved by the relevant authorities.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper upkeep and maintenance of the Site and
the Works and shall remove from the Site, rubbish and other waste as it accumulates.
6. Existing roads, improvements, facilities, adjacent property etc. shall be protected, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Existing services
1. Contractor shall check with the relevant authorities to determine what existing underground
services are present in the Site area.
2. Contractor shall locate and effectively seal off drain ends.
3. When necessary, the Contractor shall divert services still in use and provide all temporary
works necessary to maintain such services in full functional order.
a. Such services shall be reinstated to the approval of the relevant authorities at the earliest
opportunity when carrying out such work.
b. The Contractor must comply with regulations and obtain necessary permits and No
Objection Certificates (N O C’s).
3.04 EXISTING GROUND PREPARATION
A. After site clearing, the existing ground surfaces shall be graded to remove surface irregularities.
B. In cut areas, excavation shall extend for the full designated width, down to the bottom of the
excavation.
C. The ground surface shall be scarified and loosened to a minimum depth of 200 mm (except where
the material is classified as rock).
1. If unsuitable materials are encountered, they shall be excavated to a depth as directed by the
Engineer. If unsuitable materials have been removed the ground shall be prepared as in
Clause (C) or as directed by the Engineer.
2. The scarified material shall watered as necessary to achieve a uniform moisture content
suitable for compaction.
3. The scarified material shall then be compacted to at least 95% MDD below structures,
roadways or parking areas and at least 90% below landscaped or open areas.
D. Surface materials of the existing ground shall be compacted and bonded with the first layer of
earth fill as specified for subsequent layers of earth fill.
E. Rock Foundations
1. All rock foundation and abutment surfaces shall be cleared of all loose materials by hand or
other effective means and shall be free of standing water when fill is placed.
2. Fill placed immediately adjacent to such rock foundations or where not accessible with large
compaction equipment, shall be compacted to the specified density by means of manually
directed power tampers or plate vibrators.
F. Benching
1. Where slope of existing soils to receive fill exceeds 1:4, horizontal benches shall be cut to key
the new fill material to the existing soils.
2. At least 600mm of existing soil normal to the original slope shall be removed and
recompacted as the new fill is brought up in layers.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3.05 PLACEMENT OF FILL MATERIAL
A. Placement of fill materials shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Distribution of materials throughout each layer shall be essentially uniform.
2. Fill shall be free from lenses, pockets, streaks, or layers of material differing substantially in
texture or gradation from the surrounding material.
3. If the surface of any layer becomes too hard and/or smooth for proper bond with the
succeeding layer, it shall be scarified parallel to the axis of the fill to a depth not less than
75mm before the next layer is placed.
4. The top surface of each layer of fill shall be approximately level during construction.
a. The final surface of fill shall be finished with a 2 percent crown or cross-slope as
suitable for site drainage, unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
B. Field Compaction
1. Fill material in landscaped or open areas shall be compacted in loose lifts up to 250mm
thick, to at least than 90% MDD.
2. Fill material below structures and paved areas shall be compacted to at least 95% MDD in
200mm maximum loose lifts, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
3. All fill shall be moistened or aerated to control the moisture content to within a range of ±3%
of the optimum moisture content when compacted.
4 Uniform moisture distribution shall be obtained by discing, blading or other approved methods,
prior to the compaction of the layer.
5. If the top surface of the preceding layer of compacted fill or foundation becomes too dry or wet to
permit suitable bond, it shall be scarified and moistened by sprinkling or aerated to an acceptable
moisture content, prior to the placement of the next layer.
6. See Clause 1.07 of this Section for testing for Quality Assurance/Quality Control.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF GEOTEXTILES
A. The handling, placement and installation of the geotextile shall be carried out strictly in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations or as directed by the Engineer.
B. Where used as base stabilisation for embankments, the type of construction equipment used for
spreading and compacting initial fill layers shall be suitable so as to avoid damage to the
geotextile. The initial layer of fill placed on the geotextile shall be free from sharp angular or
pointed material that may puncture the geotextile.
C. Trucks shall not be permitted to drive over the geotextile. The laying of the material shall be
coordinated, to ensure that trucks do not damage the material.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02302
NON-DISRUPTIVE METHOD OF PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PIPELINES BY NON-DISRUPTIVE METHODS (GENERAL)
A. Method Statements
Where pipelines beneath or crossing roads are to be executed using non-

disruptive techniques such as auger boring, thrust boring, pipe jacking, tunnelling
using thrust and reception pits, the Contractor shall give four weeks notice in
writing to the Engineer of his intention to commence work in or near a public
highway together with his method statement.
Permission to construct non-disruptive pipelines beneath or across roads must be

obtained from the Ministry of Public Works and approval is also subject to the
requirements of the Traffic Department of the Ministry of Interior.
The method statement shall include but not be limited to:-
1. Type of method and equipment to be used.

2. Plan showing location of thrust and reception pits and any area required for
stacking pipes, temporary stockpiling of spoil, etc.
3. Method of support to excavations, watching and lighting, etc.
4. Method of dealing with groundwater.
5. Programme of work.
Any permits required under General Specifications and any other section related
to this work must be handed to the Engineer before work commences.
Other requirements of this Specification, which are more onerous than the above
conditions, shall take precedence over the above conditions.
PART 2 PIPE PRODUCTS FOR PIPE JACKING AND MICROTUNNELLING
2.01 CARRIER PIPE DIA 1400mm
A. Ductile Iron with polyurethane liner from inside

1. Design conforming to ANSI A21.50 or ISO 2531.
2. Manufacturer conforming to ANSI A21.15 or ANSI A21.51.
3. Thickness class, unless otherwise indicated or specified.
a. Minimum thickness Class 52 or ISO class K 9.
b. Minimum thickness Class 53 for use with threaded flanges.
c. Minimum thickness for use with grooved couplings conforming to AWWA
C606 except minimum thickness Class 56 for ductile-iron pipe 450mm
and larger.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02302- 1 NON-DISRUPTIVE
METHOD OF PIPELINE
CONSTRUCTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2.02 PIPE FOR USE WITH COUPLINGS
A. As specified above except ends shall be plain.
B. With sleeve couplings, ends cast or machined at right angles to axis.
C. With grooved type coupling:

1. Ductile iron of thickness class specified above.
2. Grooved end dimensions conforming to AWWA C606 for flexible or rigid joints,
to suit joint requirements.
2.03 FITTINGS
A. Provide fittings conforming to ANSI A21.10 or ANSI A21.53, at least Class 150.
B. Provide all bell push-on fittings unless otherwise indicated or specified.
C. Face and drill flanged fittings conforming to ISO PN16 (ANSI A21.10) except
special drilling or tapping as necessary for correct alignment and bolting.
D. If flanged fittings are not available under ANSI A21.10 provide fittings conforming
to ANSI B16.1 in 125 lb. pressure class.
E. Provide standard base fittings where indicated.
F. Provide grooved-end fittings ductile iron conforming to ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110)
for center-to-face dimensions.
1. End preparation for grooved-ends conforming to AWWA C606 for flexible or
rigid joints as required by type of joint.
2. Minimum wall thickness of grooved fittings 300mm and smaller conforming to
ANSI A21.53 (AWWA C153).
3. Minimum wall thickness of grooved fittings larger than 300mm conforming to
ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110).
2.04 CASING
A. Jacked-in-place casing for road under-crossing shall be smooth steel pipe

conforming to AWWA C200 ASTM A53, or equal specification fabricated in
sections for welded field joints. Casing pipe shall be coated inside and outside
with two coats of cold applied coal tar epoxy or equal, and approved protective
coatings applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Field
joints shall be full circumference welded butt joints. Casing pipe diameter shall be
2000mm with a 12mm minimum wall thickness.
The minimum casing diameter shall be at least D+600mm to install the ductile iron
pipes with flanges and bolts for easy maintenance and replacement if necessary.
(D is the diameter of carrier pipe).
Casings shall be equipped with nipples from inside at the spring line and crown at
3-m centres for pressure grouting. The grout nipple spacing is the minimum
acceptable and the Contactor shall be responsible for providing sufficient numbers
and locations of grout nipples to satisfactorily perform the grouting or by Bentonite.
1. Grout: Grout for pressure grouting outside jacked casing pipe shall be 1 part
sulphate resisting cement and 3 parts sand, by volume.
________________________________________________________________________________________
METHOD OF PIPELINE
CONSTRUCTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Casing Seal: Casing seals shall be synthetic rubber pull-on seals with
stainless steel grade 316 L bands and shall be in one piece.
3. Pipe Skids: Pipe skids shall be of a design appropriately to the laying method
adopted. Bands shall be 12mm wide by 0.5mm thick Type 304 stainless steel.
4. Casing Sand: Casing sand shall consist of borrowed clean sand and shall
conform to the following gradation requirements.
Sieve Size Percent Passing by weight
3/8 inch 100

No. 4 95 - 100
No. 10 80 - 100
No. 40 10 - 70
No. 100 0 - 25
No. 200 0-5
2.05 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: Prior to the start of the work, submit satisfactory evidence to the Engineer
that all requirements called for by the concerned authorities have been compiled
with. All proposed construction methods and materials for the under-crossing shall
be approved by the Engineer and concerned authorities prior to the crossing
operation, and no construction shall be started until written approval to proceed
from the concerned authorities has been submitted to the Engineer.
B. Steel Casing Installation: Install steel casing by jacking and excavation from within
the steel casing. Methods of tunnel excavation, whether by a tunnel boring
machine or hand digging, shall be at the Contractor's option, subject to the review
of the Engineer. The Contractor shall control settlement of the ground surface,
adjacent structures, and buried utilities through an appropriate control of activities
such as excavation, jacking, and dewatering. Should settlement above the tunnel
or at any location reach or exceed 12mm, the Engineer may require modification
of the method or sequence of work. In the event of further settlement at location,
the Engineer may requires a shutdown of the work to fill all voids outside the pipe.
Start grouting to make appropriate changes in the construction operation.
Changes required to keep settlement within acceptable limits and to prevent
movement and/or damage to existing structures shall be made solely at the
Contractor's expense.
C. Grouting Void Outside Casing: In cased crossings, fill void space between ground
and casing completely with lean grout. After the casing has been jacked or
tunnelled into position, pressure grout through the grout holes provided to fill all
voids outside the pipe, start grouting at the spring line hole at one end and pump
grout until grout appears in grout hole at crown, then start grouting through the
opposite spring line hole until grout appears at hole in the crown. Next grout
through the hole at the crown until grout appears in the next set of holes along the
pipe. Plug the holes at the starting point and move to the next set of holes and
repeat grouting sequence until full length of jacked or tunnelled pipe has been
grouted.
D. Cased Pipe: Install skids on all pipes in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
________________________________________________________________________________________
METHOD OF PIPELINE
CONSTRUCTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
- The grout shall be capable of producing a minimum compressive strength of
10 N/mm2.
- The filling pressure must be decided upon prior to the start of operations,
based on the depth and condition of existing pipe, its degree of corrosions,
and the height of water table.
The equipment, grout mixtures, and methods to be used to fill the abandoned
pipelines shown to be filled shall be capable of completely filling the pipeline. The
grout shall be injected at the lower end and the grout allowed to flow upstream
avoiding air pockets. Grout shall be placed by such methods as to provide visual
verification that the pipelines are being completely filled.
E. Placing Fill in Casing: Fill the annular space between the casing and the pipe
completely with sand. Accomplish sand filling by using a gunite machine for
blowing, or other approved equipment.
Dispose of excess excavated material as approved by the Engineer.
F. Contractor’s Responsibility: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for settlement

or deterioration of the roadway pavement until final acceptance by the Engineer.
PART 3 MICROTUNNELLING
3.01 DEFINITIONS
A. For the purpose of this Specification the following definitions shall apply:
"Microtunnelling" is defined as a miniaturised tunnelling technique
employing mechanical excavation methods within a nonmanentry guided
tunnel boring machine with the primary lining inserted behind by
jacking.
“Pipe" is defined as the permanent structural primary lining of

the bore.
“Shaft" is defined as the excavated thrust and reception pits

used for the microtunnelling operation.
“Auger System" microtunnelling where excavated spoil is transported from the

cutting face back along the installed pipeline via a flight of helical
augers.
“Slurry System" microtunnelling where excavated spoil is converted to slurry and

removed by the use of a small diameter discharge pipe. The
pressure in the slurry system can be altered to balance ground
water pressures at the cutting face.
“Earth Pressure Support of the soil at the cutting
“Balance" face by controlled pressure of the cutting head against the

________________________________________________________________________________________
METHOD OF PIPELINE
CONSTRUCTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
soil face.
B. Approved Sub-Contractor: Where microtunnelling is to be carried out by a

specialist Sub-Contractor he shall be subject to approval by the Engineer in
accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
C. General Requirements
1. The microtunnelling systems shall be capable of remotely installing pipes in
the prevailing ground conditions and accommodating different joint
configurations.
2. Disposal of excavated material shall be by enclosed remote means using
either screw auger, or slurry system.
3. If necessary, facilities for lubricating the external surface of the pipeline being
installed shall be provided in order to minimize jacking forces. If required,
facilities for grouting any over-break are to be incorporated.
4. Pipes shall be capable of sustaining all jacking loads and surcharge loads
arising from over-burden and traffic loading.
5. Working shafts shall be sufficiently compact to minimise disruption, capable of
sustaining reactions to jacking loads and be watertight.
D. Specific Requirements
1. The plan cross-sectional area of working shafts shall be the minimum
necessary to ensure efficient installation, use and retrieval of the equipment.
2. The proximity of buildings is such that the driving of steel sheet piles to shafts
may be subject, to restrictions. Any construction noise greater than 70dB is
not permissible. All constructional Plant forming part of the microtunnelling
system is to be electrically driven, either by mains supply or on-site
generation.
3. Microtunneling shall not be considered unless there is a minimum vertical
clearance to services of 2 metres.
4. The microtunneling system shall conform to the following criteria:
a. face support shall be provided by a full earth pressure balance cutting
head, or by a pressurised slurry system, as appropriate.
b. the equipment must be capable of operating under the prevailing ground
conditions including hydrostatic pressure from natural ground level.
c. the system shall have automatic steering control by means of a micro-
processor system with line/level/gradient prediction capability
incorporated.
5. The microtunnelling system shall be capable of installing a pipeline up to 130
metres in length in one operation to an accuracy in line and level of + or - 25
mm.
6. Individual pipe length shall be 6.0m.
7. The systems shall also be capable of dealing with stones, concrete or rubble
of individual maximum size one-third the nominal internal diamater of the
pipes being installed.
E. Site Investigation
The Contractor shall avail himself of all available information and undertake such
investigations concerning ground conditions necessary to determine the
appropriate cutting head compatible with the expected conditions. Any diversions,
rerouting, removal, of existing services and reinstating of landscaping shall be
carried out by the contractor at his own expense.
The position of drive and reception shafts shall be determined by the Contractor
and approved by the Engineer.
________________________________________________________________________________________
METHOD OF PIPELINE
CONSTRUCTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
F. Survey and Setting Out
1. Preliminary Survey
Before commencing the excavation of any shaft or pit from which
microtunnelling is to start, the Contractor shall, without prejudice to any other
requirement of the Contract and to the satisfaction of the Engineer:-
a. Establish at least four reliable temporary survey stations adjacent to the shaft or
pit to facilitate the setting out of the underground works and checking of the setting out.
b. The records of initial levels for pipelines beneath or across
roads are to be submitted to the Ministry of Public Works Roads
Department as a record for reference in checking for subsequent
settlement.
c. Record and report with supporting photographs the condition
of all properties, roads and footpaths over and alongside each
microtunnelling route.
2. Surveys During Construction

During construction of a microtunnelling drive between any two working shafts
the Contractor shall observe levels on the predetermined cross section points
every fourth day to determine subsidence (if any).
Upon completion of a microtunnelling drive between any two working shafts

the Contractor shall, without prejudice to any other requirement of the
Contract and to the satisfaction of the Engineer:
a. Repeat the level survey of the ground surface above the centre line of the pipe jack or heading
as described above.
b. Record and report with supporting photographs any changes in the condition of the
properties, roads and footpaths over and alongside each microtunneling route.
3. Setting Out of the Works
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with details of his proposed method
of setting out and the construction of the shafts.
4. Tunnelling Records
The contractor shall provide the tunnel drive records which indicate the total
length of the drive, the slope if any, the machine characteristics during
driving.
5. Surveys prior to Completion

Shortly prior to the substantial completion of the whole of the Works and again
prior to the end of the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall repeat the
surveys and inspection including CCTV survey for all the micro-tunnelling
works.
G. Safety
1. General
Where work is carried out in micro-tunnelling shafts, the Contractor shall
comply with the recommendations of a recognized Code of Practice to be
2. Lighting and Other Electrical Equipment

Lighting and other electrical equipment for use within or adjacent to shafts
shall be either intrinsically safe or flameproof of an approved type.
________________________________________________________________________________________
METHOD OF PIPELINE
CONSTRUCTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Ventilation
All ventilation plant and equipment shall be operated and maintained by
competent persons who shall keep a daily log of operations in a form
Each shaft, shall be ventilated by a fan which shall be suitably situated and
connected by ventilation ducting to within 5 metres of the working face.
The fan shall be capable of delivering or exchanging at the end of the ducting
at least 15 cubic metres of air per minute per square metre of area of the face
to be ventilated.
4. Presence of Toxic and Inflammable Gases

When ground conditions indicate that the workings may pass through or are
close to materials which could lead to the presence or accumulation of
inflammable gases in or adjacent to underground workings or where in the
opinion of the Engineer there is a risk of this, the Contractor shall comply with
the following requirements of this Clause.
Each shaft sinking shall be provided with at least one approved automatic gas
detector. Continuous monitoring for toxic and inflammable gases and oxygen
contents shall be instituted with monitors set as near as possible to the most
hazardous areas. Regular test shall also be taken for carbon dioxide content.
All gas detectors shall be expertly and regularly maintained.
If gas detection equipment indicates the presence of toxic or inflammable

gases approaching hazardous concentrations, all work in the danger area
shall cease and all personnel shall immediately vacate the workings, care
being taken to avoid sparks from metal tools and studs on boots, etc, and the
condition of the workings shall be reported to the Engineer immediately. The
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval his proposals for sealing
the exposed surfaces to the strata from which gas is escaping, for providing
additional ventilation and flameproof illumination or such other precautions as
may be considered necessary.
If the amount of inflammable gas in any shaft sinking exceeds 1.25 percent by
volume, the electrical supply shall be cut off at the surface to all apparatus
other than telephones and electric safety lamps.
If the amount of inflammable gas in the main body of the air exceeds 2
percent by volume, all persons in the affected area shall be withdrawn. The
nominated competent person shall ascertain the condition of the area
affected, and the measures to be taken to render safe the affected area shall
be subject to approval by the Engineer, such approval not relieving the
Contractor of his obligations under the Contract. Personnel will only be
allowed to re-enter the area after safe conditions have been restored.
If the Engineer considers that the conditions within the shaft sinking require
further restrictions, he will inform the Contractor and the Contractor shall
implement such additional restrictions as may be required without delay and, if
so required by the Engineer, shall cease any work that the Engineer considers
may constitute a hazard to the Works or to personnel until the additional
restrictions have been implemented.
Nothing in this clause shall be deemed to limit the Contractor's more general
________________________________________________________________________________________
METHOD OF PIPELINE
CONSTRUCTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
obligations under the Contract.
H. Working Shafts/Pits
The Contractor shall construct working shafts/pits at locations to be agreed and
approved by the Engineer. Full details shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval before any excavation work commences including a plan of the proposed
working area at the head of each shaft to a scale not less than 1:50. This shall
show local topography, the working shaft and arrangement of plant, materials, etc.
The Contractor shall ensure that the area required to set up machinery and
equipment together with an allowance for truck access for spoil removal is kept to
a minimum and does not cause road closures except where formally approved.
Each working shaft shall have a separate ladder bay for access which shall be
isolated from the part of the shaft used for hoisting materials. The ladder will be
vertical, rising through staging not greater than 6 metres apart and offset at each
staging level. All shafts and staging shall be protected by handrails 1 metre high.
The Contractor may apply at any time for approval to changes of design to enlarge
or modify any of the chambers or access points that are to be incorporated into the
Permanent Works as to facilitate their use as working shafts/pits. However,
rejection of any such applications or delay in issuing approval shall not constitute
grounds for any additional payment or extension of time for completion. Any such
modification that is approved shall be carried out to a Contractor's design.
Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, design changes to enlarge or modify

chambers or access points shall not constitute grounds for additional payment.
I. Excavation in Shafts
The Contractor shall plan, programme and execute the excavation of shafts, in
accordance with the Specification and Drawings.
Before commencing work the Contractor shall submit such details of his
excavations proposals as may be required by the Engineer. No departure from the
approved methods of working will be allowed without the approval of the Engineer.
Excavation in shafts, shall be carried out in any material encountered, true to line
and level. Any misalignment shall be made good to the satisfaction of the
Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
The manner in which the excavation is carried out shall be such as to minimise the extent of
any loosening of the ground beyond the limits of the excavation and to ensure that the
ground is fully supported at all times.
Any subsidence of the soil or road structure, if notice, shall be immediately brought
to the notice of the Ministry of Public Works Roads Department and all excavation
operations shall be completed as soon as possible.
The Contractor shall be at liberty to construction shafts/pits by any of the

established methods of sinking including the use of concrete caissons.
Where the excavation is in water-bearing ground the Contractor shall provide

means of checking whether any solids are being removed with the water from the
excavation. Regular checks shall be made in conjunction with the Engineer to
compare the volume of material removed with the calculated volume as a
________________________________________________________________________________________
METHOD OF PIPELINE
CONSTRUCTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
safeguard against excessive loosening or loss of material beyond the shaft
dimensions.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
METHOD OF PIPELINE
CONSTRUCTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02315
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies excavation and backfilling for structures and includes, but is not
limited, to the following:
1. Excavation for Structures
2. Structural backfilling
3. Anti-termite Treatment.
A. Submittals
C. Site Safety and Security
D. Field Engineering and Surveying
E. Demolition and Removal
F. Dewatering
G. General Earthwork and Site Preparation
H. Trench Excavation, Pipe Installation and Backfill
I. Cast-In-Situ Concrete
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following references,
unless otherwise specified or unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. BS 1377 - Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilised in this Section.
1. “Structure excavation” means excavation in all materials of whatever nature
encountered in the construction of buildings, tanks, footings or other structures.
2. “Formation level” means the bottom of the excavation.
3. “MDD” means Maximum Dry Density of a soil.
4. “OMC” means Optimum Moisture Content of a soil.
A. The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
1. No trees or shrubs shall be disturbed without written consent of the Engineer.
3. All works shall be performed in dry conditions maintained in accordance with Section
02240.
4. Continuous temporary fencing suitable to protect the general public (particularly
children) shall be provided, to enclose all trenches and excavations located in or near
urban areas.
5. The Contractor shall fully support the sides of all excavations, unless the sides are
stepped back at a safe and stable slope.
a. The Contractor shall furnish before commencement of excavation, drawings
showing all details of the sheeting and bracing he proposes to use, together with all
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02315- 1 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND
BACKFILL
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
relevant calculations prepared by a qualified structural engineer.
b. Where the Contractor proposes to excavate with stepped side slopes instead of
providing sheeting, shoring, etc., the Contractor shall furnish a stability report
prepared by a competent soils engineer, together with all relevant calculations,
demonstrating the sufficiency of his proposals.
c. No excavation work shall commence until the Engineer’s consent has been
obtained.
i. Such consent shall in no way relieve the Contractor from any of his
contractual obligations and responsibilities.
6. Trial holes shall be carried out as necessary, to confirm existing soil conditions and
determine exact location of utilities or other obstructions.
a. Excavations shall be carried out by hand, where required or instructed by the
Engineer, to locate and avoid damage to utilities encountered during the excavation
work.
7. Limits and level of excavations shall be as shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise
instructed by the Engineer.
a. Before commencing excavations, the limits of the excavation shall be pegged out
accurately and the existing ground level surveyed and recorded, as agreed with the
Engineer.
i. The method utilised to maintain line and level of pipelines shall be subject to
the Engineer’s approval.
b. If obstructions are encountered during excavation, the Engineer will make

necessary changes to the drawings and issue the amended drawings to the
Contractor.
i. The Contractor shall not make any deviation from the specified limits or
levels, without the written approval of the Engineer.
c. Adequate working space shall be provided in all excavations for safe operating
procedures.
i. Unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, structure excavations shall extend
at least 1.5 meters beyond the horizontal limits of the foundation or structure.
8. When the work is carried out adjacent to or across the line of existing services, the
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all services and utilities.
a. The Contractor shall provide all necessary support or slings to maintain services.
b. If any utilities are disturbed or damaged, the Contractor shall immediately notify
the relevant authority.
c. The Contractor shall not undertake repairs without the authorisation of the
concerned authority.
d. All costs for such works shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
e. If repairs are carried out by the concerned utility authority, the Contractor shall
reimburse all costs related to such work.
9. All excavated materials shall be used in the backfill, unless the material is found to be
unsuitable.
a. All suitable excavated material not directly incorporated into the work shall be
stockpiled for re-use, in areas approved by the Engineer.
b. Soil utilised for landscaping or agricultural purposes shall be stockpiled separately.
c. Unsuitable materials shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor at his
own expense.
d. Any temporary storage along the side of the excavation shall be to stable slopes
and heights and deposited in a manner to avoid any damage and to cause as little
________________________________________________________________________________________
BACKFILL
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
inconvenience as possible.
e. The screening of excavated material will not be permitted on site, without the
written approval of the Engineer.
10. A minimum clear carriageway width as stated in Document II-2 shall be maintained for
vehicular traffic, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
11. Bottom of the excavations shall be properly trimmed off and compacted to provide a
firm and uniform bearing at formation level.
a. If loose or unsuitable soil is encountered at formation level, such material shall be
removed as directed by the Engineer and replaced with Grade C20 concrete.
12. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, excavation shall not be permitted until the pipes
and fittings to be cast into the structure are available on site.
13. If rock or other hard foundation materials are encountered, they shall be cleaned of all loose
material and cut to a firm surface, as directed by the Engineer.
a. All fissures or crevices shall be exposed, cleaned and grouted.
b. All loose and disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be removed.
14. If the Engineer considers that the Contractor is not complying with the foregoing
requirements, the Engineer may not permit further excavation until he is satisfied with
the works.
B. Anti-termite treatment shall be required for buildings and shall be carried out by persons,
agencies and/or a subcontractor who possess acceptable experience in this field and who
can provide references of successful, guaranteed work, having been carried out previously.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Approval
1. The Contractor shall submit sufficient information to the Engineer, prior to purchase,
according to Specifications in order to verify compliance with the specifications. Such
information shall include at least the following:
a. Suppliers name (borrow materials)
b. Borrow pit location
c. Material name (if applicable)
d. Borrow material description
e. MDD and OMC
f. Soaked CBR at 95% MDD
g. Liquid and plastic limits
h. Sieve analysis
i. Percentage of water soluble salts
B. Samples
1. Samples shall be supplied for at least the following products, or as requested by the
Engineer.
a. Borrow pit material (if required)
b. Excavated material (if requested)
c. Water for soil compaction (1.5 litre)
d. Geotextile
e. Temporary fencing
f. Continuous flagging
2. Sampling of soils shall be conducted under the Engineer’s supervision.
C. Method Statement
________________________________________________________________________________________
BACKFILL
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. The Contractor shall provide method statements meeting the requirements of Section
01400, for at least the following activities, or as requested by the Engineer.
a. Structure Excavation, Backfill and Compaction

b. Dewatering Activities
c. Construction of Cofferdams, sheet piling, or shoring
d. Anti-termite treatment, including data on chemical solutions/poisons to be used
and their material safety data sheets.
D. Shop Drawings
1. The Contractor shall submit drawings according to Specificationsfor at least the following
items.
a. Excavation drawings for sloped or stepped sides.
b. Shop drawings and calculations for any bracing and/or shoring required for
excavations.
E. Special Reports
1. Stability investigations and report for stepped or sloped excavations by a qualified
geotechnical Engineer.
2. Design calculation for any bracing, shoring or sheet piling required for excavations, by a
qualified Engineer.
1.07 QUALITY CONTROL
A. “Inspection Requests” shall be submitted to the Engineer during the on site installation
work prior to proceeding with at least the following activities. Minimum notification time
shall be 24 hours.
2. Start of excavation (at new location)
3. Placement of blinding concrete
4. Start of backfilling (at new location)
5. Sampling and testing
B. Testing Laboratory
1. Testing of all materials shall be carried out by a suitably equipped site laboratory or in
an independent laboratory as described in Specifications.
2. During the course of the work, tests shall be carried out under the supervision of the
Engineer, to:
a. Identify fill materials, and determine suitability.
b. Determine compaction characteristics of fill materials.
c. Determine moisture content, and field density.
d. The allowable soil-bearing load shall be verified by dynamic cone penetration test
or as directed by the Engineer.
e. Determine compaction fraction and grading for granular pipe surround.
f. Concrete tests as specified in Section 03300.
3. The Contractor shall maintain a daily log of all tests carried out for the Engineer’s
review.
C. Test Methods
1. Compaction tests to establish maximum dry density for all soils shall be determined by
BS 1377: Part 4: Method 3.5/3.6.
2. In situ density of compacted soils shall be determined by BS 1377: Part 9 Method 2.1
or 2.2 (as appropriate).
3. Cone penetration test TRRL Method or BS 1377.
D. Testing
________________________________________________________________________________________
BACKFILL
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The Contractor shall adjust his operations so as to permit time to make tests and shall
3. A subsequent layer cannot be placed until the density of the preceding layer has been
tested and approved.
4. At least one field density test shall be conducted for each layer at each structure (or every
200m2), unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
5. At least one compaction test (MDD/OMC) shall be conducted for every 30-field density
tests conducted or as directed by the Engineer, due to changes in the soil.
6. At least one complete soil analysis shall be carried out every 1500m 2 or as directed by the
Engineer, due to changes in the soil.
B. Delivery, storage and handling shall be according to the method statement along with the
following provisions:
1. Transportation, handling and stockpiling of fill material shall at all times be performed
in a manner to avoid segregation and contamination.
2. Stockpile materials at least 2.0m away from edge of excavation.
A. See Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIAL
A. Suitable fill material shall consist of excavated material free of rubbish or vegetation and
compliant with the requirements of Specifications.
1. Non-load bearing fill material may be utilised around structures in unpaved service
corridors.
a. Maximum material size directly adjacent to waterproof membranes shall be 75mm.
2. Load bearing fill material shall be utilised around structures in paved areas.
B. If sufficient quantities of suitable excavated material are unavailable, imported borrow

material complying with Specifications, shall be utilised.
2.02 VAPOUR BARRIER
A. Vapour barrier shall be polythene sheeting at least 100microns thick.
2.03 WATER
A. Water used for compacting fill shall be clean and free from oil, grease, organic matter,
suspended fine sediment and other deleterious substances, as approved by the Engineer.
2.04 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT
A. Solution used shall be a chlorpyrifos active ingredient applied strictly as per

manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Capable of offering a minimum of 20 years warranty against termite attack.
C. Equal alternative chemical solutions may be proposed by the Contractor for the Engineer’s
approval.
________________________________________________________________________________________
BACKFILL
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TRIAL HOLES
A. Trial holes shall be excavated to depths sufficient to determine the soil conditions and
confirm the locations of underground utilities or other obstructions.
1. The Contractor shall arrange for the refilling and reinstatement of trial holes to be carried
out immediately after the required information is obtained.
2. Reinstatement of trial holes shall be approved by the Engineer.
3. Excavation and reinstatement of trial holes shall be carried out at the Contractor’s cost.
A. All excavation, construction and backfill of structures shall be carried out in dry
conditions.
B. All dewatering shall comply with Specification section “Dewatering”.
C. Any unprotected structures, which become flooded with ground water shall be removed and
replaced as directed by the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense.
3.03 EXCAVATION FENCING AND FLAGGING
A. Continuous temporary fencing suitable to protect the general public (particularly children)
shall be provided around all excavations in or near urban areas.
1. Temporary fencing shall be provided at no extra cost to the Client.
2. Temporary fencing shall not be removed without the Engineer's permission, which will
not be given until the excavation has been completely refilled.
B. Continuous flagging or barricades shall be provided around all excavations in rural or

undeveloped areas to protect vehicular traffic.
1. Continuous spoil stockpiled around the excavation at least 1.0m high may be accepted
in lieu of flagging with the Engineer’s approval.
C. Contractor shall also provide for the safety of animals, which may gain entry into the
construction area and shall ensure that all open excavations, access routes and steep or
loose slopes arising from the Contractor's operations are adequately fenced and protected.
3.04 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND STABILITY
A. The Contractor shall fully support the sides of all excavations or step back the sides of the
excavations at a safe and stable slope.
1. Support shall include the use of steel sheet piles or other sheeting and shoring to
prevent any fall or run from any portion of the ground into the excavation and to
prevent settlement or damage to structures or utilities adjacent to the excavation.
2. The supporting installation shall be designed to permit gradual withdrawal during the
placement of the backfill.
a. No temporary sheeting or supports shall be left in place, unless otherwise
b. All voids formed while removing sheeting and supports shall be carefully filled and
compacted.
3. Contractor shall be deemed to have made his own allowance for:

a. Shoring up the sides of all excavations.
b. Any extra excavation necessary to provide space for such shoring and working
space.
________________________________________________________________________________________
BACKFILL
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
4. If for any reason any portion of the excavation shall give way, the Contractor shall at
his own expense take all necessary remedial measures, including the excavation and
removal of all the ground thereby disturbed.
B. Where the Contractor elects (and is permitted by the Engineer) to execute excavations with
stepped sides instead of providing support as aforesaid, they shall only be excavated to
stable slopes and heights as recommended in the Contractors approved stability reports.
1. Maximum height of any step shall be 1.5m.
2. Maximum height to width ratio of any step shall be 1.0 to 1.0.
3.05 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS FROM EXCAVATIONS
A. Subject to any other specific requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall make his
own arrangements for the temporary storage of any excavated material, which is required
for use in refilling trench or structure excavations, including any necessary double
handling.
B. The height and slope of any temporary tips alongside the trench excavation must be
stabilised at all times.
C. Where the nature of the material permits, the contractor’s temporary storage facilities shall
allow for separate storage for various grade materials.
D. Any excavated material that is not required or is found to be unsuitable for re-use, shall be
removed from site, and disposed of, in a legal manner, by the Contractor.
3.06 FORMATION LEVEL
A. When excavating to designated formation levels or to specified limits, the Contractor shall
not excavate the last 150mm until immediately before commencing construction work,
unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
B. Should the Contractor have exceeded the above-specified limits before he is ready or able
to commence the construction work, he shall, where required by the Engineer, excavate
further so as to remove not less than 150mm of material immediately before commencing
the construction work.
1. Any such work ordered by the Engineer shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
C. The formation shall be compacted to 95% of MDD as determined by BS 1377: Part 4:

Method 3.5 / 3.6.
3.07 EXCESS EXCAVATION TO BE RESTORED
A. Care shall be taken to prevent excavation below the designated formation level.
1. If the Contractor excavates below the formation level, he shall restore the same with
Grade C20 concrete, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
2. Excess excavation required due to deterioration of soils shall be restored with Grade
C20 concrete, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
3. Overburden removed during excavation, which extended under neat lines of slabs at
changes in elevation shall be restored with Grade C20 concrete.
4. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, remove from the Site all material resulting
from excess excavation below that required for the foundation.
B. No temporary excavation supports shall be left in place. Voids from removal of such
supports shall be filled with Grade C20 concrete, unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer.
C. All voids or changes in elevation below slabs shall be restored up to neat lines with Grade
C20 concrete, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
D. Where, due to site conditions, an alternative method for supporting the foundations or
________________________________________________________________________________________
BACKFILL
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
bedding is proposed, the Contractor shall provide three copies of a design report by a
competent engineer, together with all calculations demonstrating the sufficiency of the
proposals.
1. No alternative proposals shall be undertaken without the Engineer's consent.
2. Such consent shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his contractual
obligations and responsibilities.
3.08 BACKFILLING
A. Placement of backfill shall conform to the following requirements, unless otherwise

1. Backfill shall not be placed until the required foundation coating or membrane has
been completed and the foundation and/or structure to be backfilled has been inspected
and approved by the Engineer.
2. Only suitable fill materials as defined in Part 2 shall be utilised as backfill.
3. All backfill shall have a uniform moisture content within the range of ±3% of optimum
moisture content (OMC).
4. Backfill material shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding 200mm thickness.
5. Backfill adjacent to structures shall be placed and compacted in a manner, which will
prevent damage to the structures or protective membranes.
a. Maximum particle size adjacent membranes or coatings shall be 75mm.
6. Height of the backfill adjacent to structures shall be increased at approximately the

same level on all sides of the structure, to allow structures to assume the loads from
the backfill, gradually and uniformly.
a. Backfilling shall not commence until the concrete in the structure has obtained at
lease 70% of the designated compressive strength.
7. Compaction equipment shall produce the specified compaction, as designated herein.

a. Heavy equipment shall not be operated within 4m of any structure.
b. Vibratory rollers shall not be used within 1.5m of any structure.
c. Vibratory rollers weighing in excess of 4 tonnes (gross) shall not be used around
structures, unless approved by the Engineer.
B. Compaction shall be carried out as follows, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. Each layer of backfill shall be compacted to 95% in paved areas.
2. Each layer of backfill shall be compacted to 90% MDD in unpaved areas.
C. Allowable Tolerances
1. Finished surfaces: +25 mm from specified level, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
D. See 1.07 “Quality Control” for testing requirements.
3.09 VAPOUR BARRIER
A. A vapour barrier (minimum 100 micron thick, polythene sheet) shall be placed below all
floor slabs, unless noted otherwise.
C. Sheeting joints shall be lapped at least 300mm and taped together.
3.10 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT APPLICATION
A. General
1. Anti-Termite treatment shall be carried out only for new buildings.
2. Site shall be well drained and cleared of shrubs, tree roots and debris that could
provide termite food.
________________________________________________________________________________________
BACKFILL
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Timber used during construction of the foundations, such as pegs, formwork, etc.,
must be removed.
b. Termite nests, if discovered, shall be dug up and destroyed.
3. Before constructing foundations for structures, the sides and bottom of excavations
and the soil used for backfilling shall be sprayed with anti-termite chemical solution
B. Treatment
1. Soil under ground slabs
a. After earth filling and compaction of soil, the entire surface shall be treated before
pouring the ground slab with the chemical emulsion at a rate in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Apply solution to all utility openings of pipes, ducts etc.
c. Light rodding may be necessary to facilitate spraying and absorption.
2. Junction of grade walls and floor slabs

a. Rodding to be carried out to soils along the junction of the ground slab and grade
walls in 150mm lifts with a chemical emulsion, sprayed at a rate in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions, so as to mix properly with the soil.
3. Soil along the external wall perimeter

a. After levelling and before paving (where required) is laid, soil along the external
wall perimeter of the building upto a depth of 100mm in a strip of 300 mm width
shall be treated at a rate in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
b. If necessary, rodding at 300mm intervals may be carried out to facilitate spraying
and absorption.
C. Precautions
1. Precautions must be taken not to disturb the treated areas by re-levelling, digging or
earth filling, as this will break the chemical barrier.
2. In case such a situation arises, the area shall again be treated to restore the chemical
barrier.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
BACKFILL
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02321
TRENCH EXCAVATION, PIPE INSTALLATION, BACKFILL AND TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies trench excavation, pipe installation, backfilling operations and testing and
1. General requirements
2. Submittals and samples
3. Quality Control
4. Granular pipe surround
5. Concrete pipe surround
6. Suitable backfill material
7. Geotextile fabric
8. Buried marking tape
9. Service protection ducts
10. Marker posts
11. Trial holes
12. Temporary fencing and flagging
13. Trench support and stability
14. Pipe installation
15. Backfilling
16. Pipe Testing
B. Dewatering Requirements
C. Site Investigation
D. Excavation and Reinstatement in Paved Roads or Parking Areas
A. Submittals
C. Site Safety and Security
D. Field Engineering and Surveying
E. Demolition and Removal
F. Dewatering
G. General Earthwork and Site Preparation
H. Structure Excavation and Backfill
I. Pipeline Construction by Non-Disruptive Methods (Microtunnelling)
J. Service Roads, Parking Areas and Footpaths
K. Cast-In-Situ Concrete
L. Supports and Anchors
M. Carbon Steel Water Pipe
N. Ductile Iron Pipe
O. GRP Pressure Pipe and Fittings
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following references, unless
otherwise specified.
1. BS 812 - Testing Aggregates.
2. BS 1377 - Methods of Test for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02321- 1 TRENCH EXCAVATION, PIPE
INSTALLATION, BACKFILL AND TESTING
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilised in this Section.
1. “Trench excavation” means excavation in all materials of whatever nature encountered for
trenches into which pipes, ducts or cables are to be laid, or appurtenances constructed.
2. “Pipe” means pipe or pipes, bends, fittings, junctions and other specials and fittings and
includes joints, jointing parts and materials.
3. “Formation level” means the designated bottom of the excavation
4. “Pipe surround” shall mean that material which is directly below, around and above the pipe.
5. “MDD” shall mean maximum dry density.
6. “OMC” shall mean optimum moisture content.
7. “Stanks” shall mean concrete barriers placed in granular pipe surround.
8. “Agglomerated particles” shall mean a number of individual particles gathered into a ball or
mass.
9. “DI” shall mean ductile iron.
10. “GRP” shall mean glass fiber reinforced pipe.
11. “CSP” shall mean carbon steel pipe.
A. The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials and equipment necessary for
providing a complete operating system.
B. Responsibility for the safety and soundness of all material shall rest with the
Contractor.
C. Contractor is advised to carry out any tests (at his cost) needed to satisfy himself
regarding the soundness of the pipes, fittings and jointing materials prior to
acceptance testing by the Engineer.
D. Pipe materials to be utilised shall be as shown on the drawings, or as described in
the particular and general specifications.
E. Each type of pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, unless otherwise
accepted by the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
1. No trees or shrubs shall be disturbed without the written consent of the Engineer.
3. All works shall be performed in dry conditions, maintained in accordance with Section
02240.
4. Continuous temporary fencing suitable to protect the general public (particularly children)
shall be provided to enclose all trenches and excavations located in or near urban areas or
where directed by the Engineer.
5. The Contractor shall fully support the sides of all trench excavations, unless the sides are
stepped back at a safe and stable slope.
a. The Contractor shall furnish, before commencement of excavation for any trench,
drawings showing all details of the sheeting and bracing he proposes to use, together
with all relevant calculations prepared by a qualified structural engineer.
b. Where the Contractor proposes to excavate with stepped side slopes instead of providing
sheeting, shoring, etc., the Contractor shall furnish a stability report prepared by a
competent soils engineer, together with all relevant calculations, demonstrating the
sufficiency of his proposals.
c. No excavation work shall commence until the Engineer’s consent has been obtained.
i. Such consent shall in no way relieve the Contractor from any of his contractual
obligations and responsibilities.
6. Trial holes shall be carried out as necessary, to confirm existing soil conditions and
determine exact location of utilities or other obstructions
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Excavations shall be carried out by hand where required or instructed by the Engineer, to
locate and avoid damage to utilities encountered during the excavation work.
7. Line and level of trenches shall be as shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise instructed by
the Engineer.
a. Before commencing the trench excavations, the route of the trench shall be pegged out
accurately and the existing ground level surveyed and recorded, as agreed with the
Engineer.
i. The method utilised to maintain line and level of pipelines shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval.
b. If obstructions are encountered during excavation, the Contractor shall uncover the
obstructions and provide the Engineer drawings and sketches of the actual field
Conditions. The Contractor shall provide As-Built drawings of any revisions
1. The Contractor shall not make any deviation from the specified lines or levels,
without the written approval of the Engineer.
2. Unless instructed by the Engineer, any deviation proposed in line and / or grade,
along with any additional thrust blocks, valves, air and vacuum assemblies, blow off
assemblies, extra pipe lengths, manholes or other appurtenances which may be
required, shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall make necessary trial pits and trenches.
8. When the work is carried out adjacent to or across the line of existing services, the
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all services and utilities.
a. The Contractor shall provide all necessary support or slings to maintain existing
services, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
b. If any utilities are disturbed or damaged, the Contractor shall immediately notify the
relevant authority.
c. The Contractor shall not undertake repairs without the authorisation of the concerned
authority.
d. All costs for such works shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
e. If repairs are carried out by the concerned utility authority, the Contractor shall
reimburse all costs related to such work.
9. All excavated materials shall be used in the backfill, unless the material is found to be
unsuitable.
a. All suitable excavated material not directly incorporated in the work shall be stockpiled
for re-use, in areas approved by the Engineer.
b. Soil utilised for landscaping or agricultural purposes shall be stockpiled separately
c. Unsuitable materials shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor, at his own
expense.
d. Any temporary storage alongside the trench excavation shall be to stable slopes and
heights and deposited in a manner to avoid any damage and to cause as little
inconvenience as possible.
e. The screening of excavated trench material will not be permitted in and around urban
areas, without the written approval of the Engineer.
10. A minimum clear carriage way width as stated in Document II-2 shall be maintained for
vehicular traffic.
11. Bottom of the trenches shall be properly trimmed off and compacted to provide a firm and
uniform bearing at formation level.
a. If loose or unsuitable soil is encountered at formation level, such material shall be
removed as directed by the Engineer and replaced with the designated pipe surround
material.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
12. Only approved granular pipe surround or approved concrete pipe surround may be
utilized as bedding and haunching for the pipe.
a. Pipes shall be placed in granular surround, unless otherwise noted.
13. Trench excavation shall not be permitted until the pipes and fittings to be laid in the
trench are available on Site. The length of excavation in advance of pipe laying may
be limited by the Engineer.
14. The minimum trench width for single line pipes shall be as indicated in BSEN 1452,
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
a. Minimum spacing between two or more pipes in the same trench (laid in parallel with
similar invert level) shall be 500mm.
b. Minimum trench width for conduits and cables shall be made in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant utility authority.
15. If the Engineer considers that the Contractor is not complying with the foregoing
requirements, the Engineer may not permit further trench excavation until he is satisfied
with the pipe laying, pipe testing and backfilling of the excavations.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Approval
1. The Contractor shall submit sufficient information to the Engineer, prior to
purchase, according to Specifications, in order to verify compliance with the
specifications. Such information shall include at least the following, with
relevant information indicated such that indication transfers when photocopied
or with irrelevant information struck out:
a. Manufacturers name.
b. Suppliers name.
c. Product name (if applicable)
d. Product description
e. Manufacturers technical data
f. Storage instructions
g. Application instructions
h. Suppliers name (borrow materials)
i. Borrow pit location
j. Material name (if applicable)
k. Borrow material description
l. MDD and OMC
m. Liquid and Plastic Limits
n. Sieve analysis
o. Percentage of water soluble salts
p. Test results as requested by the Engineer.
B. Samples
1. Samples shall be supplied in sufficient quantities for at least the following
products, or as requested by the Engineer.
a. Granular pipe surround
b. Borrow pit material (if required)
c. Excavated material (if requested)
d. Geotextile
e. Buried marking tape
f. Marker post
g. Pipe wrap
h. Filler board
i. Temporary fencing
j. Continuous flagging
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Sampling of soils shall be conducted under the Engineer’s supervision.
C. Method Statement
1. The Contractor shall provide method statements meeting the requirements of
Section 01400, for at least the following activities or as requested by the
Engineer.
a. Dewatering Activities (if required)
b. Temporary Fencing (as required)
c. General Trench Excavation
d. Pipe Installation
e. Placement of pipe surround
f. Placement of backfill and compaction.
g. Trench excavation and reinstatement in roads.
h. Pipe testing.
i. Chamber construction.
j. Chamber connection.
k. Pipe installation including backfill compaction methods for flexible (CSP, GRP) pipes.
D. Shop Drawings
1. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings according to Specifications for at
least the following items.
a. Excavation drawings showing typical dewatering, temporary fencing and typical trench
cross sections showing stepped or sloped sides.
b. Shop drawings for any sheet piling, bracing or shoring.
c. Manhole and chamber construction builder’s drawings to a scale of 1:100 / 1:50 as
appropriate.
d. Installation details of valves, washouts, air release valves, sleeves, penetrations, thrust
blocks, etc. to a scale of 1:20 or as approved by the Engineer.
e. Calculations and details to support the shop drawings.
E. Special Reports
1. Stability investigations and report for stepped or sloped excavations by a qualified
geotechnical Engineer.
2. Design calculation for any bracing, shoring or sheet piling required for excavations, by a
qualified Engineer.
3. If the Contractor elects to utilize CSP or GRP pipes the Contractor shall submit the required
Analysis Report and obtain approval prior to the submittal of any submittals required herein.
A. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in sufficient time to
allow the Engineer or his representatives to inspect and test products, if so desired.
1. All notifications shall be made by written “Inspection Requests” in accordance with
Section 01400.
a. An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineers office, but the original must arrive
before the scheduled day of inspection.
2. Minimum notification times shall be as follows:

a. 24 hours on site.
b. 72 hours for other areas within Kuwait.
c. 3 weeks outside of Kuwait
B. “Inspection Requests” shall be submitted to the Engineer during the on site installation work
prior to proceeding with at least the following activities. Minimum notification time shall be 24
hours.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Start of excavation in new area.
2. Casting of blinding concrete or placement of bedding.
3. Placing of pipe surround or casting of concrete surround.
4. Pipe testing.
5. Backfilling.
6. Reinforcing Steel for Cast-in-Situ Concrete.
7. Formwork for Cast-in-Situ Concrete.
8. Placing of Cast-in-Situ Concrete
C. Testing Laboratory
1. Testing of all materials shall be carried out by a suitably equipped site laboratory or in an
independent laboratory as described .
2. During the course of the work, tests shall be carried out under the supervision
of the Engineer, to:
a. Identify fill materials, and determine suitability.
b. Determine compaction characteristics of fill materials.
c. Determine moisture content, and field density.
d. The allowable soil bearing load shall be verified by dynamic cone penetration tests, or as
e. Determine compaction fraction and grading for granular pipe surround.
f. Concrete tests as specified.
g. Spark test the interior lining of each pipe joint and fitting and certify that all pieces are
damage free prior to installation in the trench.
3. The Contractor shall maintain a daily log of all tests carried out for the Engineer’s review.
D. Test Methods
1. Compaction tests to establish maximum dry density for all soils shall be determined by BS
1377: Part 4: Method 3.5/3.6.
2. In situ density of compacted soils shall be determined by BS 1377: Part 9 Method 2.1 or 2.2
(as appropriate).
3. Cone penetration test (TRL Method or BS 1377).
4. Compaction fraction for granular surround shall as determined below:
E. Determination of Compaction Fraction

1. General
a. A representative sample of pipe surround material (at least 25kg) shall be obtained,
under the Engineer’s supervision.
2. Apparatus Required
a. An open ended rigid cylinder 250mm3mm long and 150mm6mm internal diameter.
b. Metal rammer with striking face of 40mm dia. 0.5mm and weighing 1000gm to
1100gm
c. Straight edge
d. Rule
e. Balance (minimum 12kg capacity)
3. Test Method
a. Obtain a representative sample more than sufficient to fill the cylinder (about 12kg).
i. The moisture content of the sample shall not differ significantly from that of the
main body of material at the time of its use in the trench.
b. Hold the cylinder firmly down on a flat surface to prevent movement and gently pour the
sample into it, from a height of approximately 50mm above the top of the cylinder,
loosely and without tamping.
c. Strike off the top surface level with the top of the cylinder and remove all surplus spilled
material.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
d. Lift the cylinder up clear of its contents and place on a clean area.
e. Quarter the material and place one quarter of the material back into the cylinder and
tamp vigorously until no further compaction can be obtained.
f. Repeat with the second quarter, tamping as before and so on for the third and fourth
quarter, tamping the final surface as level as possible.
g. Measure down from the top of the cylinder to the surface of the compacted material.
1. Record the value to the nearest 1mm.
h. Divide the measured distance by the height of the cylinder (measured to the nearest
1mm).
i. Report the value as the compaction fraction to the nearest 0.01.
F. Testing
2. Contractor shall adjust his operations so as to permit time to make tests and shall
3. A subsequent layer cannot be placed until the density of the preceeding layer has
been tested and approved.
4. At least one field density test shall be conducted in each layer, for every 100 linear
metres of pipe trench backfilled, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
5. At lease one field density test shall be conducted for each layer, adjacent to each
structure, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
6. At least one compaction test shall be conducted for every 30 field density tests
conducted, or as directed by the Engineer due to changes in the soil.
7. Testing frequency for pipe surround material shall be as directed by the Engineer.
1.08 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS - DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General requirements for delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be as
specified in Section 01600 "Materials and Equipment".
B. Specific requirements shall be as specified in the relevant specification section governing the
manufacture and installation of the material or product in question.
C. Additional requirements may be required as per the manufactures recommendations and/or the
directives of the Engineer.
D. Delivery, storage and handling shall be according to the manufacturer’s recommendations,
together
with the following provisions:
1. Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be performed in a manner to avoid
product damage.
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products. Steel chains, clamps or cables shall
not be allowed for lifting purposes, unless approved by the Engineer.
a. Steel chains or cables may be allowed for securing products during transport or storage,
provided they are not prohibited by the particular pipe specification and protective
padding or timber blocking is utilised.
3. Do not store products directly on ground, unless provided for in the particular pipe
specification or approved by the Engineer.
a. Ensure suitable timber blocking is utilised to provide sufficient support.
4. Where product manufacturer recommends storage under controlled temperatures, the
Contractor must provide an enclosed, insulated, cool store maintained at the proper
temperature (recommended by the manufacturer) 24 hours a day.
5. If stored outside, cover products to prevent UV degradation, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
6. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the
Engineer.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked by the
Contractor and set aside.
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing to the
Engineer for approval.
c. No repairs to damaged products shall be attempted without the Engineer’s approval.
d. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall be removed
from site and replaced at the Contractors expense.
E. Soils shall be stockpiled as follows:

1. At least 2.0m away from edge of trench.
2. Granular pipe surround shall be stockpiled in sufficient quantities and in a manner to avoid
segregation and contamination.
A. See Specifications..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile Iron Pipes shall comply with the requirements of "Ductile Iron Pipes".
B. GRP Pipes shall comply with the requirements of Specifications "GRP Pressure
Pipes and Fittings".
C. Carbon Steel Pipes shall comply with the requirements of Specifications “Carbon
Steel Water Pipes”.
2.02 PIPE SURROUND
A. Pipe surround shall conform to the requirements of this Section and to the requirements of the
specific pipe material specification.
2.03 STEEL FABRICATIONS
A. Steel fabrications as listed below shall comply with the requirements of

Specifications.
1. Ladders and safety cages
2. Gratings and platforms
3. Miscellaneous metal fabrications
2.04 CONCRETE
A. Concrete and accessories shall comply with the specifications.

B. Concrete shall be in accordance with Specifications and the following classes:
1. Class C40FR for bed or haunch or encasement to pipes
2. Class C40FR with nominal 10mm aggregate for benching, minimum 20 mm thick with
smooth hard finish
3. Class C20 for blinding
4. Class C50GBS for Reinforced Concrete works
2.05 CONCRETE LININGS AND COATINGS
A. Concrete linings and protective coatings shall comply with the requirements of Specifications
2.06 WATER PROOFING
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Water proofing shall comply with the requirements of Specifications.
2.07 PIPE BEDDING, HAUNCHING AND SURROUND MATERIAL
A. Granular material shall be a uniformly graded free draining, hard, clean, chemically stable,
aggregate free of agglomerated particles, meeting the following requirements, unless approved
otherwise by the Engineer.
1. For pipes 800mm diameter and less.
a. Nominal size of large aggregate: 10mm
b. Maximum particle size: 16mm,
c. Maximum percentage passing 5mm sieve: 10%
2. For pipes over 800mm diameter

a. Nominal size of large aggregate: 20mm
b. Maximum particle size: 28mm,
c. Maximum percentage passing 10mm sieve: 5%
3. Minimum compaction shall be 90%.
A. Granular pipe surround for flexible pipes (CSP and GRP) shall be in accordance with ASTM
D2321.
1. Class of material shall be in accordance with the Approved Analysis Report as required in the
particular pipe specification.
2.Minimum compaction to 90%.
B. Selected sandy soil shall be clean native sand free of rocks, vegetation, foreign materials and
large agglomerated pieces of sand.
C. Natural soil bedding shall be clean excavated material free of rocks and foreign materials.
2.08 BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Suitable material placed above the pipe surround for general trench backfill (not within paved
roadways or paved parking areas) shall conform to the following requirements, unless otherwise
1. Maximum particle size: 75mm
2. Liquid Limit: 40 Maximum
3. Plasticity Index: 10 Maximum
B. If the excavated material is deemed to be unsuitable or insufficient, for general backfilling,

borrow material (non-load bearing) conforming to Section 02300 “General Earthwork and Site
Preparation” shall be utilised.
C. Backfill material below roadways or parking areas shall be approved sub-base or road base
material as specified.
2.09 GEOTEXTILE
A. Geotextiles for uniform granular pipe surround shall comply with the requirements of Table 1
below, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B. The fabric shall be woven or non-woven consisting of long chain synthetic polymeric filaments or
yarns formed into a stable network, such that the filaments or yarns retain their relative position
to each other when subjected to the proposed use within the limits of physical characteristics
required, as specified herein.
C. The geotextile shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals in the soil and water and shall
contain an ultra violet light inhibitor.
D. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a certificate stating the name of manufacturer,
product name, style number, chemical composition of filaments or yarns and other pertinent
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
information to describe fully the geotextile.
E. Geotextile shall be subject to sampling and testing, to verify conformance with the specification.
1. The frequency of the testing shall be as directed by the Engineer.
2. All samples shall be collected and tested in the presence of the Engineer in a laboratory
F. Each lot of geotextile delivered to the site shall contain a certificate that the material is in
accordance with manufactures certification.
G. Each geotextile roll shall be wrapped with a material that will protect the geotextile from damage
due to shipment, water, sunlight and contaminants.
1. The wrapping shall be maintained during shipment and storage.
H. Geotextiles shall be transported and stored in accordance with the manufacturers

recommendations.
TABLE 1
Geotextiles for Granular Pipe surround
Criteria Standard Limits Units
EN ISO 10319 or ASTM
Tensile strength (strip test) Min 6 KN/m
D5035
Puncture resistance EN ISO 12236 Min 1000 N
Pore size EN ISO 12956 Max 120 Microns
Water permeability 10cm
EN ISO 60500-4 50 to 125 litres/m²/Sec
water column
Weight EN 965 Min 130 G/m²
2.10 MARKING TAPE (BURIED)
A. Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic trace wire or metallic strip for electronic
detection meeting the following criteria:
1. Colour: Yellow or as directed by the Engineer
2. Nominal width: 150mm
3. Nominal thickness: 100 microns
4. Minimum longitudinal tensile strength: 100kg/sq.cm
5. Minimum longitudinal elongation (at break): 300%
6. “Treated Effluent”, as appropriate, in permanent black lettering (30mm height) and
2.0 meter spacing to be imprinted on the tape in Arabic and English.
2.11 SERVICE PROTECTION DUCTS
A. Protection ducts shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) pipe, minimum 100mm
diameter.
1. All pipes and fittings shall be new and unused.
2. Pipe shall be free from visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, deleterious materials,
wrinkles and dents.
3. Plastic pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles or rolls, packaged in such a
manner as to provide adequate protection to pipe and pipe ends from damage or exposure to
sunlight.
4. All plastic pipe fittings to be installed shall be moulded fittings, manufactured from the same
material as the pipe.
5. No site made bends will be permitted.
2.12 FILLER BOARD
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Filler board utilised to form discontinuities in concrete pipe surround shall be one of the
following:
1. Bituminous fibre board
2. Styrofoam.
B. A transverse expansion/movement joint shall be provided at each pipe joint of

compressible expansion joint filler, shaped exactly to the shape of the pipe and the
full extent of the concrete. Unless detailed otherwise on the drawings, the thickness
of this expansion/movement joint shall be a minimum of 25mm except in the case of
full concrete surrounds, where the minimum thickness shall be as follows:
1. Pipes up to 300mm nominal diameter - 25mm
2. Pipes 301 – 600mm nominal diameter - 50mm
3. Pipes 601 – 1200mm nominal diameter - 75mm
4. Pipes greater than 1200 mm nominal diameter - 100 mm or as otherwise specified.
C. For spigot and socket type pipes, the expansion joint in the concrete shall be aligned
with the face of the socket. For flexible detachable sleeve type joints, the expansion
joint filler material shall be positioned on one side of the coupling as shown on the
drawings, but the filler and concrete bed or surround shall only be placed after the
application of the specified corrosion prevention system has been applied to the pipe
ends and joint. No steel reinforcement shall pass through the concrete expansion
joint.
2.13 MARKER POSTS
A. Marker post may be precast concrete or aluminium construction set in concrete.

1. See “Metal Fabrications” for aluminium marker posts.
2. Precast units shall be in accordance with Design Drawings.
2.14 PIPE JOINT WRAP
A. Pipe wrap placed around spigot and socket type pipe joints to prevent backfill material from
entering the joint or around pipes at stanks shall be suitable self-adhesive waterproof membrane
or other self–adhesive tape as approved by the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Underground pipe installation shall be in conformance with AWWA, as modified herein or

B. Trial holes shall be excavated well ahead of the trench excavation operation to depths sufficient to
determine the soil conditions, and confirm the locations of underground utilities or other
obstructions.
1. The Contractor shall arrange for the refilling and reinstatement of trial holes to be carried
out immediately after the required information is obtained.
2. Reinstatement of trial holes shall be approved by the Engineer.
3. Excavation and reinstatement of trial holes shall be carried out at the Contractor’s cost.
A. All activities shall be carried out in dry conditions.

B. All dewatering shall meet the requirements found in “Dewatering”.
3.03 TEMPORARY FENCING AND FLAGGING

________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Continuous temporary fencing suitable to protect the general public (particularly children) shall
be provided to enclose all trenches and excavations in or near urban areas or where directed by
the Engineer.
1. Temporary fencing shall be provided at no extra cost to the Client.
2. Temporary fencing shall not be removed without the Engineer's permission, which will not
be given until the trench excavation has been completely refilled.
B. Continuous flagging or barricades shall be provided along both sides of trenches in rural or
undeveloped areas, to protect vehicular traffic.
1. Continuous trench spoil at least 1.0m high may be accepted in lieu of flagging with the
Engineer’s approval.
C. The Contractor shall also provide for the safety of animals which may gain entry to the
construction area and shall ensure that all open excavations, access routes and steep or loose
slopes arising from the Contractor's operations are adequately fenced and protected.
3.04 TRENCH SUPPORT AND STABILITY
A. The Contractor shall fully support the sides of all trench excavations, unless the sides are stepped
back at a safe and stable slope.
1. Support shall include the use of steel sheet piles or other suitable sheeting and shoring to
prevent any fall or run from any portion of the ground outside the excavation into the trench
and to prevent settlement or damage to structures or utilities adjacent to the excavation.
2. The supporting installation shall be designed to permit gradual withdrawal in successive lifts
corresponding to the placements of each pipe support layer during the placement of the pipe
surround.
a. Supports shall not be removed without the permission of the Engineer.
b. Removal shall be conducted in such a manner as to minimise the danger of collapse.
c. All voids formed behind the supports shall be carefully filled and compacted.
d. Every precaution shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent slips and falls of earth and
other materials in excavations.
3. Contractor shall be deemed to have made his own allowance for:

a. Shoring up the sides of trenches
b. Any extra excavation necessary to provide space for such support and for any other
working space.
4. If in the opinion of the Engineer, the support provided by the Contractor is not satisfactory,
the Contractor shall provide trench support as directed by the Engineer.
a. The absence of the Engineer’s direction or action by the Contractor in accordance with
the direction of the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the
Contract.
5. Underpinning, supports or other protection measures required for buildings, structures and
apparatus or adjoining excavations, shall be provided by the Contractor as approved by the
Engineer.
a. If directed by the Engineer, a method statement shall be submitted by the Contractor for
the Engineer’s approval.
6. If for any reason any portion of the trench excavation shall give way, the Contractor shall, at
his own expense, take all necessary remedial measures, including the excavation and removal
of all soil thereby disturbed.
B. Where the Contractor elects (and is permitted by the Engineer) to execute trench excavations with
stepped sides instead of providing support as aforesaid, the stepped sides shall only be excavated
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
to stable slopes and heights as recommended in the Contractors approved stability reports.
1. Maximum height of any step shall be 1.5m.
2. Maximum height to width ratio of any step shall be 1.0 to 1.0.
3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND REINSTATEMENT IN ROADS
A. Refer to Specifications.
3.06 TRENCH FORMATION
A. When excavating to designated formation levels or to specified limits, the Contractor shall not
excavate the last 150mm until immediately before commencing construction work, unless
1. If, the Contractor excavates the last 150mm before he is ready or able to commence the work,
he may be required to remove and replace additional material as directed by the Engineer.
a. Any such further excavation and replacement of additional foundation material ordered
by the Engineer shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
B. Should the trench bottom, while acceptable to the Engineer at the time of his inspection,
subsequently become puddled, soft or loose due to exposure or flooding during the progress of the
works, the Contractor shall remove such damaged softened or loosened material and replace it
with approved material as directed by the Engineer.
1. Any such further excavation and replacement of additional foundation material
ordered by the Engineer shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
C. Any stones or flints greater than 50mm in size shall be picked out of the trench bottom. Any
holes so formed shall be filled in with suitable material and trimmed to the correct level.
D. All shattered and loose materials shall be removed from the bottom of the trench
excavations so that the pipe surround rests on a solid and clean foundation.
E. The trench formation shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% MDD as
determined by BS 1377: Part 4: Method 3.5/3.6, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
F. In-Situ density tests shall be carried out to BS 1377; Part 9: Method 2.1 or 2.2
as appropriate.
3.07 TRENCH WIDTHS FOR FLEXIBLE PIPES - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Because flexible pipes rely in part on the surrounding soil to resist the development
of excessive deflections, it may be necessary, where trenches pass through soft
ground, to increase the trench width and replace the soft native soil with imported
material, or to introduce other measures to limit the pipe deflection. All such
measures shall be carried out as the work proceeds and the Contractor shall be
deemed to have included for the cost of all such work in his Tender.
B. The Approved Analysis Report required to be developed by the Contractor, if the
optional CSP or GRP pipe is furnished and installed, shall detail the methods to be
followed.
3.08 EXCESS EXCAVATION
A. Care shall be taken to prevent excess excavation beyond designated levels or limits.
1. Any excess excavation from the bottom or sides of the trench shall be filled with the
designated pipe surround material, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall utilise or remove from the Site all material resulting from excess
excavation.
3. Any additional cost due to over excavation shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3.09 SPECIAL BEDDING ARRANGEMENTS
A. Where soil is deemed to be unstable, special arrangements as mentioned below, may be required
by the Engineer.
1. Additional soils investigation and analysis
2. Replacement of unsuitable soil by granular fill or concrete.
3. Soil improvement methods
4. Reinforced Concrete slab foundation
5. Piled foundations.
B. No special arrangements shall be made without the Engineer’s approval.
3.10 TRENCHES NOT TO BE LEFT OPEN
A. Trench excavation and backfill shall be carried out expeditiously.

1. Refilling and surface reinstatement of trench excavations shall be commenced and
completed as soon as reasonably practicable, after the pipes have been laid and
jointed.
2. Pipe laying shall follow closely upon the progress of trench excavation.
3. Contractor shall not permit unreasonably excessive lengths of trench excavation to
remain open.
a. Trench excavation may not proceed more than 200m ahead of the pipe laying operations,
unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent flotation of pipes in locations where open trench
excavations may become flooded.
1. If floatation has occurred, the Contractor shall remove and replace the pipes after drying the
trench, unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
a. All additional work will be carried out at the Contractor’s cost.
C. If the Engineer considers that the Contractor is not complying with any of the foregoing
requirements, he may prohibit further trench excavation until he is satisfied with the progress of
laying and testing of pipes and refilling of trench excavation.
3.11 PLACING PIPE SURROUND
A. Pipe bedding, haunching and surround shall be of the type shown in the Typical
Drawings for the type of pipe utilized and in accordance with the Approved
Analysis Report for CSP and GRP pipes, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
B. Select Sandy Soil Pipe surround shall be placed as follows when required by the
Typical Drawings, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer or required by the
Approved Analysis Report.
1. Select Sandy Soil shall be placed in shallow lifts and compacted to minimum 90
percent MDD.
2. Care shall be taken to prevent movement of the pipe when compacting and
surround shall be brought up on each side of the pipe equally.
C. Pipe shown to be bedded in Natural Soil in the Typical Drawings shall be set in a minimum of
100mm thick bed of Natural Soil Bedding lightly compacted.
1. Bell holes shall be provided to ensure that the pipe barrel is properly supported.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
D. Granular Pipe Surround shall be placed as follows when required by the Typical Drawings, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer:
1. Approved geotextile shall be placed completely around all uniform granular pipe
surround if laid below the ground water.
a. The trench formation shall be smooth and free from debris.
b. The geotextile shall be placed loosely with no wrinkles or folds.
c. Void spaces shall not be left between the geotextile and ground surface.
d. Successive sheets of geotextile shall be overlapped a minimum of 300mm with the
upstream sheet overlapping the downstream sheet.
e. The geotextile shall be folded over the pipe surround material in a manner to produce a
minimum overlap of 500mm.
f. If the geotextile is damaged during installation or aggregate placement, a geotextile
patch shall be placed over the damaged area extending a minimum distance of 300mm
beyond the damaged area.
g. Placement of bedding material shall proceed immediately following the placement of
geotextile.
2. Granular pipe surround shall be placed across the full width of the excavated
trench.
3. Soft spots at the bottom of the trench excavation shall be removed to a depth
of 300mm or to a solid ground whichever is less and the resulting voids shall be
backfilled with approved granular pipe surround.
4. The thickness of granular pipe surround shall be 200mm minimum, below the pipe
barrels.
5. Granular pipe surround material shall be compacted in layers not exceeding
200mm with minimum one pass of plate vibrator or other approved equivalent
mechanical method.
a. Hand tamping shall only be permitted where insufficient space is available to allow the
use of mechanical equipment.
b. Granular pipe surround shall be brought up equally on both sides of the pipe and
carefully compacted in layers not exceeding 200mm thickness.
c. Ensure pipe surround is in contact with the under side of the pipe barrel.
d. The pipe surround material shall extend to at least 300mm above the crown of pipe.
6. Particular care shall be given to avoid damage to pipe or geotextile.
7. Granular pipe surround shall be placed around the pipes immediately after joining.
8. The placing and compaction of backfill material shall be carried out in sequence
with the removal of trench supports, unless the Contractor is instructed by the
Engineer to leave them in place.
C. Concrete Pipe Surround:

1. Where indicated on the Drawings, or ordered by the Engineer, pipe shall be encased with
concrete in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
2. Concrete shall not be placed until the joints at each end of the pipe have been completed.
a. All joints shall be wrapped with a suitable self-adhesive membrane at least 300mm wide,
to prevent grout entry into the joint.
b. The pipes shall be initially supported above the trench bottom on at least two purpose
built pre-cast concrete saddles.
c. The blocks shall be laid accurately to line and level and covered with 1.5mm thick
waterproof sheeting beneath the pipe barrel or two hard wood wedges of approved
pattern.
3. Concrete surround shall be placed in a sufficient number of lifts to prevent pipes from
floating or moving.
a. The concrete shall first be placed on one side of the pipe in order to be worked under the
pipe along its full length to ensure that no voids develop.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
b. The concrete shall then be brought up equally on both sides of the pipe until the required
level is reached.
4. If the surround is cast in one operation, measures shall be taken to secure the pipe
from floating or moving. These measures must be approved by the Engineer prior
to the start of the operation.
5. The continuity of the concrete pipe surround shall be broken at each joint, unless
6. Discontinuities in concrete pipe surround shall be provided over their full cross
sectional area at each pipe joint with approved filler board.
7. Cure concrete with polythene sheeting for at least 24 hours, immediately after
placement.
3.12 GENERAL TRENCH BACKFILLING
A. General trench backfill pertains to all areas outside paved roadways and paved parking areas.
1. These areas include, but are not limited to, service corridors, landscaped areas,
undeveloped areas, non-asphalted roads, lanes, alleys and all private lands.
2. Backfilling of trenches shall commence as soon as practicable after the pipe line
works have been completed, tested and approved by the Engineer.
3. No fill material shall be placed and no compaction shall be permitted adjacent to
concrete structures, until 70% of the designated compressive concrete strength has
been reached.
B. Suitable material for general trench backfill shall comply with the requirements
found in Part 2 of this Specification.
C. Any soils utilised for landscaping shall be replaced in their original position and
condition.
D. Backfill material shall be compacted to at least 90% MDD, as determined by BS
1377: Part 4; Method 3.5/3.6.
1. In-situ density test shall be carried out to BS 1377: Part 9; Method 2.2.
2. Maximum thickness of each loose lift shall be 250mm.
3. Moisture content shall be maintained within the range of ±3% of the optimum.
E. Testing
1. See “Quality Control”.
F. Allowable Tolerances
1. Finished non-paved surfaces: + 25 mm from specified level, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
3.13 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements
1. Contractor shall supply all necessary tools for cutting, chamfering, jointing, testing and for
any other requirement for satisfactory installation of the pipe.
2. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment for properly lowering and placing
sections of the pipe in the trench, without damage.
3. Just before laying, each length of pipe shall be cleaned and inspected for defects, both inside
and outside.
4. Any damaged pipes or fittings shall be marked and put aside for repair.
a. Proposals for any pipe repairs shall be presented for the Engineer’s approval, prior to
action being taken.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Any specified material required for the repair of pipe, sheathing, lining or coating shall
be obtained by the Contractor and shall be used in accordance with the Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
c. All sheathed pipes shall be checked for continuity of the applied protection by a
"Holiday" detection unit.
d. Discontinuities and pinholes indicated by the test shall be properly repaired.
e. All damages shall be repaired before installation.
5. The Contractor shall remove from the Site any pipe or appurtenance, which in the
opinion of the Engineer is so damaged as to be unfit for incorporation in the Works.
6. Replacement for damaged pipes or fittings shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
7. Each pipe shall be carefully lowered on to its prepared bed by means of appropriate slings
and tackle.
8. A recess shall be left in the prepared bed to permit lifting slings to be withdrawn.
9. If the prepared bed is damaged, the pipe shall be raised and the bed restored before pipe
laying is continued.
10. In no case shall non-welded joint pipes be jointed before being lowered into position.
11. Internal and external coatings on welded joint pipe welded above the trench shall be repaired
and tested after welding is complete before the pipe is lowered into the trench.
12. No pipe shall be dragged or rolled into place for lowering into the trench.
13. Pipes shall be laid so that each one is in contact with the bed throughout the
length of its barrel.
a. The bed shall be cut away and removed at each socket or sleeve to give a clearance
of 50mm.
b. After the joint has been made bedding material shall be carefully placed and hand
compacted beneath the joint barrel to close any voids left.
14. Pipes shall be laid with identification marks uppermost.

a. Bedding material shall be prevented from entering the joints.
b. Pipe shall be jointed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations except as
modified in this Section.
15. Each Section of pipe shall be fitted together correctly and shall be laid true to line and grade
in accordance with the bench marks established by the Contractor.
a. The bench mark shall be approved by the Engineer.
16. Any pipe which is not in true alignment, both vertically and horizontally, or shows any
undue settlement after laying, shall be taken up and relaid correctly by the Contractor at his
own expense.
17. For granular pipe surround, all adjustments in line and grade shall be made by scraping away
or filling and tamping under the barrel of the pipe; not by wedging or blocking.
18. Spigot and socket pipes shall normally be laid with the socket end upgrade.
19. Sub-soil water shall be kept below the joint when jointing, in accordance with Section 02240.
20. Pipes shall be laid in straight lines, both in the horizontal and vertical planes, unless
deflected joints are approved by the Engineer.
a. For pipe lines laid in trenches, the permissible tolerance shall be as follows, unless
otherwise shown on the drawing detailed in the particular pipe specification or approved
by the Engineer.
i. Vertical deviation: 3mm
ii. Horizontal deviation from the centreline at any point: 12mm.
21. Whenever work ceases on any pipeline, the unfinished end shall be securely closed with a
tight fitting plug or cover, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
22. Excavator buckets shall not be used to push joints home.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
23. Pipe sections shall be so laid and fitted together that the pipeline will have a smooth and
uniform interior.
24. Pipeline shall be clean and unobstructed at the time of its completion and acceptance.
25. If any damage should occur to any pipes through failure of the Contractor to comply with
these conditions, the damage shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
26. All pipelines adjoining structures shall have a flexible joint, as detailed on the drawings,
adjacent to each structure unless recommended otherwise in the Approved Analysis Report.
27. For pipeline jointing systems incorporating flexible jointing rings a gap shall be left between
the ends of the pipe, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
B. Gasketed Joints
1. Requirements of this clause shall be read in conjunction with the particular requirements
specified elsewhere for joints of particular kinds.
2. Joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and as specified
herein.
3. Before making any joints the Contractor shall ensure that the interior of each pipe or fitting
is clean and that it remains clean.
4. Immediately before starting a joint, the Contractor shall clean the end of each pipe to be
joined and shall otherwise specially prepare the ends for jointing as may be necessary for the
particular kind of joint.
5. The Contractor shall use only the proper jointing materials (gaskets, lubricants, nuts, bolts,
washers, etc.) as specified for pipe service and exposure conditions, as obtained from the
designated supplier.
6. All joints shall be accurately made and shall be capable of passing the designated tests for
individual joints and for the completed pipeline as may be specified.
7. Graphite grease or approved shall be applied to the threads of bolts before mechanical or
flanged joints are made.
8. After completing a joint, any damaged paint or coating shall be restored, and any metal joint which is not already coated
shall be cleaned and coated, in accordance with Division 9.
9. Additional external protection of joints, where ordered by the Engineer, shall be carried out
as specified herein, under External Protection of Joints.
10. Anchorage of Joints at Bends and Discontinuities
a. Anchorage lugs shall be provided for socket and spigot fittings and socket clamps and tie
rods used on all pipes under pressure.
b. Concrete thrust blocks may be used in lieu of the above where socket and spigot pipe is
used below ground subject to the availability of adequate space and approval of the
Engineer.
11. External Protection of Joints

a. Unless otherwise specified, all metallic mechanical joints, flanged joints, ferrule and
saddle straps, in buried applications, shall be protected on site by the cold application of
an approved tape wrap.
b. The application of tape with accessories and outwraps shall be strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations and at no additional cost to the Ministry.
C. Closures and Short Sections:

1. For the purpose of reducing the angular deflections at pipe joints, and for closure sections,
the Contractor may be permitted to install pipe sections of less than standard length, with the
Engineers approval.
2. Closing pieces and short sections of pipe shall be installed by the Contractor as deemed
necessary in the field, at no additional cost to the Ministry.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for taking the measurements required, to determine the
lengths of cut portions of pipes for insertion as closing lengths in pipelines.
4. Pipe and methods of jointing shall be such that the locations of fittings and lengths of pipe
can be adjusted in the field to suit field conditions and variations in stationing.
5. No extra payment will be made for such adjustments, nor for any welding, couplings, fittings,
or special lengths required to meet this requirement.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
6. A reasonable tolerance in the location of lines, fittings, and appurtenances will be permitted
by the Engineer, to enable the minimum use of special lengths.
7. Cutting of pipes for inserting specials, fittings or closure pieces shall be carried out
in a professional manner with an approved cutting machine described below in order
to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
a. Cutting Ring for ND 100 to 150
b. Cutting Chain for ND 100 to 450
c. Disc cutter for all diameters if approved by the Engineer.
d. The cut ends of all pipes shall be properly chamfered.
e. The Contractor shall take every precaution to ensure that both the measurements and the
cutting of pipes are to the accuracy required.
1. Should any errors occur, the Contractor shall remedy the same, as the Engineer
directs, at his own expense.
D. Building-in Pipes:
1. All buried pipes built into a concrete wall or structure shall be provided with two
flexible joints adjacent to the structure.
a. Unless otherwise detailed on the drawings, the first joint shall be within 300mm from the exterior face of
the structure and the second a further 1000mm away.
2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, pipes constructed into a concrete wall or structure
shall be protected with a concrete surround, integral with the external face of the structure as
shown on the Drawings.
3. All internal and external protection membranes to the concrete shall be sealed around the
pipe openings as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
4. Any over-excavation beneath the foundation level of a structure and/or beneath the formation
level of a pipeline, either to be constructed under the contract or in a future contract, shall be
backfilled with Grade C20 concrete.
E. Pipe Supports:
1. Pipe hangers and supports shall be as specified in Section 15061.
F. Deflection at Curves
1. If approved by the Engineer, a change of direction in either the horizontal or vertical planes
may be made by deflecting straight pipes, provided the amount of joint deflection does not
exceed 75% of the manufacturers recommended maximum value and subject to satisfactory
performance of the joints.
2. Where a change of direction cannot be made by deflection at the joints of ordinary straight
pipes, bends shall be used.
a. Locations of such bends and other specials are indicated on the Drawings and their exact
positions will be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
b. All pressure pipelines shall be secured at all changes in direction by
concrete anchor blocks and or by the provision of restrained joints.
G. Cleanliness of Pipelines:
1. Pipeline and chambers shall at all times be kept free of all silt, mortar, debris, trash and other
obstructions.
2. During and after construction the Contractor shall take reasonable measures,
including the provision of stoppers, plugs and headwalls where appropriate, to
prevent the ingress of deleterious matter into pipelines.
3. The Contractor shall clean the interior of each pipe joint as it is laid and install
temporary closure pieces on the ends of the pipeline whenever work is stopped
or disrupted to keep the pipeline clean.
4. Pressure lines shall be flushed with water until all silt and sand is removed and the line flows
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
clean prior to hydrostatic pressure testing.
3.14 TESTING OF PIPELINES GENERAL
A. For the purposes of inspection and testing, the term 'pipelines' includes those laid in
heading or by pipe- jacking or microtunnelling or similar techniques.
B. Pipelines shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test in sections not exceeding 1000
meters during the installation as sections are completed and a final test once the
pump stations and reservoirs in SE/97 and main transmission lines in SE/96 are
operational and the distribution system has been commissioned.
C. Prior to commencement of flushing or testing, approval shall be obtained to the
quality and methods of providing and disposing of all fluids used for flushing or
testing purposes.
D. If permission is given to use new or existing pipelines or culverts which are not part
of a live system, they shall be thoroughly cleaned of all silt and any resulting damage
made good after use.
E. If lagoons for the storage of such fluids are permitted, they must be suitably
protected with fencing and attended by day and night to prevent access by the
general public and will not be sited adjacent to buildings. Approved means of
preventing the formation of mosquito larvae on the surface of the lagoons will be
employed.
F. Testing of pipelines shall in all cases be carried out in the presence of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide complete plant and all struts, thrust blocks, etc., as
may be necessary for effectively testing the pipelines to the specified pressures.
G. Only testing of new or replaced sections of pipelines and fittings will be required
under the Contract, in accordance with this Specification, unless detailed otherwise.
Such testing will be carried out before making final connections to the existing
network. However, where tees or other fittings are inserted into existing pipelines,
and where lengths of pipeline are replaced, no backfilling will be allowed at the tees
or fittings or at the joints between new and existing pipework until the pipeline has
been returned to service and a visual inspection of all such fittings and joints made
with the network under pressure.
H. Should any inspection be unsatisfactory or any test fail, the Contractor shall replace
defective pipes, leaking joints or otherwise re-execute defective work as instructed,
following which, cleaning and testing will be repeated until the Engineer certifies
the pipeline to be satisfactory.
I. The Contractor shall take care that during periods of rainfall or flooding of trenches
from other causes, lengths of completed pipelines which have not been backfilled
may be subject to flotation. He shall take precautions and measures to avoid any
such flotation. If pipelines are subject to flotation they shall be removed and
completely relaid to the Engineer's satisfaction.
J. General
1. The Contractor shall submit a method statement in accordance with Section 01400
for the Engineer's approval, covering details of his proposed methods and
programme for testing (including details of test equipment).
2. The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials and supplies necessary for carrying out
testing and cleaning including water, pumps, gauges, piped connections, stop ends and all
other temporary works. The Contractor shall also include details for the disposal of water
used for hydrostatic testing and for safety provisions to be used during air testing.
3. Gauges used for testing pressure pipelines shall either be of conventional circular type, not
less than 300mm diameter, calibrated in bars, or shall have a digital indicator capable of
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
reading increments of 0.1 bar.
4. Before any gauge is used, the Contractor shall arrange for it to be checked independently and
a recent certificate of its accuracy shall be provided to the Engineer.
a. One additional gauge as above shall be handed over to the Engineer’s representative for
purposes of verification during testing.
b. The Contractor shall calibrate pressure gauges at regular intervals, as required by the
Engineer, at no additional cost to the Ministry.
5. Pipelines shall be properly secured and supported before being put under test.
a. At pipe ends, provide for transmitting the end thrust into the sides of the trenches.
b. Ensure that anchorage of bends is sufficient and thrusts from all branch outlets are
properly restrained.
6. No testing will be permitted until ten days after thrust blocks and other holding
down works have been completed, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
7. Trenches may not be left open at joints prior to testing pipelines, except as
permitted by the Engineer, who may lay down certain restricting conditions.
8. The Contractor may at any stage of construction carry out such tests as he
considers desirable, to check materials and workmanship on the pipeline.
a. This shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to complete all testing designated
under the Contract.
9. All water required for testing and cleaning the pipelines shall be irrigation water and
shall be provided to the Contractor at DMC at no cost. The Contractor shall bear
all costs associated with the transport of the water from DMC to the site.
10. The Engineer shall have power to require the Contractor to vary any test procedure or
pressure, as the Engineer thinks fit, at no extra cost to the Ministry.
11. The Contractor shall submit an inspection request to the Engineer, in accordance with Clause
1.07 "Quality Control" to test a section of pipeline, after having satisfied himself that the
section of pipeline to be tested in the presence of the Engineer is satisfactory in all aspects.
12. The Contractor should note that neither the satisfactory testing of a pipeline, section
of a pipeline or any other pipework, nor the acceptance of such testing by the
Engineer or his representative, shall in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibilities and obligations under the Contract.
13. When leakage exceeds the amount allowed by the specifications, the Contractor
shall, at his own expense, make the necessary repairs or replacements in accordance
with the specifications, to reduce the leakage to the specified limits.
14. Any individual detectable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the results of the
test, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
3.15 TESTING OF PRESSURE MAINS
A. All pressure mains shall be hydrostatically tested in sections not exceeding 1000 metres in length.
1. Pressure testing against valves:
a. The Contractor should note that since valves cannot be guaranteed to be perfectly
driptight, testing against closed valves connected to existing or operating systems shall
not be allowed, unless specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing. Testing
against other closed valves (including air valves) not so connected may be attempted if
desired provided the valves are suitably anchored against thrust.
b. No claims will be entertained on account of leaking valves, or any other difficulties
encountered, including the isolation of certain lengths of pipework for testing.
2. The test pressure shall be such that the section being tested is subjected to a minimum test
pressure of 1035 kPa (150 psig) or 1.5 times the system operating pressure, which ever is
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
greater.
3. Line valves (other than an end valve being used as a stop during the test) shall be in the open
position during the test.
3. If the pipeline fails to pass the test, the faults shall be located and repaired and the pipeline
retested until it passes the pressure test at no additional cost to the Ministry.
5. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints shall be visually inspected during the tests and
tested by swabbing with a dry tissue. Any visible leakage shall be repaired regardless of the
volume.
6. In addition to any tests of individual joints, hydrostatic tests or other interim tests which may
be specified, the Contractor shall submit all parts of the pipelines to a final test.
B. The Contractor shall maintain an official log book for recording tests carried out, including
section of piping, diameter, length, test pressure, amount of make-up water required, date,
weather conditions, name of Contractor’s person in responsible charge of conducting the test and
signatures of the Contractor’s Project Manager and Contractor’s person in responsible charge of
conducting the test.
C. System shall not be over pressurised under any circumstances. If the test pressure is close to the
maximum permissible pressure of any of the system component a calibrated pressure relief
valve(s) shall be installed in the tested circuit.
3.16 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TESTING OF PRESSURE LINES
A. All pressure lines in the system shall be given a hydrostatic pressure test after
backfilling.
1. Unless noted otherwise, all pressure tests shall be conducted at 1.5 times the
operating pressure or the maximum shut-off head of the pumps, whichever is
higher, but in no case at a pressure greater than the working pressure of the inline
valves.
B. Pipeline shall be divided into sections of not more than 1000meters, unless
C. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed procedures for performing

hydrostatic pressure tests for installed piping, fittings, valves, meters and
appurtenances.
D. If required, suitable stop ends (section of steel pipe about 0.5-1.0m long onto which
a closing plate has been welded) containing the necessary openings for
accommodating in-going water and out-coming air may be utilized during the test.
1. Stop end may also include an opening through which the test water may be pumped
from the line, if necessary.
2. Stop end may be jointed to the pipe to be tested by means of a standard coupling,
or other method approved by the Engineer.
3. Thrust blocks or temporary anchorages shall be provided to hold the stop end in
place against the test pressure.
4. Design of stop end shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code.
5. Contractor may also use proprietary restrained joints in lieu of thrust blocks.
E. Procedures for performing hydrostatic pressure tests for the pipeline shall form part
of the Contractor’s Method Statement and shall include as a minimum:
1. Location and capacity of the test pump.
2. Test pressure at the pump as well as that at the highest and lowest points.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Procedures for venting the air from the pipeline.
4. Disposal of the water after satisfactory testing.
F. Each pipeline or section thereof shall be filled with water and all air removed as far
as possible.
1. If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, the Contractor shall install
suitable cocks at such points, so that the air can be expelled as the line is filled with
water.
G. Line shall be filled slowly to prevent possible water hammer.

H. Test pump and gauge shall be connected to the pipeline at a location other than the
highest point in the line, to facilitate the release of air from the highest point.
I. After filling and before application of the test pressure, maintain the test section at
the rated pressure for a standing period of not less than 8 hours, to achieve
conditions as stable as possible for testing.
1. The standing period will commence from the time at which the rated pressure was
reached successfully.
2. If neither appreciable movement of the pipeline, nor any leakage has been observed
during the standing period, the section shall be subjected to the specified test
pressure.
J. Should a test fail, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace defective pipes
or fittings, repair leaking joints or otherwise rectify defective work.
K. Cleaning, inspection and testing shall then be repeated until the work is accepted by
the Engineer, at no extra cost to the Ministry.
3.17 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TESTING EQUIPMENT
A. Provide calibrated, 150mm (6-inch) diameter face pressure gauges and a chart recorder, pipes,
bulkheads, pumps, and calibrated meters to perform the hydrostatic testing. Use laboratory
calibrated test gauges and meters, which shall be calibrated by a certified laboratory prior to the
test.
3.18 HYDROSTATIC TESTING PREPARATION
A. Conduct pressure tests on exposed and above ground piping after the piping has been installed
and attached to the pipe supports, hangers, anchors, expansion joints, valves and meters. All
pressure pipelines shall be tested, including piping and valves inside of structures. No pressure
test is required for vent overflow and buried blowoff piping.
B. Conduct pressure tests on buried piping after the trench has been completely backfilled.
C. Provide any temporary piping needed to carry the test fluid to the piping that is to be tested. After
the test has been completed and demonstrated to comply with the specifications, disconnect and
remove temporary piping.
D. Provide temporary drain lines needed to carry testing fluid away from the pipe being tested.
Remove such temporary drain lines after completing the pressure testing.
3.19 FINAL CLEANING
A. In pipelines less than 600 mm in diameter, before conducting hydrostatic tests, flush pipes with
water to remove dirt and debris. Maintain a flushing velocity of at least 1 mps. Flush pipes for
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
the minimum time period as given by the formula below and as required to thoroughly clear the
pipeline of dirt and debris.
T = 2L
Where:
T = flushing time (seconds)
L = pipe length (meters)
B. In pipes 600 mm or larger in diameter, clean the pipe using high-pressure water jet, sweeping,
scrubbing, or equally effective means. All water, sediment, dirt and foreign material accumulated
during this cleaning operation shall be discharged, vacuumed, or otherwise removed from the
pipe.
3.20 INITIAL PIPELINE FILLING FOR HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Control maximum rate of filling to prevent water velocity in pipeline from exceeding 0.30 mps (1
fps). Filling may be facilitated by removing and replacing automatic air valves and releasing air
manually.
3.21 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF ABOVE GROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING

A. Open vents at high points of the piping system to purge air while the pipe is being filled with
water. Subject the piping system to the test pressure specified herein. Maintain the test pressure
for a minimum of 24 hours. Examine joints, fittings, valves and connections for leaks. The
piping system shall show zero leakage or weeping. Repair leaks and retest until zero leakage is
obtained. Air and vacuum valves shall be in place and operational in case of pipe failure during
testing.
3.22 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF BURIED PIPING
A. Where any section of the piping contains concrete thrust blocks or encasement, do not pressure
test until at least 10 days after the concrete has been poured.
B. Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a hydraulic force pump. The pressure shall be
raised in increments with a minimum standing period of 10 minutes between each pressure
increment.
C. Maintain the test pressure for the following duration by restoring it whenever it falls an amount
of 35 kilo pascals:
Pipe Diameter (mm) Hours

450 and less 4
500 to 900 8
Greater than 900 24
D. After the test pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water to maintain the
pressure. This amount of water is the loss due to leakage in the piping system. The allowable
leakage rate for rubber ring gasketed pipelines is defined by the formula:
L = HND(P) 1/2
C
Where:
H = specified test period (hours)
L = allowable leakage (liters)
N = number of rubber-gasketed joints in the pipe tested
D = diameter of the pipe (mm)
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
P = specified test pressure (bar)
C = 40,133
E. The allowable leakage for welded steel pipe shall be zero liters.
F. The allowable leakage for buried piping having threaded, brazed or welded (including solvent
welded) joints shall be zero liters.
G. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage rates greater than that allowed in the above criteria.
3.23 REPETITION OF HYDROSTATIC TEST
A. If the actual leakage exceeds the allowable, locate and correct the faulty work and repeat the tests
at the Contractor’s expense. Restore the work and repair damage resulting from the leak and its
repair. Eliminate visible leakage.
3.24 BULKHEAD AND TEST FACILITY REMOVAL AFTER FINAL TEST
A. After a satisfactory test, remove test bulkheads and other test facilities, restore the pipe lining and
coatings, and fill the pipeline section tested with water and maintain it full until pipeline is
placed in service. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for damage to the pipeline as a result
of pressure imposed during the operations of filling the pipeline with water and conducting the
tests.
3.25 FINAL COMMISSIONING
A. The Contractor shall commission the system once water is available from the Wafra Pump Station
and Service Reservoir Facility.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate with SE/96 and SE/97 to schedule the commissioning activities.
C. The Contractor shall include in his rate for Final Commissioning any cost associated with
returning to the site for commissioning if SE/98 completes ahead of SE/96 and SE/97.
D. The Contractor shall submit a Method Statement on the procedures to be followed during
commissioning. The Method Statement shall include at least the following activities.
1. Coordination activities between the various Contractors (SE/96, SE/97 and any other
impacted).
2. Method to insure that all air/vacuum valves are functioning.
3. Farm Connection chambers are properly functioning.
4. All system valves are set in the proper position (open/close).
3.26 FINAL TEST
A. The Contractor shall subject the system to a final test after commissioning.
B. The Contractor shall submit a Method Statement for the Final Test which shall include forms for
recording all data obtained during the test.
C. The Final test shall be conducted as follows.
1. Visually examine all chambers and farm connections for signs of leakage or broken
or missing components.
D. Test all system valves for operation under working pressure..
1. Valves shall be adjusted so that they operate smoothly, seat properly and are installed to
tolerances recommended by the manufacturer.
2. A precedent to the issue of a Certificate of Completion shall be that all valves in the pipeline
shall have been satisfactorily operated under working pressure and the pipelines shall have
been successfully pressure tested and cleaned.
E. Inspect all air/vacuum vales to insure that they are working properly.
F. Record all observations on the forms developed in the Method Statement to form a
permanent record of the Final Test.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3.25 CHAMBERS AND OTHER STRUCTURES
A. General
1. For any pressure mains within the system, valve chambers and/or junction chambers
shall be constructed at each intersection with other pipes and at other points as
shown on the Drawings.
2. Concrete work shall not begin until the pipe fittings to be cast into the chamber
walls are on site.
a. Thereafter the chamber shall be cast, water-proofed and backfilled as quickly as possible.
b. No. "box outs" will be allowed.
1. All pipes cast into chamber walls shall be fitted with a temporary internal "jig" to
ensure that proper alignment and flange orientation is maintained between all
interconnecting pipes and fittings during casting
a. Jigs may be made from uPVC pipes, HDPE pipes or steel tubing.
3. Short lengths of pipe with flexible joints shall be provided at entry and exit to all
chambers.
4. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, all exterior surfaces below grade shall be
covered with waterproof membrane, in accordance with Specifications.
5. Unless otherwise noted, all interior and exterior exposed surfaces shall be epoxy
coated according to Sspecifications.
6. Manhole covers in traffic areas shall be set to the paved area profile and be flush
with the paved area surface.
7. Manhole covers located in non-traffic areas shall be set to an elevation as shown on
the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
8. Hand railing, if shown on the drawings shall be aluminium.

a. All fixing bolts and other hardware shall be stainless steel Type 316.
9. Safety chains and other hardware as required, shall be stainless steel Type 316.
a. Size shall be 8mm, unless noted otherwise.
10. All chambers shall be watertight on completion.

a. No testing for leakage of water into chambers shall be conducted, unless in the opinion
of the Engineer, it is deemed necessary.
11. The Contractor shall take all measures, deemed necessary by the Engineer, to ensure that
chambers are not left in a flooded or unprotected condition.
a. If the designated covers are not on site after placing the cover slab, a temporary plywood
cover shall be securely fitted in all openings.
3.26 THRUST BLOCKS
A. For pressure mains, the Contractor shall construct thrust blocks at all changes in
pipe direction greater than seven degrees as well as at all tee and "Y" connections
and/or at locations as shown on the drawings.
1. Thrust blocks shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the Drawings, unless
2. Thrust blocks are designed for the soil parameters designated in the applicable soil
report.
a. If actual ground conditions differ from the soil reports, the Engineer shall be notified.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Where actual ground conditions do not meet anticipated soil conditions, the Engineer
may redesign the thrust block.
c. Where considerably better ground conditions, such as rock, are encountered, the
dimensions of a particular thrust block may be reduced, with the Engineer’s approval.
d. Supporting calculations for any reduced size thrust blocks must be submitted to the
Engineer at least 72 hours before construction of that particular thrust block commences.
3. Unless otherwise specified or directed, thrust blocks shall be provided on pipelines

laid to gradients steeper than 1:20.
a. Up to 1:15 every third pipe.
b. Up to 1:10 every second pipe.
c. At 1:5 every pipe shall be anchored.
4. Concrete shall extend to undisturbed ground on thrust faces (of thrust blocks) and on both
faces of anchor blocks.
5. Each thrust block shall be designed to have a sufficient bearing area and shall be placed to
transmit safely the unbalanced force to the surrounding area.
6. Thrust blocks shall be cast-in-place (Grade C40FR concrete) between the pipe fitting and the
trench wall or trench bottom, as the case may be.
7. Bearing faces of the block shall be placed against freshly cut, undisturbed sound material.
8. If the thrust exceeds the bearing value of the surrounding soil, the soil may be precompacted,
with the Engineer’s approval, before placing concrete.
9. All concrete shall be kept behind the sockets and flanges of fittings.
10. Formwork may be constructed, with the approval of the Engineer, wherever necessary to
confine the concrete to the prescribed dimensions for the thrust block.
a. All formwork timber shall be removed before testing.
11. Thrust blocks shall, unless otherwise shown, or directed by the Engineer, be so placed that
the pipes, fittings and joints will be accessible for repair.
3.27 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPELINES:
A. At the locations shown on the Drawing, or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall connect
the new pipelines to the existing pipelines or structures, but not until the new works have passed
the hydrostatic tests unless directed by the Engineer.
B. Existing mains and service pipes shall only be cut using special equipment approved by the
Engineer.
1. Cuts shall be perpendicular to the center line of the pipe and special care shall be
taken with respect to the location of the cut, to ensure that the new pipework
shown on the Drawings may be installed.
2. The Contractor shall agree with the Engineer, the exact length of existing pipework
to be removed.
C. The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent any dirt or extraneous material from
entering the existing main or service pipe.
D. The Contractor shall have available, at the connection site, sufficient dewatering pumps to keep
the excavation dry at all times.
1. Work shall be carried out in a clean and efficient manner.
2. The Client may put the interconnection into use as soon as possible after its
installation and will carry out an inspection to detect any evidence of leakage.
a. Any remedial work necessary to eliminate leakage shall be carried out by the Contractor.
b. No pipework shall be covered or backfilled until the Engineer is totally satisfied that
the interconnection is free of all leakage.
3.28 STANKS
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Stanks shall be placed in all granular pipe surround, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
1. Stanks shall be provided at a maximum spacing of 50m, with at least one stank
between two adjacent manholes/structures.
2. Manholes, valve chambers and other similar structures shall be considered as
effective barriers.
3. Stanks shall be installed across the full cross-section of the granular pipe surround
and into the trench walls as shown on the drawings.
4. Stanks shall be constructed through the bedding at the ends of future connection
pipelines or to stub-pipes built out at manholes close to the capped end to facilitate
future dewatering and excavation operations.
5. Concrete Stanks shall be made of Grade C20 concrete and be at least 300mm
“thick”, measured along the axis of the pipeline.
6. Plastic stanks shall be constructed from a layer of plastic sheeting, minimum
thickness 1mm, cut to fit around the pipe across the full width of the trench and laid
on the granular bedding or fill material at the natural repose angle.
7. Plastic stanks shall be used in conjunction with thermoplastic pipes.
B. The cost of providing stanks shall be included in the Contractor's rates for pipe
laying.
3.29 REINSTATEMENT OF ROADWAY AND FOOTPATH SURFACES
A. All roadways and footpaths surfaces shall be restored to their original condition by the
Contractor.
B. Maintain temporary reinstatement for the duration of the Contract.
C. Make permanent repair only at the end of the project.
D. These reinstatements are deemed to be entirely covered by the Contractor's rates for pipeline
installation.
3.30 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES IN THE PIPELINE
A. Contractor shall carry out further excavation as may be necessary to accommodate structures such
as manholes and chambers.
1. Such excavation shall include disposal of surplus materials.
B. Any roadways and footpaths disturbed by excavation for appurtenances shall be reinstated by the
Contractor.
1. These reinstatements are deemed to be entirely covered by the Contractor’s rate for the
appurtenance.
3.31 BACKFILL ADJACENT TO STRUCTURES
A. Backfill around structures shall be conducted according to Section 02315 “Structure Excavation
and Backfill”, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B. Backfill adjacent to structures shall be placed in a manner to avoid damage to the structures,
protective coatings or water proof membranes.
C. No backfill material shall be placed around structures until the exterior protective coating or
membrane has been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
3.32 EXISTING SERVICES, FACILITIES AND STRUCTURES
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining from his own inspection of the Site and
coordination with respective utility authorities and other public bodies, the position of all mains,
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
pipes and cables whether underground or overhead, within or near the Site or existing structures.
B. Where trench excavation is carried out close to or across existing pipes, cables or other services,
the Contractor shall provide suitable temporary supports or shoring, to the Engineer’s approval.
1. If for any reason, any portion or portions of the existing facilities or structures give way, the
Contractor shall carry out at his expense, all necessary remedial work to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
C. Where specified on the Drawings or by the relevant Utility Authority, split ducts shall be provided
as specified herein.
D. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, construction of the pipeline cannot reasonably be carried
out unless the pipe, cable or other service is permanently severed, permanently diverted or
permanently supported by concrete, he shall instruct the Contractor to undertake such work.
The Contractor shall be reimbursed for all such work at the appropriate rates in the Bills of
Quantities. If no applicable rates exist, the Engineer shall establish the amount to be paid to the
Contractor.
E. Any relocation of existing services shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the
responsible authorities.
3.33 FENCES AND WALLS
A. Where trench excavation crosses barriers such as fences and walls, the Contractor shall obtain
written approval of the Engineer before breaching the barrier.
B. The Contractor shall provide temporary fencing for any parts of such barriers as have had to be
removed.
C. After trench excavation has been reinstated, the Contractor shall carry out such work as the
Engineer may order, for permanent restoration of such barriers.
3.34 CROSSING WATERCOURSES
A. Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for all the additional measures necessary for the
proper construction of the pipeline where it crosses under or over streams, culverts, pipes and
other watercourses, including maintaining the full flow of water.
3.35 BURIED MARKING TAPE
A. Buried marking tape shall be placed in the trenches above all pipes.
1. Depth shall be 0.50m below finished grade.
3.36 PIPELINE MARKER POSTS
A. Marker posts shall be in accordance with– “Metal fabrications” or as detailed on the Typical
Drawings and shall be placed over pressure mains at locations directed by the Engineer.
B. All labelling and lettering shall be complete before installation.
C. Marker posts shall be set in concrete as shown on the drawings.
D. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid damage to reflective sheeting and/or lettering.
E. Any posts with damaged sheeting or lettering shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
3.37 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE PROTECTION DUCTS
A. Protection ducts shall be supported on suitable non-corrosive spacers before placing concrete
encasement.
B. Diameter of the uPVC pipe shall be at least 100 mm, and must be approved by the Engineer.
C. Where concrete work is required, it shall be in accordance with Section 03300 - “Cast-In-Situ
Concrete”.
D. Concrete encasement shall be with Grade C30 concrete.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
E. Minimum thickness shall be 150mm (all around); unless shown otherwise on
Standard Details Drawings.
3.38 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS FROM EXCAVATIONS
A. Subject to any other specific requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall make his own
arrangements for the temporary storage of any excavated material which is required for use in
refilling trench or structure excavations, including any necessary double handling.
B. The height and slope of any temporary tips alongside the trench excavation must be stabilised at
all times.
C. Where the nature of the material permits, the Contractor’s temporary storage facilities shall allow
for separate storage for various grade materials.
D. Any excavated material that is not required or is found to be unsuitable for re-use, shall be
removed from site and disposed of, in a legal manner, by the Contractor.
3.39 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of work, all rubbish, debris, fluids and excess or waste material shall be
removed from the Site.
B. All construction equipment and implements of service shall be removed and the entire area
involved shall be left in a neat, clean condition, acceptable to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02361
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
To be read with General Requirement.
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for termite control:

a Soil treatment.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency.

B. PCO: Pest control operator.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA-Registered

Label.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products

certifying that treatments furnished comply with requirements.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed
projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers
and Clients, and other information specified.
D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed,

submit report for Client's record information, including the following as applicable:
1. Date and time of application.
2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction
where Project is located and who is experienced and has completed termite
control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction
where Project is located and who is an experienced installer who employs workers
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02361- 1 TERMITE CONTROL
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
trained and approved by bait station system manufacturer to install manufacturer's
products.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a

Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.5 ROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water

saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with
EPA-Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and
concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-
supported slabs, before construction.
B. Install bait station system after construction, including landscaping, is completed.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying

that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will
prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or
damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace
damage caused by termite infestation.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Continuing Service: Provide a proposal for continuing service, including

monitoring, inspection, and retreatment for occurrences of termite activity, from
applicator to Client, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) continuing
service agreement, starting on the date of Substantial Completion. State services,
obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal
options.
II PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation
that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite
infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants.
Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the
maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the
product's EPA-Registered Label.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
III EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for

compliance with requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with
earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting
performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate.
Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such
as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste
wood from soil and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil

materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated.
Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas
under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted
fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer.
C. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer,
complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.03 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
3.04 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency.

Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the
maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-
Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical
termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building
construction. Distribute the treatment evenly.
a Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction,
including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil
materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.
b Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation
walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit
penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along
entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around
footings.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
c Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat
adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply
overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground.
d Masonry: Treat voids.
e Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until
completely dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted
until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to
EPA-Registered Label instructions.
D. Post warning signs in areas of application.
E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation,

grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02462
PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
PART 1 - GENERAL
To be read with General Requirements.
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Design, supply, installation, and setting out of precast concrete piling system to
extent indicated on drawings.
B. Refer to Paragraph 1.02 System Description for further information and bidding
procedures for this Section of work.
C. The work of Specifications section (Load Tests) is considered an integral part of

the work of this Section. Perform remedial work (to precast concrete piles) as
directed by Engineer at no extra cost to the Employer.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The piling system comprises of precast concrete piles.
B. Carry out the pile load test at the site and the detailed soil investigation by drilling
more bore holes. Design and calculate length of piles for the strength as shown
on the drawings with a safety factor of 3.0.
C. For the purpose of bidding only, assume that each pile is 14 meters long
(including length attached to pile cap and steel tip). Upon final calculations (as
further described) and prior to casting, the final correct length shall be determined,
and any contract price adjustments to the original length of 14 metres shall be
made by Unit Rates included in the Bills of Quantities.
D. Submit calculations for written approval by Engineer prior to fabrication, and

commencement of piling operations.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Specifications.
B. Indicate details and schedules of pile installation, identify recommended pile

lengths and diameters to suit design loads, reinforcing requirements..
1.04. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit three copies of project records and drawings under provisions

Specifications.
B. Accurately Record:
1. Sizes, depths, and location of piles.
2. Sequence of driving.
3. Base and head final elevations.
4. Number of blows per metre for entire length of piles and settlement for last
10 blows.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02462- 1 PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Driving force of hammer blow.
6. Time and load settlement measurements of load tested piles.
A. Precast piles should resist, without permanent damage all stresses induced by
handling, storage and transport. The minimum age of handling and transporting
should be related to the concrete strength, the type of unit and method of curing
employed by precast concrete plant.
B. The position of lifting and supporting points, method of lifting and the type of
equipment and transport to be indicated on shop drawings.
C. Care should be taken to ensure that lifting details are practical and can be used safely
and that no damage results from the lifting equipment.
D. During transport, the following additional factors require consideration:

1. Distortion of the transporting vehicle,
2. Centrifugal force due to cornering,
3. Oscillation. (A slim member may flex vertically or horizontally sufficient to
cause damage).
4. The possibility of damage due to chafing.
E. Indelible identify, location and orientation marks should be purt on the member as
and where necessary points of support during storage should be chosen to
prevent unacceptable permanent distortion of the units; supporting arrangements
which permit small settlements occurring without inducing stress in the units are to
be preferred..
F. When a stack is several units high, packing should be vertically above each other
to prevent bending stresses in any unit. Where disfigurement would be
detrimental, packing pieces should not discolour or otherwise permanently
damage the units.
1.06 UNIT PRICES
A. Refer also to Paragraph 1.02 B.
B. Refer to Bills of Quantities where unit prices for contract price adjustments per pile
for addition or deletion to the unit price per pile of assumed length, are to be
submitted.
C. Unit price (per pile) shall be submitted for the following lengths:
1. 12 meters
2. 14 metres (length used in Base Bid)
3. 16 meters
4. 18 meters
5. The unit price nearest to the calculated length to be used in the contract
price adjustements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE REINFORCED PILES
A. The concrete and reinforcement to be used in precast reinforced concrete piles

________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
shall be as specified under Division 3 except that all cement shall be sulphate
resisting, ASTM Type II. Reference shall also be made to the recommendations for
design, manufacturer and installation of Concrete piles reported by ACI Committee
543 (ACI Manual of Concrete Practice 1974 – Part-3 Page 543-1). Concrete shall
have a minimum cement content of f350 kg/m2. The concrete shall be poured into
the moulds of the required length, shape and vibrated between reinforcement.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Pile Points: Hardened steel, hollowed tip to minimize bounce or deflection.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions will support equipment for performance of pile placement
operations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Obtain prior review of hammer to be used. Use driving method which will not
cause damage to nearby structures.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Protect head of piles with fitted steel driving helmet.
B. Position helmet for even full bearing distribution of hammer blow.
C. Deliver hammer blows on central axis of pile.
D. Do not damage piles during driving operations.
E. Drive piles to required load capacities. Avoid damaging piles by over driving.
F. Load carrying capacities: As indicated.
G. When driving is interrupted before refusal, drive an additional 300mm before

resuming recording of performance data.
H. Re-drive piles which have lifted due to driving of adjacent piles, or by soil uplift.
I. Prepare pile top to receive pile cap, by removing any length of pile exceeding
150mm projection (up wards) from bottom level of poured pile cap. Minimum
permitted projection 100mm.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum: 1 in 48 from vertical for plumb piles.
B. Top: Maximum 100mm from location (horizontal) indicated.
C. Pile Head: Surface irregulations + or – 4mm.
3.05 NON-CONFORMING PILES

A. Non-conforming piles shall be defined as piles that fail tests, are driven out of
position, are below cut-off elevation, or are damaged.
B. Provide additional piles or supplement piles to meet specified requirements.

END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02463
LOAD TESTS TO PILE WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Preparation of work area.
B. Pile load testing with documented results to 4 (only) preselected piles, upon
completion of all pile work.
C. Dismantling equipment and load.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D1143 – Testing Piles Under Axial Comprehensive Load.
A. An independent inspection firm shall be engaged to observe and document test

method and results.
1.04. SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Specifications.
B. Indicate test method and equipment, load type, safety devices, calibration
equipment.
1.05 TEST REPORTS
A. Submit test reports under provisions of Specifications
B. Document test equipment used, method of calibrating and recording, test results,
recommendations or modification of piling method used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Equipment Type, Load Carrying Device, load, Instrumentation: Conform to ASTM

D1143.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Establish working elevation for test equipment.

________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02463-1 LOAD TESTS TO PILE WORK
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform load tests on test piles in accordance with ASTM D1143. Document test
procedures and results. Engineer to select piles for testing.
B. Limit load tests to the following:
1. Four load test on selected piles.
C. If tested piles do not conform to requirements, perform additional testing of other

piles.
D. Settlements readings should be done by using 4 devices 0.01mm degree of

sensitivity.
E. Final settlement readings shall not exceed on half of the load which causes a net
settlement, after deducting rebound of 0.25mm/metric ton of test load which has
been applied for a period of at least 24 hours (Reference Uniform Building Code
U.S.A).
.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02463-2 LOAD TESTS TO PILE WORK
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02539
SANITARY SEWERS (OPEN CUT METHOD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Gravity Sewers for Sanitary Wastewater

B. Manholes, Inspection Chambers, etc.
C. Manhole covers, steps, and other associated metal work.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Subsurface Investigation
B. Trench Excavation and Backfill
A. The manufacture, factory testing and supply of pipes and appurtenances of

different materials for gravity sanitary sewer collection system.
B. Laying, jointing, testing, repairing and retesting where necessary, and

commissioning of pipe lines for sewers and sewer laterals. The Contractor shall
provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary for providing the pipes,
fittings and jointing materials, transporting to site, excavation, backfilling and
compaction, laying, jointing and testing, disposal of excess excavated materials,
and removal of surplus pipes, fittings and jointing materials. The responsibility for
the safety and soundness of all material shall rest with the Contractor. The
Contractor is advised to carry out any tests, at his cost, needed to satisfy himself
1.04 REQUIREMENTS
A. This particular and detailed specification is to be used in conjunction with the

General Specification of the Ministry of Public Works (Doc III-1), Government of
Kuwait September 1987.
B. This Specification modifies, adds to, or supersedes part of the Ministry of Public
Works "General Specification". If there is any conflict or inconsistency between
the documents, the requirements of the particular and detailed specification shall
prevail.
C. Notwithstanding the subdivision of the Specifications under different headings,

every part shall be deemed supplementary to and complementary with every other
part and shall be read with them or into them as far as may be practicable to do
so.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02539- 1 SANITARY SEWERS
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
where the Contract clearly renders these meanings inapplicable:
1. "Pipe" means pipe or pipes, bends, fittings, junctions and other specials and
fittings and includes joints, jointing parts and materials.
2. "Installation" means supplying, hauling, handling, placing, fixing, jointing in
position, and testing whether in trench or elsewhere in the Works.
3. "Pipeline" means those parts of the Works comprising pipe, fittings,
connections to the existing system, manholes, inspection chambers, laterals,
and all other appurtenances required for proper functioning, operation and
maintenance of the pipeline.
4. “Backfilling” means placing the selected approved soil above the pipes and
around the manholes in accordance with Specifications.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND LAYING DIAGRAMS
A. Product data, samples and shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with
the Conditions of Contract. The approved samples shall be retained by the
Engineer until the completion of the Project.
1. Manufacturers printed brochures and catalogues (one original and three
copies) with relevant information highlighted (or irrelevant information struck
out), along with write up of selection criteria.
2. General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:500.
3. Detailed piping layout plans to a scale of 1:250 along with profiles.
4. Builder's work plans to a scale of 1:100 / 1:50 as appropriate.
5. Installation details of:
a. Manholes, interceptors, sleeves and penetrations etc. to a scale of 1:50,
as required.
b. Manhole covers, drains, and items of similar nature to a scale of 1:10, as
required.
6. Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings.
7. Samples of each type of cast iron covers, frames, drains etc for approval
and carrying out the required tests.
8. A sample piece of folding ladder containing typical junctions, holes, plates,
fixing components and welds.
9. Designs, including calculations, for piling, shoring of trenches, dewatering
systems, coffer dams and similar auxiliary items required for the construction
of piping and underwater concrete works, where required.
1.07 MARKING
A. Each length of pipe and each coupling shall be marked with the following:
1. Manufacturing Standard
2. Serial number
3. Pressure rating in Bars
4. Nominal diameter in mm
5. Name or trade mark of manufacturer
6. Date of manufacture
7. Inspection Mark
8. Coupling "homeline" position on spigot ends
1.08 PIPE MATERIAL
A. Pipes of the following materials may be proposed for installation by open-cut

method.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe with GRP liner
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Vitrified Clay Pipe(upto and including 600mm dia.)
Polymer (Polycrete) Pipe
1.09 INFILTRATION
A. The Contractor's attention is brought to the stringent requirement for infiltration

specified in Section 2.01Q.5 of this Section for non-pressure pipelines. The
Contractor shall be responsible for providing a jointing system that enables the
installation and use of the pipeline systems required by the Contract.
1.10 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. All sanitary pipes and fittings except for irrigation shall be suitable for carrying
sewage at temperatures of up to 40 degrees Celsius with sulphide concentration
up to 50 mg/l and all pipes shall be suitable for immersion in corrosive
groundwater.
1.11 BASIS OF ACCEPTANCE
A. The acceptability of the pipes and fittings will be based on the results of tests
carried out in Kuwait at the Contractor's expense and the result of any
independent testing carried out by the Owner or his agent. The frequency and
type of tests required for each pipe material are given in the following sections
and certified copies of all records of inspections and test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
1.12 UTILITIES
A. The extent, position, size, and type of services shown on the Drawings are shown
for information only and was based on information derived from exploratory
trenches or existing information issued by the various services authorities. Not all
utilities are indicated or shown on the Drawings and those shown are not
necessarily in the exact location or are complete. The Contractor shall contact the
service authorities to determine the extent and locations of utilities affected by the
Contractor's work. Confirmation of the exact location of utilities will be the
responsibility of the Contractor where necessary by hand digging, silt trenching,
and trial pits. Electronic detectors may be used for preliminary investigation only.
This work shall be carried out in consultation with the locations, depths, and
spacing of smaller utility trenches, services, vaults, valve boxes, manholes,
jointing boxes, ducts, duct banks, thrust blocks, and the like are not shown on the
Drawings. The Contractor shall make his own determination on the existence and
locations of such utility facilities.
B. Existing Utilities
1. The contractor shall, prior to commencement of the work, obtain information
and drawings required from service authorities whose facilities might be
affected by the Works.
2. It should be emphasized that all the locations of services where shown on
the Drawings are for guidance only and do not necessarily show the exact
locations, depths and spacing, nor the smallest branches of services which
are not normally indicated on such drawings. The Contractor shall uncover
by hand digging and verify locations of all services where necessary in
accordance with any special requirements of the service authority
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
concerned.
3. It should be noted that the Contractor shall not be allowed to work in any
area where services are still not located that are immediately adjacent to or
conflict with the sewer pipes to be renovated, installed, or replaced. The
Engineer shall have the right to stop work in part of the Works where the
Contractor fails to take the necessary measures to locate these services and
the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim for compensation in the time or
money.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Prior to commencing construction and subsequent to the Contractor's
determination of the location of the existing utility lines, the Contractor shall
prepare and submit to the Engineer for his review shop drawings complete
with the description of the procedure, materials, and related date of the
Contractor's proposed method of protection for said utility lines. Reviews and
comments by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the full
responsibility for all protection and precautions required during Works.
2. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish all necessary shop drawings of the
work required to complete the adjustment to finished grade or level which
must be approved by the service authority and the Engineer.
D. Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the care and protection of all existing
utilities or other facilities and structures which may be encountered in or near
the area of work. Temporary support, adequate protection and maintenance
of all underground and surface utilities encountered in the progress of the
work shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense and under the
direction of the Engineer and the service authority. Any structures that have
been disturbed shall be restored immediately.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for bracing and support of utilities and
services to prevent settlement, displacement, or damage to same.
3. The Contractor shall remove and cap abandoned utilities in accordance with
service authority direction and as directed by the Engineer. The method of
capping the lines shall conform to the requirements of the utility or service
authority.
E. Maintaining Utilities in Operation: The Contractor shall ensure that gas, electrical,
water, sewer house connections, and telephone services shall not be interrupted
during the course of this project. This may require the establishment of temporary
service connections including sewer house connections until the works are
complete and all reinstatement of utilities are made .
F. Damage to Utilities and Properties

1. In the event of any damage to utilities or properties during the progress of
the Works due to the Contractor's failure to exercise the proper precautions,
or the failure of the Contractor or his agents, employees, the Subcontractor
or his agents, or employees, the Contractor will be held liable for the cost of
repairs, penalties enforced by the authorities and protection of all such
utilities or property. The decision of the Employer regarding responsibility for
any damage or interruption of any utility or service lines shall be final.
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Employer and the Engineer and
the Contractor shall cooperate with the Employer and the Owner or such
utility or service lines and take whatever steps necessary to repair and
restore such utility or service
3. The Employer shall have the right to deduct the actual costs charged to the
Employer from monies due to becoming due to the Contractor without it
being necessary to serve a notice or warning or to take any legal action and
the Contractor shall not be entitled to object, refrain from, or suspended the
work on account of such deduction.
4. The actual costs charged will be those received in any claim by individuals or
companies which relate to the damage of private property or those assessed
for the damage of utilities.
1.13 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
A. The use of explosives shall not be permitted in this Contract.
1.14 SUPPORT TO EXCAVATIONS
A. In accordance with the relevant sections of these Specifications, the Contractor

shall provide, install, and maintain supports to the sides from collapsing or from
affecting in any way whatever the surrounding utilities and properties, whether, as
a result of collapse of the sides of excavation and/or as a result of sliding.
1.15 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE
A. The Contractor shall not deposit the earth obtained from excavation and/or store
up or deploy equipment, tools and plant necessary in locations that will affect the
safety of the public, public services, or properties and/or in such a way that
impedes traffic or pedestrians and any other works of public authorities or private
concerns.
B. The Contractor shall backfill promptly all trenches and open cuttings to the
standards required by the Engineer.
C. The Contractor will be held responsible for the sufficiency of his safety measures
and will be liable for keeping the Works safe at all times.
1.16 NUISANCE FROM NOISE AND DUST
A. The Contractor shall take all precautions which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are
necessary to minimize nuisance arising from noise and dust when working in the
vicinity of residences, lecture halls and offices. All engine-driven machines shall
be fitted with efficient silencers which are not necessarily those supplied by the
manufacturers of the engines or plant and, if necessary, plant shall be screened
with acoustic materials. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is unreasonable or
undesirable for pumps, or concrete mixers to be driven by combustion engines,
the Contractor shall, when so required, provide electric motors to operate the
plant.
B. Compressed air operated road breakers, tools, and ventilation equipment shall be
effectively muffled or shall be of a design having a low noise frequency.
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. The Contractor shall utilize submersible pumping plant which is electrically

powered so as to avoid any nuisance or disturbance to the general public. The
pumping plant may be supplied with power from a diesel engine generator which
shall be acoustically insulated so that the emitted noise level shall not exceed 65
dBA measured at a distance of 3 m from the equipment. The noise level near
houses, and sound installation procedures to keep the noise nuisance to the
minimum shall all be approved by the Engineer.
1.17 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS
A. The Contractor shall keep the Construction site neat and clean to the satisfaction
of the Engineer by daily removal of unwanted material arising from demolished
pipes and manholes, sewer cleaning, and excavations, rubbish, temporary
installations, and daily cleaning to remove wind blown sand and other debris. All
debris shall be removed from the site to a public disposal location approved by the
Municipality or MPW. The disposal location may be at any distance from the
project site, and may be changed by the municipality during the time of
construction. The Contractor shall determine any requirements for the disposal of
construction material at the approved location. The Contractor shall allow for this
in his rates.
B. The Contractor shall keep the site free from insect and rodent infestation, and
shall control offensive odors so as not to affect the environment. The Contractor
shall ascertain, and comply with, the requirements of the Municipality and MPW
Maintenance Department for his sanitary precautions.
C. Upon final completion of the Works, the Contractor shall clear away and remove
from the site all remaining constructional plant, surplus materials, rubbish, and
temporary works of every kind and leave the whole of the site clean to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.18 WORKS TO BE KEPT DRY
A. The Contractor shall pump out underground water and/or percolating water that is
encountered in the excavations using well-point dewatering system or as directed
by the Engineer and dispose of such water to places indicated by the Engineer.
The Engineer may allow the disposal of such water in rainwater gullies provides
there is no technical hindrance. The Contractor shall not dispose of water into
sewer pipes, roads, private property, or open areas such as parks or undeveloped
lots. Proper surface drainage must be maintained at the site particularly around
the shafts and pipe excavation at all times. Additional requirements are specified
in Specification Section Trench Excavation and Backfill.
1.19 TEMPORARY FENCING
A. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all open excavations and other
hazardous areas shall be totally enclosed from all sides by temporary fencing.
B. In all cases, locations of the temporary fencing proposed by the Contractor shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. The Contractor
shall not commence any works until the associated temporary fencing is erected
and the installation has been approved by the Engineer.
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Damaged sections of temporary fencing shall be repaired or replaced promptly to

maintain at all times the standard of fencing and installations as initially approved
at no cost to the Owner. Temporary fencing shall not be removed from any
location without the prior written approval of the Engineer. The name of the
Contract and Contractor shall be affixed at regular intervals on these temporary
fences.
1.20 TEMPORARY WORKS
A. Protection of Streets and Sidewalks

1. The Contractor shall protect streets and sidewalks and shall repair damage
caused by construction activity. The Contractor shall comply with local rules
and regulations in connection with the use of streets.
2. The Contractor shall protect all private roads and walks and shall maintain
them during the course of the work. He shall repair all damage to them
caused by construction activity.
B. Existing Services
1. The Contractor is to include for all temporary works to maintain and protect
existing power, lighting, water and telephone services while the Works are
being executed. Temporary shutdown of the services shall only be made with
the prior approval of the Engineer and the owner of the services.
2. Allow for protecting and maintaining all pipes, ducts and cables met in
excavations, for keeping all ditches, gullies and channels clear and
unobstructed and for making good any damage caused to public or private
roads, paths, kerbs and drains and paying all costs and charges incurred.
C. Weather Protection: The Contractor shall provide protection against weather rain,
wind, storms, or heat to maintain the works, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free
from injury or damage. Work likely to be damaged shall be covered at the end of
each day's work.
D. Workmanship: The Contractor shall ensure that all temporary electrical, water, and
other temporary installations are executed in accordance with the requirements of
the authorities concerned.
E. All temporary works are to be properly and adequately maintained and on

completion of the Contract or when directed by the Engineer shall be cleared
away by the Contractor and all disturbed Works damaged by failure to provide
proper protection shall be removed and replaced with new work at the
1.21 RELATED WORK(S)
A. Section II MPW General Specifications - Earthworks

B. Section III MPW General Specifications – Sub-base & Base courses
C. Section IV MPW General Specifications - Asphalt Works
D. Section V MPW General Specifications - Concrete Works
1.22 REFERENCES
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. ASTM C 150 Sulphate Resistant Cement
B. EN 295-1 Class 240 Extra strength Vitrified Clay Pipes and Fittings
C. DIN 4124 Excavation of Trenches for Underground Utilities
D. BS 4 Structural Steel Sections
E. BS 497 Specification for manhole covers, road gully gratings
and frames for drainage purposes
F. BS 639 Covered carbon and carbon manganese steel
electrodes for manual metal-arc welding
G. BS 916 Black Bolts, Screw and Nuts
H. BS 1768 Unified precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
I. BS 2094 Glossary of terms relating to iron and steel
J. BS 4360 Weldable structural steels
K. BS 4872 Part I - fusion welding of steel
L. BS 5135 Process of arc welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steels.
A. The works covered by this Section shall be executed in conformance with the
requirements of the latest editions of the codes, ordinances, rules and regulations
of the State of Kuwait and its lawful enforcement agencies such as the Ministry of
Public Works (MPW).
B. The works covered by this Section shall be executed by a contractor, engaged in

the installation and maintenance of infrastructure sanitary drainage systems as
primary business for at least five (5) immediately preceding years.
C. Materials incorporated in the work covered by this Section shall be unused, new
products in good condition, manufactured to the latest edition of the reference
standards. Materials spoiled due to improper storage or mishandling shall be
rejected.
D. Materials of similar nature shall be products of the same manufacturer. Mixing up

products of different standards or those of different manufactures shall not be
permitted for the same service.
E. Materials to equivalent British (BS), German (DIN), or Japanese (JIS) or other

international standards shall be acceptable, provided that the Contractor
substantiates their equivalence and ensures their compatibility with other
components of the system. Copies of the current version of the reference
standards shall be submitted for comparison, if required by the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall submit the shop drawings and materials used for the works
covered by this Section, as approved by the Engineer, to the Roads and Drainage
department of the Ministry of Public Works (MPW) for their concurrence. MPW
approval shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to placing any order or
proceeding with any installation.
G. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the source of materials from the Engineer
and should arrange and pay for the testing of representative samples, under
supervision of the Engineer, to ascertain their compliance with the specified
requirements, prior to shipment of the material to the site. The Contractor shall
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
also furnish the manufacturer's test certificate(s) along with every consignment.
A. Products shall be delivered to site (near the place of installation, where

appropriate), stored and protected under provisions of the General conditions of
Contract.
B. Vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall be transported in pallets and handled with
suitable power driven equipment only. Pipes and fittings shall be unloaded near
the place of installation.
C. Pipes shall be stored on elevated racks to prevent damage to the seals.
D. Plastics and rubber products shall be stored out of direct sunlight and protected in
a proper manner to prevent deterioration.
E. Products like primers, paints, protective membranes etc. shall be delivered in

original, sealed containers; clearly labelled with the manufacturer's name, brand
designation, type and class and the date of manufacture.
1.25 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC
A. The Contractor shall maintain and protect traffic through areas of construction and
shall furnish and maintain temporary traffic control devices including barriers,
barricades, cones, drums, warning signs and lights, flashing arrows and flagmen
in conformance with this submittal and Specifications.
B. The Contractor shall keep all existing roads and accesses affected by the project
construction open at all times. The roads and accesses shall be maintained in a
condition that traffic will be adequately and safely accommodated. The Contractor
shall pay particular attention to the maintenance of access whether by vehicle or
pedestrian to parking lots, residences and other facilities whether public or private.
These requirements shall apply throughout the entire contract period.
C. Any road closure, whether partial, total, or temporary, or any work that may cause
an obstruction to the traffic, must be carried out outside the traffic peak hours.
D. No claim will be considered by the Engineer for payment of additional expenses

and/or time in respect of work out of sequence, additional work, idle time, or work
outside normal hours.
E. Maintenance and protection of vehicular and pedestrian traffic shall meet the
requirements of Traffic Regulation.
1.26 LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS
A. The Contractor's operations shall be limited as follows:

1. No work shall be performed during the hours of darkness unless authorized
in writing by the Engineer.
2. Night-time construction operations, where authorized by the Engineer, shall
be illuminated by a lighting system approved by the Engineer. The lighting
system shall be positioned and operated to preclude glare to approaching
vehicles.
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The Contractor's equipment shall be operated in the direction of traffic
whenever practical.
4. Insofar as is practicable, the construction of adjacent traffic lanes shall be
completed to the same elevation within the same or subsequent workday.
Where not practicable, suitable arrangements shall be made to protect traffic
to the approval of the Engineer.
5. Private vehicle, belonging to the Contractors employees, shall be parked in
areas approved by the Engineer and at no time shall private vehicles
belonging to the Contractor's employees be parked within 10m of traffic
lanes.
6. The Contractor shall schedule operations to minimize potential traffic
backups.
1.27 MAINTENANCE OF ACCESS
A. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate access is maintained at all times to
properties and facilities affected by the Works.
B. Such properties and facilities shall include, but shall not be limited to, all public
and private buildings, houses, parking areas, gardens, services (manholes,
pipelines, and valve chambers), or any other facility as indicated by the Engineer.
C. As a minimum, accesses shall be replaced with the same width, standard, and
surface type as the existing access facilities but, in all cases, a minimum width of
3m shall be provided.
D. The locations of accesses to be maintained are not shown on the Drawings and
the Contractor shall understand that any existing accesses, whether public or
private, paved or unpaved, shall be maintained at all times during the Contract
period unless specifically authorized otherwise by the Engineer in writing.
1.28 TEMPORARY, TOTAL, OR PARTIAL CLOSURE OF ROADS
A. General
1. With the approval of the Engineer and all relevant authorities, the Contractor
may temporarily, totally or partially close existing roads to traffic. Approval
shall not normally be given to total closure or partial closure of lengths in
excess of 500m.
2. Unless agreed otherwise in writing by the Engineer accesses shall be
maintained at all times.
B. Definitions
1. A temporary total closure of a road shall comprise the closure of a road to all
through vehicular and, if approved by the Engineer, all pedestrian traffic
movements.
2. A temporary partial closure of a road shall include, but shall not be limited to,
the following:
i. Closure of a lane or lanes of one or both carriageways of a dual
carriageway
ii. Reduction in width of lanes of dual carriageways
iii.- Closure of lanes of two-way roads
iv. Reduction in width of two-way roads
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Traffic controls for any road closure or detour shall meet requirements of Section
01570.
1.29 OVER-PUMPING AND FLOW DIVERSION
A. The Contractor shall maintain sewage flow arising from whatsoever source, and
shall prevent any flow from entering the sewer being worked on during any phase
of the execution of the works. The Contractor shall submit his proposed method
of over-pumping or flow diversion to the Engineer for approval prior to the start of
construction. The proposed method shall include proposed alignments and
design requirements of the discharge pressure pipe to the terminal point.
B. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and operate pumps, plugs, conduits and other
equipment required to divert flow around the pipe segment upon which work is to
be performed. Sewage shall not be allowed to flow into gutters, streets, or over
sidewalks. After the work on the sewers has been completed, tested, and
accepted by the Engineer, flow shall be restored to normal.
1.30 PIPE STOPPERS
A. The flow shall be plugged off using and approved type of mechanical pipe stopper
having a circumferential compressible rubber ring, the stopper being fully inserted
inside the pipe before tightening up. Suitable inflatable stoppers may be
approved for small diameter sewers. Stopper shall be of the most sophisticated
and reliable type available in the market.
B. Stopping of Flow
1. For work on any length of sewer, the Contractor shall plug off any number of
inlets to the upstream manholes as required. The next manhole upstream
shall be used as a pumping sump with the outlet to that manhole also being
plugged. Where there is a possibility of sewage backup from downstream,
the outlet to the downstream manhole shall also be plugged. Additional
stoppers shall be used as necessary to ensure safe working conditions.
2. All house connections that discharge into temporarily plugged sewer length
are to be stopped off themselves and a pre-approved system of over
pumping installed.
1.31 PUMPING EQUIPMENT
A. Over-pumping shall be carried out from one manhole to another located

downstream. The pumping system shall be of sufficient capacity to handle peak
existing flow. Pumping shall be done by the Contractor in such a manner that no
damage to public or private property results, and no nuisance or public health
problem is created. The pumped sewage shall be in an enclosed hose or pipe
that is free of all leaks and shall be re-inserted into the sewer system.
B. The Contractor shall verify the peak average flows ahead of time and he shall
design his pumping system accordingly. The Contractor shall submit his design
for the Engineer's approval.
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Submersible Portable Pump
1. A submersible electrically driven, non-clog sewage pump shall be installed in
the manhole. It shall be capable of handling all the required sewage flow
and any likely material transported to the host manhole. The pump shall be
slender and capable of passing through the manhole cover (600mm
diameter).
2. The bottom side of the pump, i.e. suction inlet, shall be connected to a
suction stand constructed of cast iron or protected steel and resting on the
manhole bottom. The discharge side of the pump shall be connected to the
external pipe by means of a flexible hose or other material as deemed
appropriate.
3. The pump shall be controlled by float switches installed to operate at levels
pre-approved by the Engineer.
D. Suction Lift Pump: In areas where the submersible pump described above is not
sufficient to handle the existing flow, the Contractor may use one or more suction
lift pumps installed temporarily on the street level with suction hose(s) leading into
one or more manholes as necessary. The pumps shall be centrifugal of a special
design suitable for this work. The pump(s) shall discharge the sewage into the
external pipe(s). The pumps shall be electrically driven with sufficient lift capacity in
the suction side.
E. Power Generation: The Contractor shall make his own arrangements to provide
power to the site for running the pumping equipment.
1.32 OVER-PUMPING OF FLOW
A. To bypass a length of sewer undergoing replacement or renovation work, the flow

of sewage shall be over-pumped and discharge into a downstream manhole on
the sewer line. Subject to the Contractor obtaining the necessary approval from
the Engineer, the sewage may be over-pumped utilizing an adjacent surface water
drain where it is impractical to use the sewer system. It must be clearly
demonstrated by the Contractor that no sewer is available for the diversion of the
flow before proposing to use storm drain lines for diversion of the sewage. In
such a case, the sewage flow shall be returned to the sewage network at a
suitable point downstream of the work in progress.
B. The open end of the pump discharge pipe shall be laid so as to minimize
turbulence of the pumped flow into the sewer system.
C. Upon completion of over-pumping, the Contractor shall carry out sewer, or storm
drain when utilized, cleaning by jetting, flushing or any other means required to
return the pipes to serviceable condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
D. Upon completion of all works, the Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that
the sewage system is clean, free from blockages, and free flowing. The
Contractor shall employ any means necessary to ensure that the system is fit and
in a serviceable condition.
1.33 TEMPORARY DIVERSION OF FLOW
A. Where the Contractor considers it necessary for the expediency of the works, the
temporary diversion of a sewer by discharging the pumped flow into another
branch or main sewer, whether connected or not, may be allowed. The Contractor
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
should notify the Engineer of his intentions and submit his proposals before the
implementation of any such diversion to ensure that the receiving sewer is
capable of handling the additional flow.
B. The Contractor shall give full details of pipe diameter, route, and levels in
proposals for temporary diversions, subject to the Engineer's approval, and shall
be totally responsible for obtaining all other permissions and approval relevant to
any flow diversions.
C. All diversionary work shall be subject to the requirements of the Contract as if they
formed part of the Permanent Works.
1.34 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment shall be made for over-pumping or flow diversion, including

the furnishing and operation of pumps, the cost of which will be included in other
work requiring over-pumping or flow diversion.
1.35 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Specifications.
B. Records: Maintain and submit to the Engineer after each working shift a log which
record the following:
1. Identification number of pipes installed during shift and name of operator.
2. Strata encountered.
3. Position and orientation of the lead ten pipes.
4. Forces used on both main and inter-jack rams during driving of each pipe.
5. Line and level.
6. Roll of pipe jacking shield.
7. Maximum rate of advance.
8. Distance moved
9. Thrust from ground on face of machine.
10. Volume of lubricant used, location of injection and pressure at point of
injection.
11. Volumes of material removed.
12. Volumes of grout used, the points of injection and pressure at the points of
injection.
13. Cutter torque.
14. Slurry flow and pressure.
15. Supply pressure.
16. Pitch of TBM.
17. Gas readings at the excavating face (oxygen, methane and hydrogen
sulphide).
18. Gas readings in thrust pit.
19. Level records of ground surface or road pavement.
20. Accident and stoppage, if any, with full explanation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 VITRIFIED CLAY (VC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Specifications Covered in Section 2636.
2.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE LINED WITH GRP
2.3.1 POLYMER CONCRETE PIPE WITH (OR) WITHOUT GRP LINER
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
(OPEN CUT METHOD)
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02584
SERVICE PROTECTION DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK
A. - Subsurface Investigation
B. - General Earthwork and Site Preparation
C. - Trench Excavation, Pipe Installation and Backfill
A. New protection ducts of split unplasticised polyvinylchloride (UPVC) pipes, concrete encased,
to protect existing utility mains or cables where excavations cross such utility mains or cables.
1.03 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install new protection ducts of split unplasticised
polyvinylchloride (UPVC) piles, concrete encased, to protect existing utility mains
or cables where new pipelines are to cross such utility mains or cables. The
number and size of ducts shall be to suit existing utilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Protection ducts shall be split, unplasticised polyvinylchloride (UPVC) pipe

extruded from one hundred percent virgin materials. All pipes and fittings shall be
new and unused. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free from
visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, deleterious materials, wrinkles,
and dents. Plastic pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles or rolls,
packaged in such a manner as to provide adequate protection of pipe and pipe
ends, either threaded or plain, from damage or exposure to sunlight. All plastic
pipe fittings to be installed to PVC pipe shall be molded fittings manufactured of
the same material as the pipe and shall be suitable for solvent weld.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PROCEDURE
A. After the split UPVC pipe has been placed around the existing utility mains or
cables, the pipe shall be wrapped twice with polyethylene film, 150 microns thick,
to prevent fresh concrete from entering the duct. The protection ducts shall be
supported on suitable non-corrosive spacers before placing the concrete
encasement. The diameter of the split UPVC pipe shall be 150 mm as approved
by the Engineer.
All concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirement of Specifications.
Concrete encasement shall be with Grade C70 concrete.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02630
STORM WATER DRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Storm water surface drainage system is a network of gullies, manholes and piping
designed and laid to collect, carry away and dispose off the following:
1. Rain water discharge on the roofs and floors of buildings.
2. Rain water discharge on promenades, car parking areas and streets.
3. Sub-soil drainage from sand pits and planters.
B. Gravity as well as pumped storm and drainage from buildings will be discharged
into the gullies and/or manholes in the system.
C. This section specifies installation and testing for Storm Water Drainage and
1. Gullies, Drain Trenches and Manholes
2. Storm Water Drainage Lines
3. Cast iron accessories like Covers, Frames, Step Irons etc.
4. Storm Water Out-falls
D. For trench excavation, pipe installation, and backfill see Section 02321.
A. Summary of Works
B. Submittals
C. Quality Assurance/Quality Control, Inspection and Testing
D. Site Safety and Security
E. Materials and Equipment
G. Demolition and Abandonment
H. General Earthwork and Site Preparation
K. Cast Iron Manhole Covers and Gratings
L. Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings
M. HDPE Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fitting
M. Cast-In-Situ Concrete
O. Concrete Batching and Delivery
P. Metal Fabrications
Q. Water Proofing
R. uPVC Pipes and Fittings
S. Plumbing Systems
1.03 REFERENCES
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following
references, unless otherwise stated in the specifications, or unless otherwise
1. BS 5328 - Ready Mixed Concrete
2. BS 9110 - The Structural Use of Concrete
3. BS 5911 - Pre-cast Concrete Pipes, Fittings and Ancillary Products
4. BS 5911 Part 2 - Specification for Inspection Chambers and Street Gullies
5. BS 5911 Part 100 - Specification for non-reinforced and reinforced pipes and fittings
with flexible joints
6. BS 2494 - Specification for Elastomeric Seals for joints in Pipe work and
Pipelines
7. BS 497 - Cast Iron Covers and Frames
8. BS 729 - Specification for Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel
articles (ASTM A 123 / A 153: Zinc Coating [Hot Dip Galvanising]
on Fabricated Steel Products / Zinc Coating on Iron and Steel
Hardware)
9. BS 1247 - Manhole Step Irons (Malleable Cast Iron)
10. BS 1452 - Grey Iron Castings
11. BS 5493 - Code of Practice for protective coating of Iron and Steel Structures
against Corrosion
12. BS 3416 - Black Bitumen Coating Solutions for Cold Application (AASHTO M
115: Asphalt for Damp-proofing and Water-proofing)
13. AASHTO T 180 - Moisture Density Relations of Soils using 10 lbs (4.54 kgs) Rammer
14. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Installation of Thermo Plastic Pipes for Sewers
and other Gravity Flow Applications
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilised in this section.
1. "uPVC" shall mean unplasticised polyvinyl chloride.
2. "RCP" shall mean reinforced concrete pipe.
3. "DI" shall mean ductile iron.
4. "Pipe Surround" shall mean that material directly below, around and above the pipe.
5. "Formation" shall mean the bottom of the trench excavation, or in some cases, fill
just below the pipe surround.
6. "Stanks" shall mean barriers to flowing water within granular pipe surround
material.
A. The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials and equipment necessary for
providing a complete operating system.
B. Responsibility for the safety and soundness of all material shall rest with the
Contractor.
C. Contractor is advised to carry out any tests (at his cost) needed to satisfy himself
D. Pipe materials to be utilised shall be as shown on the Project Drawings, or as
described in the particular and general specifications.
E. Each type of pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, unless
otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Approval
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. The Contractor shall submit sufficient information to the Engineer, prior to
purchase according to Specification, in order to verify compliance with the
specifications. Such information shall include at least the following:
a. Manufacturers name
b. Suppliers name
c. Product name (if applicable)
d. Product description
e. Manufacturers technical data
f. Storage instructions
g. Installation instructions
B. Material samples shall be submitted as required in the relevant sections within these
specifications, or as requested by the Engineer.
C. Method Statements
1. The Contractor shall provide method statements meeting the requirements of
appropriate Section, for at least the following activities, or as requested by the
Engineer.
a. Pipe testing.
b. Manhole and chamber construction.
c. Pipe installation including backfill compaction methods for flexible (uPVC and HDPE)
pipes.
D. Shop Drawings
1. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings according to Specification including:
a. Manufacturers printed brochures and catalogues (one original and three copies) with
relevant information high lighted (or irrelevant information struck out), along with write
up of selection criteria
b. General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:1000
c. Detailed piping layout plans to a scale of 1: 250 along with profiles
d. Builders work plans to a scale of 1:100 / 1:50 as required
e. Installation details of:
• Manholes, interceptors, sleeves and penetrations etc. to a scale of 1:50
• Manhole covers and items of similar nature to a scale of 1:10
f. Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings
E. Project record documents and As-built Drawings of all works installed under this section shall be
submitted in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract.
A. Requirements of the following shall be conformed to as appropriate:

1. Codes, ordinances, rules and regulations of the State of Kuwait and its lawful
enforcement agencies like Ministry of Public works
2. British Standard Code of Practice
3. ASTM D2321 - Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible
Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe.
4. Ministry of Public Works, Roads Administration, Document III-1 General Specifications,
September, 1987'
• This Specification modifies, adds to, or supercedes part of the General Specification. If
there is any conflict or inconsistency between the documents, the requirements of the
Particular Specification shall prevail
B. Materials to equivalent American (ASTM, ANSI), British (BS), German (DIN), or

Japanese (JIS) or other international standards shall be acceptable, provided that the
Contractor substantiates their equivalence and ensures their compatibility with other
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
components of the system. Copies of the current version of the reference standards
shall be submitted for comparison, if required by the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall submit the shop drawings and materials used for the works
covered by this Section, as approved by the Engineer, to the Roads and Drainage
department of the Ministry of Public Works (MPW) for their concurrence. MPW
approval shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to placing any order or proceeding
with any installation.
D. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the source of materials from the Engineer and should
arrange and pay for the testing of representative samples, under supervision of the Engineer, to
ascertain their compliance with the specified requirements, prior shipment of the material to the
site. The Contractor shall also furnish the manufacturer's test certificate(s) along with every
consignment.
E. Storm water drainage works shall be executed by a contractor, engaged in the installation and
maintenance of similar systems as primary business for at least three (3) immediately preceding
years.
F. Each product specified shall be provided from the same manufacturer throughout,
where possible.
A. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in
sufficient time to allow the Engineer or his representatives to inspect and test the
products, if so desired.
1. All notifications shall be made by written "Inspection Requests" in accordance with
" Quality Assurance/Quality Control, Inspection and Testing".

a. 24 hours on site
b. 72 hours for other areas within Kuwait
c. 3 Weeks outside of Kuwait.
B. "Inspection Requests" for at least the following items, shall be submitted to the Engineer during
the on-site installation work, prior to proceeding with the following activities. Minimum
notification time shall be 24 hours.
1. Pipe testing.
2. Backfilling.
3. Reinforcing Steel for Cast-in-Situ Concrete.
4. Formwork for Cast-in-Situ Concrete.
5. Placing of Cast-in-Situ Concrete
A. General requirements for delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be as
specified in Specification section "Materials and Equipment".
B. Specific requirements shall be as specified in the relevant specification section governing the
manufacture and installation of the material or product in question.
C. Additional requirements may be required as per the manufactures recommendations and/or the
directives of the Engineer.
D. Products shall be delivered, handled and stored according to the manufacturer’s recommendations
along with the following provisions:
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be performed in a manner to
avoid product damage.
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products. Steel chains, clamps or
cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes, unless approved by the Engineer.
a. Steel chains or cables may be allowed for securing products during transport or storage,
provided protective padding or timber blocking is utilised.
3. Do not store products directly on the ground, unless approved by the Engineer.
Ensure adequate timber blocking is utilised to provide sufficient support.
4. Visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the Engineer.
a. Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked and set
aside.
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing to the
c. No repairs to damaged products shall be attempted, without the Engineer’s approval.
d. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall be removed
1.10 TRAFFIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Where temporary road closures, road diversions or construction detours are required, the
Contractor shall:
1. Execute the work at the time when the traffic is least congested. If, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the work may result in unacceptable inconvenience to traffic, the work shall be
carried out during the night time.
2. Carry out his various activities at such times and in such a manner that no disturbance is
caused to the public.
3. Provide safe pathways not less than 1.20 m wide for pedestrians and traffic lanes not less
than 3.5 m wide for vehicles, and control traffic by means of traffic signals or by other means
wherever required as approved by the Engineer.
4. Provide in all cases, fencing, signs, light signals, floodlights, and watchmen to ensure that no
mishaps will befall the public or properties in locations.
5. Reinstate to original condition and make good without delay.
1.11 AS-BUILT RECORDS
A. The Contractor shall maintain a continuous record of all field deviations from the Drawings, if
any, as approved by the Engineer. At the completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer a set of the latest revisions of all plans and specifications marked to show the
works "as-built". A set shall include 2 prints of all drawings together with the originals.
B. The Contractor shall prepare As-built drawings of the work as constructed/renovated including
preparation of schedules, giving details such as pipe diameters, and invert levels, all to be
presented in a form approved by the Engineer.
1.12 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall refer to and comply with the current regulations and specifications of the
service authorities before commencing any work adjacent to other utilities. This requirement will
not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for taking every precaution to avoid damage to these
utilities and he shall be held responsible for the cost of repair of all damage and other liability
claims in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and the Specification.
1.14 SUPPORT TO EXCAVATIONS
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. In accordance with the relevant sections of these Specifications, the Contractor shall provide,
install, and maintain supports to the sides of all excavations in a way that prevents the sides from
collapsing or from affecting in any way whatever as a result of collapse of the sides of excavation
and/or as a result of sliding.
A. The Contractor shall not deposit the earth obtained from excavation and/or store up or deploy
equipment, tools and plant necessary in locations that will affect the safety of the public, public
services, or properties and/or in such a way that impedes traffic to pedestrians and any other
works or public authorities or private concerns.
B. The Contractor will be held responsible for the sufficiency of his safety measures and will be
liable for keeping the Works safe at all times.
C. Nuisance from noise and dust:
1. The Contractor shall take all precautions, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are
necessary to minimize nuisance arising from noise and dust when working in the vicinity of
residences, lecture halls and offices. All engine-driven machines shall be fitted with efficient
silencers, which are not necessarily those supplied by the manufacturers of the engines or
plant, and if necessary, plant shall be screened with acoustic materials. If, in the opinion of
the Engineer, it is unreasonable or undesirable for pumps, or concrete mixers to be driven by
combustion engines, the Contractor shall, when so required, provide electric motors to
operate the plant.
2. Compressed air operated road breakers, tools, and ventilation equipment shall be effectively
muffled or shall be of a design having a low noise frequency.
3. The Contractor shall utilize submersible pumping plant, which is electrically powered so as
to avoid any nuisance or disturbance to the general public. The pumping plant may be
supplied with power from a diesel engine generator which shall be acoustically insulated so
that the emitted noise level shall not exceed 65 dBA measured at a distance of 3m from the
equipment. The Engineer shall approve all the noise level near houses, and sound
installation procedures to keep the noise nuisance to the minimum.
A. The Contractor shall keep the construction site(s) neat and clean to the satisfaction of the
Engineer by daily removal of unwanted material arising from demolished pipes and manholes,
sewer cleaning, and excavations, rubbish, temporary installations, and daily cleaning to remove
wind blown sand and other debris. All debris shall be removed from the site to a public disposal
location approved by the Municipality. The disposal location may be at any distance from the
project site, and may be changed by the municipality during the time of construction. The
Contractor shall determine any requirements for the disposal of construction material at the
approved location. The Contractor shall allow for this in his rates.
B. Upon final completion of the Works, the Contractor shall clear away and remove from the site all
remaining constructional plant, surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary works of every kind
and leave the whole of the site clean to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall pump out underground water and/or percolating water that is encountered in
the excavations and dispose of such water to places indicated by the Engineer. The Engineer may
allow the disposal of such water in rainwater gullies providing there is no technical hindrance.
The Contractor shall not dispose of water into sewer pipes, roads, private property, or open areas
such as parks or undeveloped lots.
D. The Contractor shall provide all treatment units, power, chemicals and labor required to remove
hydrogen sulfide from pumped out water prior to discharge. Hydrogen sulfide shall be treated
and removed so that air quality and discharged water quality is maintained within EPA standards
at all times.
A. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all open excavations and other hazardous areas shall
be totally enclosed from all sides by temporary fencing. Temporary fencing is detailed on MPW
Standard Drawing.
B. In all cases, locations of the temporary fencing proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval prior to installation. The Contractor shall not commence any works
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
until the associated temporary fencing is erected and the installation has been approved by the
Engineer.
C. Damaged sections of temporary fencing shall be repaired or replaced promptly to maintain at all
times the standard of fencing and installations as initially approved. Temporary fencing shall not
be removed from any location without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
1.18 PROTECTION OF STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
A. The Contractor shall protect streets and sidewalks and shall repair damage caused by construction
activity. The Contractor shall comply with local rules and regulations in connection with the use
of streets.
B. Allow for protecting and maintaining all pipes, ducts and cables met in excavations, for keeping
all ditches gullies and channels clear and unobstructed and for making good any change caused to
public or private roads, paths, kerb and drains and paying all cost and charges incurred.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Materials supplied shall be manufactured to the latest edition of the reference standards.
Manufacturer's test certificate shall be furnished along with every consignment.
B. Approval of the source of materials shall be obtained from the Engineer after testing
representative samples under his supervision to ascertain their compliance with the specified
requirements; prior to the importation of the material to the site.
2.02 CEMENT
A. Cement used for the drainage works shall be fresh and of approved quality Portland sulphate
resisting cement Type V, complying with the requirements of ASTM C150.
2.03 CONCRETE FOR MANHOLES, DRAINAGE CHANNELS AND HORIZONTAL GULLIES
A. Concrete elements of any class for drainage works, whether pre-cast or in-situ, shall be carried
out in accordance of Division 3.
B. Concrete shall be in accordance with Specifications and the following classes:
1. Class C40FR for bed or haunch or encasement to pipes
2. Class C40FR with nominal 10mm aggregate for benching, minimum 20 mm thick with
smooth hard finish
5. Class C20 for blinding
6. Class C50GBS for Reinforced Concrete works
2.04 WATER PROOFING
A. Water proofing shall comply with the requirements of Specifications.

A. The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements to verify the conformity of pipes
to the specification requirements and tests outlined hereinafter, prior to importing
the concrete pipes to the site. The Engineer may, at his discretion, supervise all such
tests.
B. Pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with the following
1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) and fittings shall comply with the requirements of Section
02631 “Reinforced Concrete Pipes and Fittings” as modified herein.
2. Un-reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings shall comply with the requirements herein.
3. uPVC Pipes and fittings shall confirm to the requirements of “uPVC Pipes and Fittings”
2.06 CONCRETE PIPES
A. Concrete pipes shall be of sound manufacture and free from honeycombing.

B. Concrete pipes up to and including 600mm diameter maybe un-reinforced or reinforced unless
specifically specified as reinforced.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Concrete pipes greater than 600mm diameter shall be reinforced concrete pipes shall be in
accordance with Specification Section ”Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings” with the following
exceptions
1. Storm water drainage pipes do not require internal plastic lining.
2. Reinforced concrete pipe for Storm Water Drainage shall be manufactured from Type V
Sulphate Resisting Cement.
D. Un-reinforced concrete pipe shall be as specified herein.
E. Manufacturer
1. Concrete pipes shall be purchased from the Cement Products Factory of the National
Industries Company (N.I.C.) of Kuwait, in so far as the pipes met the Specifications, in
particular with regard to Type V cement.
2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain pipes from another source, capable of
complying with the specification; if any of the pipes can not be supplied by the Cement
Products Factory of N.I.C.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for securing the required quantities at the proper time for the
work and any delay in the supply and delivery thereof shall not entitle a claim for extension
of Contract period, nor for any additional expenses on account of such delay.
2.07 UN-REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES
A. Un-reinforced concrete pipes shall be of sound manufacture and free from honeycombing.
B. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements to verify the conformity of pipes to the specification
requirements and tests outlined hereinafter, prior to importing the concrete pipes to the site.
Engineer may, at his discretion, supervise all such tests.
C. Un-reinforced concrete pipes having diameters 250 to 600 mm shall be tested in accordance with
reference standards. The minimum crushing test loads in kgf / linear meter of effective length on
the two edge bearing strength test performed shall be as outlined in Table VI-1 below:
Table VI-1
Crushing strength of Un-reinforced Pipes
Nominal internal dia. Minimum crushing strength

of pipe in mm (kgf/Linear meter)
250 2350
300 2380
350 2600
400 2800
450 3000
500 3800
600 4000
D. In the event that, after installation, the pipe fail to meet the line test or other requirements, the
defective pipe shall be removed and replaced or encased with minimum 150 mm thick Class C 20
concrete made from Type V cement as per ASTM 150.
E. Pipes of the above mentioned diameters shall be laid and protected in accordance with the typical
MPW Drawings (MPW No. RA / D / TP - 6) and Section 02321 "Trench Excavation, Pipe
Installation and Backfill". Where these two standards conflict the most restrictive shall apply.
F. Pipes laid in depths less than one meter or more than five meters to top of pipe must be encased
in class C 20 concrete.
G. Joints for un-reinforced concrete pipes shall be elastomeric type rings, maintained in place in
such a manner that ensures watertight joints during the specified tests, and the subsequent life of
the installed pipes.
H. Pipes and joints shall have the following marked indelibly, immediately after taking from the
mould(s):
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Date of manufacture and serial number
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Nominal diameter
I. Nominal diameters shall refer to internal diameters of pipes and the nominal length of a pipe
shall be the effective length of the installed pipe.
J. Internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth and without repair patches. Pipes and
joints shall be checked for dimensions and tolerances with special gauges, supplied by the
Contractor. Tolerances on the pipe dimensions shall be as follows:
1. Nominal diameter: ± 5 mm for 250 to 500 mm nominal diameter
2. Free space between the grooves: ± 2 mm for 250 to 500 mm diameter
3. Wall thickness at the base at the sides and at the top: + 20 mm and - 10 mm. Consideration
shall be given to the required clearance between the grooves for proper jointing
4. Nominal length: ± 20 mm
2.08 HORIZONTAL GULLIES
A. Reinforced cement concrete structures constructed in place in accordance with current MPW
standard details.
2.09 VERTICAL GULLIES
A. Pre-cast units, purchased from the Cement Products Factory of the National Industries Company
(NIC) in Kuwait.
2.10 DRAINAGE CHANNELS
A. Reinforced cement concrete structures constructed in place in accordance with details in the
Project Drawings.
2.11 PRECAST MANHOLE RINGS
A. Lightly reinforced, sulphate resisting cement concrete rings of 150 mm thickness, 1,000 mm
internal diameter and suitable length from the Cement Products Factory of the National
Industries Company (NIC) in Kuwait - class K 300.
B. Manhole rings shall be joined with the manhole shaft using sand cement mortar (3:1). External
walls shall be treated with three coats of liquid asphalt to a finished thickness of not less than 2
mm.
C. Benching and coating of inner and outer surfaces of the manhole shall be similar to that of the
cast-in-situ manholes.
2.12 PRECAST MANHOLE COVER SLAB
A. These shall be of sulphate resisting, reinforced concrete and available from the Cement Products
Factory of the NIC in Kuwait - class K 300.
2.13 CAST IRON COVERS AND FRAMES
A. Cast iron covers for manholes shall be in accordance with “Cast Iron Manhole Covers and
Gratings”
B. Prior to delivering any covers and frames to the site, submit two samples of each type to be used
for approval and carry out the required tests. Covers and frames used shall conform to the
approved samples. Approved samples shall be retained by the Engineer until the completion of
the Project.
2.14 STEP IRONS
A. Galvanized cast iron of not less than 1.45 kgs (3.20 lb) weight, 250 mm (10 inch) length and 150
mm (6 inch) width.
2.15 PRISING AND LIFTING BARS
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. One set of prising and lifting bars of approved design shall be supplied by the Contractor to the
Owner with every one to one hundred (1-100) manhole covers and frames installed, subject to a
minimum of three (3) sets.
2.16 GRATES AND FRAMES FOR DRAINAGE CHANNEL AND GULLIES
A. Grates and frames for drainage channel shall be made of cast or ductile iron in accordance with
Section 02534 “Cast Iron Manhole Covers and Gratings”
2.17 STEELWORK
A. Steel work shall be fabricated from structural steel sections and fasteners, all in accordance with
Division 5
B. Unless otherwise specified, structural steel work shall be rust protected in
accordance with Specifications section “Coating System for Ferrous Metals”
2.18 STORM WATER OUTFALLS

A. Contractor shall verify the site conditions and integrate the storm water drainage works as
appropriate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A The Contractor shall notify other ministries and authorities whose service might be
affected by the Works regarding his program. He shall also submit every two weeks
details of the work contemplated for execution in order to enable the service
authorities to inspect and/or to indicate their service on the site to take any
measures deemed necessary.
B. The Contractor shall study Drawings and specifications and familiarize with the
structural and architectural details and the work of other trades.
C. It shall be ensured that the work under this section will not interfere with those of
other trades and are compatible with the architectural finishes, prior to placing
orders, fabrication and installation.
D. Other Sections shall be furnished with necessary templates, patterns, setting out
plans and other items for incorporation in the works or for leaving necessary
provisions for the work. Ensure timely placement of sleeves, inserts and the like.
E. Where work is installed in close proximity, to or will interfere with other works, the
Contractor shall assist in working out satisfactory space arrangements. Composite
shop drawings shall be prepared to a suitable scale, showing how the work is
installed in relation to the work of other trades.
F. Conflicts in requirements with other trades shall be resolved by the Contractor.
Only those conflicts, that cannot be solved without changes to structure or those
which involves changes to system design, shall be referred to the Engineer.
3.02 FACTORY TESTING OF UN-REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES
A. Un-reinforced concrete pipe shall be subjected to the water tightness test as

described below, if required by the Engineer. Where this is not defined, tests shall be
conducted according to the applicable British standards.
1. After a minimum of seven (7) days from the pouring of the unreinforced pipes, a
maximum of 0.5 percent of the lot shall be subjected to a water tightness test. The
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
pipe shall be placed vertically with the socket down on a water tight base and
completely sealed. Thereafter the pipe shall be filled with water to the top of the
spigot. If the water level drops more water shall be added until the concrete is
saturated with water. During a test period of 24 hours, in a place away from
draught, the water level shall not drop more than 5 mm. The water surface shall be
covered with a thin layer of oil during the test to avoid evaporation.
2. Immediately after the water tightness test, the unreinforced pipes shall be tested to
establish the crushing load per meter run, in accordance with BS 556.
3. After a minimum of 28 days from the date of production, reinforced pipe shall be
tested for cracking and crushing strengths in accordance with the procedures given
in the Swedish Specifications.
4. Hydraulic tests of unreinforced concrete pipes shall be performed on 2 percent of
the pipes with internal diameters of 300 mm and on 1 percent of the pipes with
internal diameters of 400, 500 and 600 mm in accordance with BS 556.
5. Water absorption test shall be carried out on unreinforced concrete pipes in
accordance with ASTM standards for testing permeability of concrete pipes.
6. If the supply of the pipes includes delivery to a site located more than 25 Km away
from the plant, the water tightness test on the pipes shall be repeated on a maximum
of 0.5 percent of the pipes at the site.
7. When a pipe fails to pass a particular test, two other samples shall be selected from
the same batch and subjected to the test. Should either of these two pipes fail to
pass the test, the whole batch represented by these samples shall be rejected.
8. All batches of pipes manufactured with materials or concrete which fail to pass the
required tests shall be rejected.
9. For convenience, pipes may be grouped in batches of 200 pieces and the samples of
pipes selected from these batches. The pipes so selected shall be deemed to
represent the batches and rejection shall apply to the whole batch of 200 units.
10. Rejection of pipes due to defective materials shall include all pipes manufactured
with the materials represented by the samples of materials, which failed to pass the
required tests. All rejected pipes shall be stamped "rejected" in a conspicuous
location on the pipe.
3.03 INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION
A. Materials shall be carefully inspected and examined for cracks and other defects
while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position.
B. Materials which do not conform to the specifications or which are found to be
defective or damaged shall be rejected and removed from the works. If more than
10 percent of the materials are rejected, the Engineer has the right to reject the
whole consignment.
A. Trench excavation, pipe installation and backfill shall comply with Section 02321, unless
B. Jointing shall be in accordance with the requirements of the particular specifications for the pipe
being used and the following.
1. When jointing pipe, a mark shall be made to check the position of the end of the barrel after
the joint is made.
2. The rubber rings shall be lubricated with a lubricant approved by the pipe manufacturer.
Joint lubricant shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3. A gap of 5mm to 10mm shall be left between the ends of the pipes to allow for joint
flexibility.
4. The pipeline joints shall not be deflected when pipes are laid in curves, until the join has
been made.
3.05 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF GRAVITY PIPELINES
A. For the purposes of cleaning and inspection, the term gravity 'pipelines' includes
those laid in heading or by pipe- jacking or microtunnelling or similar techniques.
B. The Contractor shall submit for approval, his proposed method for cleaning the
gravity pipeline. Such cleaning system shall not damage the pipeline in any way.
C. During and after construction the Contractor shall take reasonable measures,
including the provision of stoppers plugs and headwalls where appropriate, to
prevent the ingress of deleterious matter into pipelines.
D. After backfilling pipe trenches and completing manholes, chambers, hatch boxes
etc., and before the trench surfaces are reinstated, the interior of pipelines shall be
cleaned of silt and debris by approved methods for inspection by the Engineer as
follows:-
1. Pipelines of 800mm nominal internal diameter and smaller shall have a loose plug
passed through them to show that they are clear of obstruction and free from
deflection. For flexible pipelines the loose plug shall be dimensioned to suit the
permissible minimum deflected diameter of the pipe.
2. Pipelines greater than 800mm nominal internal diameter will, after cleaning, be
inspected from the inside and the Contractor shall provide a suitable trolley,
ventilation and safety equipment, and any other plant and labour necessary for this
purpose, if required by the Engineer.
3. All pipelines will be inspected again before commissioning or taking over
(whichever is sooner) and, if required by the Engineer, shall be cleaned again in
whole or in part.
E. After final pre-commissioning inspection, all pipelines to which flows will not be
immediately connected shall be plugged with purpose made removable stoppers
until such time as the pipelines are commissioned. A log recording the installation
date and location and the subsequent removal date of all stoppers installed shall be
maintained and countersigned by the Engineers Representative.
3.06 TESTING OF PIPELINES: GENERAL
A. For the purposes of inspection and testing, the term 'pipelines' includes those laid in
heading or by pipe- jacking or microtunnelling or similar techniques.
B. Prior to commencement of testing, approval shall be obtained to the quality and
methods of providing and disposing of all fluids used for testing purposes.
C. If permission is given to use new or existing pipelines or culverts, which are not
part of a live system, they shall be thoroughly cleaned of all silt and any resulting
damage made good after use.
D. If lagoons for the storage of such fluids are permitted, they must be suitably
protected with fencing and attended by day and night to prevent access by the
general public and will not be sited adjacent to buildings. Approved means of
preventing the formation of mosquito larvae on the surface of the lagoons will be
employed.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
E. Testing of pipelines shall in all cases be carried out in the presence of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide complete plant and all struts, thrust blocks, etc., as
may be necessary for effectively testing the pipelines to the specified pressures.
F. Should any inspection be unsatisfactory or any test fail, the Contractor shall replace
defective pipes, leaking joints or otherwise re-execute defective work as instructed,
following which, cleaning and testing will be repeated until the Engineer certifies
the pipeline to be satisfactory.
G. The Contractor shall take care that during periods of rainfall or flooding of trenches
from other causes, lengths of completed pipelines, which have not been backfilled
may be subject to flotation. He shall take precautions and measures to avoid any
such flotation. If pipelines are subject to flotation they shall be removed and
completely relaid to the Engineer's satisfaction.
H. General
1. The Contractor shall submit a method statement in accordance with Section 01400
for the Engineer's approval, covering details of his proposed methods and
programme for testing (including details of test equipment).
2. The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials and supplies necessary for carrying out
testing and cleaning including water, pumps, gauges, piped connections, stop ends and all
other temporary works. The Contractor shall also include details for the disposal of water
used for testing.
3. Test pressure shall be measured by U-tube manometer or standing water columns.
4. Pipelines shall be properly secured and supported before being put under test.
a. At pipe ends, provide for transmitting the end thrust into the sides of the trenches.
b. Ensure that anchorage of bends is sufficient and thrusts from all branch outlets are
properly restrained.
5. The Contractor may at any stage of construction carry out such tests as he
considers desirable, to check materials and workmanship on the pipeline.
a. This shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to complete all testing designated
under the Contract.
6. All water required for testing and cleaning the pipelines shall be potable water or
irrigation water and shall be provided by the Contractor, at his cost.
7. All flexible gravity sewer pipelines (uPVC, HDPE) must be tested for deflection.
8. The Engineer shall have power to require the Contractor to vary any test procedure or
pressure, as the Engineer thinks fit, at no extra cost to the Ministry.
9. The Contractor shall submit an inspection request to the Engineer, in accordance with
Clause. 1.07 "Quality Control" to test a section of pipeline, after having satisfied himself that
the section of pipeline to be tested in the presence of the Engineer is satisfactory in all
aspects.
10. The Contractor should note that neither the satisfactory testing of a pipeline, section
of a pipeline or any other pipework, nor the acceptance of such testing by the
Engineer or his representative, shall in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibilities and obligations under the Contract.
11. When leakage or infiltration exceeds the amount allowed by the specifications, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, make the necessary repairs or replacements in
accordance with the specifications, to reduce the leakage or infiltration to the
specified limits.
12. Any individual detectable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the results of the
test, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
I. Deflection Testing
1. All flexible gravity sewer pipelines shall be subjected to deflection tests at site, as detailed
herein and in the particular pipe specification of these documents.
a. The above requirement shall not apply to pipes 100mm dia. and smaller.
2. Deflection shall be calculated as a percentage of the difference between the measured in-situ
diameter (on any axis) and the stated non-deflected diameter, divided by the non-deflected
diameter.
a. A reduction in the diameter shall be considered to be a negative deflection.
3. Maximum deflection Criteria for Flexible Pipes (measured-In-Situ) shall be as detailed in the
particular pipe specification sections of these documents.
4. Pipe surround shall be removed from all sections of pipe failing to meet the specified
deflection criteria.
a. Undamaged pipes may be re-backfilled and tested again.
b. All action taken to correct the pipe deflection shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
c. Re-laid sections shall be tested in accordance with item number 3 above.
5. If the permanent set or deflection, after removal of pipe surround, exceeds the limits set out
above, the pipes shall be deemed to be damaged and will therefore be rejected.
a. Pipes so rejected shall be indelibly marked, removed from the site and replaced at the
3.07 TESTING OF GRAVITY PIPELINES
A. All gravity pipelines of 800mm nominal internal diameter and smaller shall be given
a preliminary test when the pipeline is bedded and jointed but before backfilling and
a final test after backfilling. Unless otherwise instructed, non-pressure pipelines shall
be tested in sections between manholes. In addition, pipelines shown as straight
lines on the Project Drawings shall be subjected to a light test between manholes to
verify alignment.
1. Preliminary test for pipelines with 800mm internal diameter or less:
a. Air shall be pumped into the pipeline until a pressure of l00mm head of water is
indicated on a water manometer and the pressure shall not fall by more than 75mm
during a period of 5 minutes.
b. The Contractor will not be permitted to commence testing later than 4 hours after
sunrise or earlier than 4 hours before sunset during the summer period unless otherwise
2. Final test for pipelines with 800mm internal diameter or less:

a. Water test shall be conducted on segments of pipe between manholes.
b. The pipe work shall be completely filled with fresh water to a head of 1500
mm above the crown of the pipe at the highest end (not exceeding 6000
mm above the crown at the lowest end of the pipe work segment). Steeply
graded pipe work shall be tested in sections so as not exceed the above
limit.
c. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the test shall commence one hour
after the filling of the line, at which point the test column shall be made up
to the required test head.
d. The loss of water over a period of 30 minutes period shall be measured by
the addition of water to the test column.
e. The pipe work under test shall be deemed to have passed the test if the loss
of water does not exceed 0.12 liters per hour per 100 meters of pipe per
mm of internal diameter.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
f. If the pipe work fails in the test or shows any signs of leakage, the
Contractor shall rectify the defects or replace the pipe work at his expense.
g. The Contractor shall use only fresh water for the tests and arrange for its
transport in and out of the site.
B. All gravity pipelines larger than 800mm nominal internal diameter shall be internally
inspected, pressure tested and also tested for infiltration when laid below the
ground water table. Internal inspection shall be in accordance with Article 3.05.
1. The Contractor shall, carry out tests on every joint by means of an approved joint
testing apparatus or by hydrostatically testing the pipeline.
a. The pipe work shall be completely filled with fresh water to a head of 1500 mm above
the crown of the pipe at the highest end (not exceeding 6000 mm above the crown at the
lowest end of the pipe work segment). Steeply graded pipe work shall be tested in
sections so as not exceed the above limit.
b. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the test shall commence one hour after the
filling of the line, at which point the test column shall be made up to the required test
head.
c. The loss of water over a period of 30 minutes period shall b measured by the addition of
water to the test column.
d. The pipe work under test shall be deemed to have passed the test if the loss of water does
not exceed 0.12 liters per hour per 100 meters of pipe per mm of internal diameter.
2. For any joint of a pipeline that fails this test additional joint sealing will be required
to be carried out by approved resin/gel/grout injection techniques at the
Contractor's cost.
3. The Contractor shall repair any joint with visible leakage.
D. Infiltration Test:
1. The measured infiltration shall not exceed 0.12 liters per hour per 100 meters of
pipe per mm of internal diameter of pipeline under test.
a. Pipes 600mm and larger and smaller sizes if directed by the Engineer, laid below the
groundwater table shall be subjected to an infiltration test.
b. The infiltration test shall be conducted after dewatering activities have been suspended
for at least 7 days.
c. The Contractor shall include in his method statement complete details for the
measurement of any infiltration.
d. For any pipeline that fails the infiltration test the Contractor must propose measures to
remedy the situation and execute such measures at his own cost to achieve compliance
with this requirement.
2. For any joint of a pipeline with nominal internal diameter greater than 800mm,
which fails this test additional joint sealing will be required to be carried out by
approved resin/gel/grout injection techniques at the Contractor's cost.
3. The Contractor shall repair any joint with visible leakage.
3.8 MANHOLES
A. General
1. Unless noted otherwise, manholes shall be constructed on gravity sewers:
a. At each change of gradient or direction.
b. At each change in diameter.
c. At each intersection with other pipes.
d. At such other points as shown on the Drawings.
e. As directed by the Engineer.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Concrete work shall not begin until the pipe fittings to be cast into the manhole
walls, are on site. No "box outs" will be allowed, unless approved by the Engineer.
a. Thereafter the manhole shall be cast, water-proofed and backfilled as quickly as possible.
3. Channel inverts shall be accurately laid to meet pipe invert elevations.

4. Channel bends in the benching are to be as "slow" as possible, by setting the
manholes "off-center" at changes in direction.
5. All pipelines adjoining structures (i.e. at entries and exits to manholes) shall have a flexible
joint adjacent to each structure, as detailed on the drawings.
6 Benching shall be formed with in-situ C40/20 mass concrete with
smooth hard exposed finish.
7. Unless otherwise noted, all exterior surfaces below grade shall be covered with
waterproof membrane, in accordance with e.
8. Manhole covers in traffic areas shall be set to the paved area profile and be flush
with the paved area surface.
9. Manhole covers located in non-traffic areas shall be set to an elevation as shown on
the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
10. Where drop manholes are indicated they shall be as shown on the Drawings and
shall be formed where the upstream length of sewer enters a manhole at a level 1
metre or greater above the manhole invert level.
11. All manholes shall be watertight on completion.
12. Manholes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this clause.
13. The Contractor shall take all measures, deemed necessary by the Engineer, to
ensure that manholes are not left in a flooded or unprotected condition.
a. If the designated covers are not on site after placing the cover slab, a temporary plywood
cover shall be securely fitted in all openings.
B. Backdrops to Manholes (Pipes & Fittings)

1. These shall be constructed vertically adjacent to the external face of the manhole
shaft, in order to reach the invert level inside the manhole.
C. Demolition or Replacement of Manhole

1. Where an existing manhole is to be demolished, or removed, prior to the
construction of a new manhole, the existing manhole shall be demolished and the
debris removed to an approved location, in accordance with Specifications.
2. Concrete cover slab shall be carefully broken to recover the frame and cover, which
shall be taken to the designated Ministry stores.
3.09 MANHOLE TESTING
A. The Contractor shall test 10 percent of all Storm Water Drainage System manholes,
to be selected at random by the Engineer.
B. Manholes shall be hydrostatically tested to at least one metre above the crown of
the highest connection into the manhole being tested.
C. The selected manholes shall be tested for watertightness. Each manhole shall be
filled with clean water to the test level and shall stand for a period of three days, to
allow for absorption. The structure shall be considered satisfactory if, subsequent
to this period, there shall be no fall in level over a period of 24 hours (after making
due allowance for rainfall and evaporation) and no visible leaks.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
D. Should a manhole fail to pass it shall be repaired and retested. If more than 2
percent of the total manholes fail the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
approval a proposal to correct the situation.
E. All cost associated with testing and repairs shall be of the Contractor's expense.
3.10 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPELINES:
A. At the locations shown on the Drawing, or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall connect the new pipelines to the existing pipelines or structures, but not until
the new works have passed the final tests.
B. The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent any dirt or extraneous
material from entering the existing main or service pipe.
C. The Contractor shall have available, at the connection site, sufficient dewatering
pumps to keep the excavation dry at all times.
1. Work shall be carried out in a clean and efficient manner.
2. The Client may put the interconnection into use as soon as possible after its
installation and will carry out an inspection to detect any evidence of leakage.
a. Any remedial work necessary to eliminate leakage shall be carried out by the Contractor.
b. No pipework shall be covered or backfilled until the Engineer is totally satisfied that the
interconnection is free of all leakage.
3.11 OVERPUMPING AND FLOW DIVERSION
A. The Contractor shall maintain Storm Water flow arising from any source.
1. The Contractor shall submit his proposed method of overpumping or flow diversion
to the Engineer for approval, prior to the start of construction.
2. The proposed method shall include proposed alignments and design requirements of
the discharge to the terminal point.
B. Contractor shall furnish, install and operate pumps, plugs, conduits and other
equipment required to divert flow around the pipe segment upon which work is to
be performed.
1. After the work has been completed, tested and accepted by the Engineer, flow shall
be restored to normal.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
section 02631
REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the manufacture of reinforced concrete pipe (RCP), fittings and specials.
1. Installation and field testing requirements will be found in the related sections
listed, below.
A. Submittals.
C. Materials and Equipment
D. Trench Excavation, Pipe Installation and Backfill
E. Sanitary Sewerage Systems
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Product manufacture, testing and other activities shall comply with the following references,
unless otherwise noted in the specifications, or otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. ASTM - C76M - Reinforced concrete, culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe.
2. ASTM - C150 - Specification for Portland Cement.
3. BS 882 - Aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
4. BS 3148 - Water for making concrete.
5. ASTM - C494 - Standard specification for chemical admixtures for concrete
6. BS 5075 - Concrete admixtures.
7. BS 5911 - Precast concrete pipes, fittings and ancillary products.
8. BS 2494 - Elastomeric joint rings for pipe work and pipelines.
9. BS 4449 - Carbon steel bars for reinforcement of concrete.
10. ASTM - A615 - Deformed and plain billet steel bars for concrete reinforcement.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
1. “RCP” shall mean reinforced concrete pipe.
2. “Pipe Specials” shall mean unusual fittings not covered by recognised manufacturing
standards.
3. GRP shall mean glass reinforced plastic.
A. Pipes
1. Pipe size shall be as shown on the drawings, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
a. The sizes designated on the drawings refer to nominal internal diameters.
2. Pipe class shall be as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

3. Pipes shall be suitable for operating temperatures of up to 45°C.
4. Standard pipe length shall be 3 meters, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
5. All pipes, fittings and specials shall have a plastic liner over the entire interior surface.
6. All pipes shall have epoxy coating over the entire exterior surface.
7. Pipe encasement shall be Class C20N concrete, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
8. Special requirements for jacking pipes will be found in Specifcations.
B. Joints
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. All joints shall be spigot and socket type with flexible elastomeric sealing rings, unless
approved otherwise by the Engineer.
2. All elastomeric joint seals shall be obtained from the pipe manufacturer.
3. All lubricants shall be obtained from the pipe manufacturer and shall be suitable
for use with potable water.
4. All joints shall be capable of withstanding an external pressure of 100 Kpa
without infiltration in both the straight and misaligned positions.
C. Special Fittings
1. Special fittings, even if manufactured elsewhere, shall be obtained from the pipe
manufacturer, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
2. Additional testing for special fittings may be directed by the Engineer, at the Contractor’s
expense.
D. Markings for Pipes and Fittings

1. Each pipe, special or fitting shall be clearly marked at the place of manufacture with the
following information.
a. The name or distinctive mark of the manufacturer.
b. The date of manufacture.
c. The nominal diameter
d. The manufacturing standard to which the product has been produced
e. Strength class
f. Where appropriate, the name of the Client and contract number
g. Where appropriate, individual reference number
h. Number and mark of independent testing agency (if applicable)
1.06 SUBMITTALS
D. Pipe and standard joints shall be submitted for all proposed sizes and classes for the Engineer’s
approval
6. The submittal shall clearly indicate the following:
a. Pipe manufacturer’s name.
b. Proposed pipe diameters
c. Proposed pipe class or rating
d. Proposed manufactured lengths
e. Proposed joint type
f. Proposed sealing ring material and manufacturer’s name
g. Maximum depth of cover
h. Minimum depth of cover
i. Design data sheets showing quantity and size of steel reinforcement and
concrete strength.
j. Concrete mix design and materials
k. Plastic liner
l. Epoxy coating
m. Concrete filler and repair materials
B. Fittings and specials for all proposed sizes and classes shall also be submitted for the Engineer’s
approval.
1. Samples shall be supplied according to the Engineer’s request.

B. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in sufficient time to
allow the Engineer or his representatives to inspect and test the pipes, if so desired.
1. All notifications shall be made by written Inspection Requests in accordance
with Specification.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
a. An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineer’s office, but the original
must arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.
d. 48 hours on site.
e. 1 week inside Kuwait.
f. 3 Week outside of Kuwait
D. Pipes, fittings, lubricants and specials shall be delivered, handled and stored, according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations along with the following provisions:
8. Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be performed in a manner
to avoid product damage.
9. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting pipes and fittings. Steel chains,
clamps or cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes.
b. Steel chains or cables may be allowed for securing pipes during transport or
storage, provided protective padding or timber blocking is utilised.
10. Do not store pipes on rough or rocky ground.
11. Ensure adequate timber blocking is utilised to provide sufficient support for
stacked pipes.
12. Visually inspect all pipes upon delivery and report any damage to the Engineer.
e. Any pipes damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked
and set aside.
f. Proposals for repair of any damaged pipes shall be submitted in writing to
the Engineer for approval.
g. No repairs to damaged pipes shall be attempted without the Engineer’s
approval.
h. Any damaged pipes deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall be
removed from site and replaced at the Contractors expense.
6. Lubricants shall be stored in closed containers, in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.
7. Elastomeric sealing rings (rubber gaskets) shall be stored in closed containers, or out of
direct sunlight, until needed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND MIX DESIGN
A. Cement
1. Cement shall conform to ASTM-C150 Type II Moderate Sulphate Resisting Portland
Cement, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
B. Aggregates
1. Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of BS 882, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
C. Mixing Water
1. Mixing water shall comply with the requirements of BS 3148, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
D. Admixtures
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1.
Admixtures utilised in the concrete mix shall comply with the requirements of ASTM-C494
or BS 5075, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
a. Admixtures shall be used in strict compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
b. Admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used.
E. Concrete Mix
1. Concrete mix shall meet BS 5911 requirements, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2.02 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Reinforcing steel shall comply with the requirements of BS 4449 or ASTM-A615, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. Size, type and tensile strength shall be according to manufacturer’s approved pipe design.
2.03 ELASTOMERIC SEALING RINGS
A. Elastomeric sealing rings shall be EPDM manufactured to BS 2494 Type “D” requirements, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
2.04 GLASS REINFORCED LINER
A. Concrete pipes for the conveyance of sewage shall be lined internally with glass reinforced plastic
(GRP). The GRP liner pipe shall have a minimum thickness of 10mm and a minimum stiffness
of 2500 N/m2 and shall be fully bonded to the concrete. In addition, the inner liner shall be
designed to withstand the full hydrostatic pressure equal to 2.5 bars.
B. The GRP liner pipe shall be jointed by means of rubber ring sealed coupling or by a moulded
spigot and socket type arrangement incorporating rubber ring seals. Normally a coupling shall be
attached to one end of each GRP liner pipe and surrounded by concrete integral with the
encasement of the liner pipe barrel, so as to effectively form a socket into which the spigot end of
the next GRP liner pipe can be entered. In this way the GRP liner pipe joint provides continuous
corrosion protection across the mating joint of two pipe units.
C. Where a GRP lined concrete pipe enters a manhole, the Contractor shall ensure that no part of the
concrete pipe is left exposed to sewage inside the manhole. The Contractor shall agree with
Engineer a method for continuing the protection round the pipe end and forming a seal between
the protection materials. This shall be allowed for in the rates for pipelines and manholes.
2.05 EPOXY COATING
A. Epoxy coating shall be a 100% solids coal tar, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. Concrete fillers and repair materials shall be as a recommended by the coating manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
4.1 PIPE MANUFACTURE
A. RCP shall be manufactured and tested according to ASTM-C76M Class IV or BS5911 Class H,
along with the following stipulations, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. Minimum rebar cover shall be 25mm.
2. Pipes shall be cast vertically.
3. Plastic liners shall be welded according to the manufacturer’s directions.
4. Pipes shall be moist cured for a minimum of 7 days before delivery, unless otherwise
5. Nominal thickness of exterior epoxy coating shall be 400 microns.
a. Mixing and application shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s
recommendations.
b. Approved fillers and repair materials shall be applied, according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B. Routine Quality Control Tests and Inspections

1. The manufacturer shall sample and test the concrete on a routine basis as required by BS
5911, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Pipe load tests and joint tests shall be conducted for all pipe diameters , in accordance with
BS 5911.
a. Pipes shall be chosen at random by the Engineer.
3. Pipes shall be substantially free from fracture, large or deep cracks, large or deep honeycomb,
insufficient rebar cover, damaged liners or damaged coating, as described below
a. Cracks more than 0.3mm wide and 30cm length shall not be allowed.
b. Honeycomb in excess of 6mm depth shall not be allowed.
c. Insufficient rebar cover shall not be allowed.
d. Cut or punctured liners.
e. Pinholes in the epoxy coating
5. Pipes may be repaired, subject to the Engineer’s approval.
6. Any pipes failing to meet the routine test or inspection criteria may be rejected, at the
Engineer’s discretion.
4.2 PIPE AND JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Pipes shall be installed in accordance with the requirements found in Specifications, unless
B. Field welding of plastic liners shall be conducted according to the pipe manufacturer’s
recommendations.
1. Manufacturer’s welding technique shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
2. Only the manufacturer’s trained technicians shall be allowed to conduct the welding.
3.03 FIELD TESTING
A. Field testing shall be conducted in accordance with Specifications section – “Sanitary

Sewerage Systems”, unless otherwise approved, in writing, by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02632
HDPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE AND FITTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This section specifies the manufacture, installation and testing of HDPE gravity sewer pipe
and fittings.
1. Additional installation and field-testing requirements will be found in the related
sections listed below.
1.02 DEFINITION
A. The following definitions shall pertain to words or phases as utilised in this Section.
1. HDPE shall mean High Density Polyethylene
2. Profile wall shall mean a pipe wall construction that presents an essentially smooth
surface in the waterway but includes ribs or other shapes, which can be either solid or
hollow that help brace the pipe against diametrical deformation.
1.03RELATED SECTIONS
A. Submittals
B. Quality Assurance / Quality Control, Inspection and
Testing
C. Structure Excavation and Backfill
F. Cast Iron Manhole Covers and Gratings
1.04 REFERENCES
unless otherwise stated in the specifications or unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
ASTM D2321 Standard Practice for Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for

Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
ASTM D2837-98A Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis
for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials.
ASTM D3350 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and
Fittings Materials
ASTM F 894-95 Standard Specification for Polethylene (PE) Large Diameter
Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe
ASTM D3350-99 Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and
Fittings Materials
ASTM 585 Practice for Insertion or Flexible Polyethylene Pipe into
Existing Sewers
DIN 8074 HDPE Pipe Dimensions
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
WIS 4-35-01 Specification for Thermoplastics Structured Wall Pipes, Joints
and Couplers with a Smooth Bore for Gravity Sewers for the
Size Range 150-900 Inclusive
prEn 13476-1 Plastics piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage
and sewerage – Structured-wall piping systems of unplasticized
poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U), polypropylene (PP) and
polyethylene (PE)
B. “Pipe Specials” shall mean unusual fittings or bends not covered by recognised
manufacturing standards.
C. HDPE pipes shall be installed by open cut methods only except when the plans specifically
detail insertion into an existing sewer.
A. Pipes
1. HDPE Gravity Sewer Pipes may be Solid Wall or Profile Wall.
2. Contractor shall submit calculations covering the soil pressure on the buried pipe and
restraint of expansion or contraction. Restraint anchors shall be provided if required.
Manholes may be regarded as such restraint blocks, provided that they can be shown to
provide the necessary resistance.
3. Where pressure pipe is designated for non-pressure applications, the minimum SDR shall
be supplied and manufacturing shall conform to the designated pressure class, unless
4. Pipes shall be suitable for sustained operating temperatures of up to 45°C.
5. Pipe lengths shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations as approved
by the Engineer.
6. When pipe lengths greater than 6 meters are supplied the socket depths shall be greater than
Amin specified in prEN 13476-1 Table 6.
7. The Contractor shall provide the proper equipment and slings necessary to handle the length
of pipe being used.
8. Pipe bedding and pipe surround shall be as indicated on the Project Drawings and Section
02321 of these specifications.
B. Joints
1. All joints shall be spigot and socket type with flexible elastomeric sealing rings.
a. Welded joints may not be used under any circumstances.
2. All elastomeric joint seals (rubber gaskets) shall be obtained from the pipe manufacturer.
3. All joints shall be capable of withstanding a minimum external pressure of 50 Kpa without
infiltration as per DIN 16961-2, in both the straight and misaligned positions.
C. Special Fittings
1. All special fittings, even if manufactured elsewhere, shall be obtained from the pipe
manufacturer, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
2. Pipe system shall include double socket type HDPE couplings using elastomeric joint seals
that can be utilised anywhere along the barrel of the pipe.
D. Markings of Pipes and Fittings
1. Each pipe, special or fitting shall be clearly marked at the place of manufacture with the
following information.
c. The pressure rating (if applicable)
d. The nominal diameter
e. The manufacturing standard to which the product has been produced
f. The angle of bends or branches
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. All pipes and fittings shall be submitted for approval according to Specification.
B. Different sizes and types of pipes and fittings, even if from the same manufacturer, shall be
placed in separate submittals.
C. The manufacturer shall provide proof of successful past use of the proposed pipes and
fittings on work of a similar environment and scope to that for this Project
D. As a minimum, the submittal shall include the following:
1. The Contractor shall develop and submit a Method Statement according to “Quality
Control, Inspection and Testing”, to cover all aspects of installation of HDPE Pipes
and Fittings
a. Product Data: Manufacturer’s Specifications and Installation instructions. Test
results that show compliance with the Contract Documents.
b. Method Statement.
i. Method Statement shall include details on connection of pipe to manhole lining
material to insure protection of concrete on lined concrete manholes.
c. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. These shall show all relevant details including:
i. Connections at manholes
ii. Joining to existing mains
iii. Couplings and Thrust Blocks
iv. Stanks
v. Joint details
vi. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with samples of the proposed
connection between the pipe and manhole lining when used with lined concrete
manholes and provide testing as required by the Engineer.
d. Samples:
i. One sample of each type
A. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in sufficient
time to allow the Engineer, or his representative, to inspect the pipes and fittings, if so
desired.
1. All notifications shall be made by written Inspection Requests, in accordance as
specified.
a. An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineer’s office, but the original must
arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.
a. 24 hours on site
b. 72 hours for areas within Kuwait
c. 3 weeks outside of Kuwait
A. Pipes, fittings and specials shall be delivered, handled and stored according to the
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting pipes and fittings. Steel chains, clamps
or cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes.
a. Nylon slings shall be used for securing pipes during transport and storage.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Pipes shall be unloaded from trucks by crane. Under no circumstances shall pipes
be tipped onto the ground.
4. Pipes shall be stored under a shade, in such a manner as to allow air to circulate freely
among the pipes and thereby avoid excessive build up of heat in the pipes.
a. Any pipes damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked and set
aside.
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged pipes shall be submitted in writing to the
c. No repairs to damaged pipes shall be attempted without the Engineer’s approval.
d. Any damaged pipes deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall be removed
6. Elastomeric sealing rings (rubber gaskets) shall be stored in closed containers, out of
direct sunlight, until needed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. HDPE pipes shall be manufactured in metric sizes according to the relevant ISO standards.
B. HDPE pipes shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of EN 13476-1.
C. HDPE pipes shall have a minimum Ring Stiffness of 8KN/m2 as tested per ISO 9969.
D. Elastomeric sealing rings (rubber gaskets) shall be made from EPDM.
E. Pipe sizes shall be as shown on the drawings, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. The designated sizes on the drawings refer to nominal external diameters for Solid Wall
Pipes and internal diameter for profile wall pipes.
F. Gravity sewer pipes shall meet the following SDR requirements. 'SDR' is the Standard
Dimension Ratio, which is defined as the ratio of pipe diameter (measured at midpoint of
wall) to pipe wall thickness.
1. Solid Wall Pipes shall have a SDR of 18 or better.
2. Profile Wall Pipes shall have an effective SDR of 18 or better.
3. Profile Wall Pipes shall meet the following requirements in addition to the specified SDR.
The tensile strength of the seam on spirally wound pipe shall be measured in
accordance with prEN 13476-1 Table 15.
The minimum waterway thickness shall be equal to or greater e5 specified in Table 6
of prEN 13476-1.
2.02 HDPE BASE RESIN MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
The base resin shall have a cell classification according to ASTM D 3350 for pipes and
injection molded fittings as follows. The selected resin shall also be capable of meeting all
other requirements within this specification. Compounds that have a higher cell
classification in one or more properties shall be acceptable provided the other product
requirements are met.
Property Cell Class

1 Resin Density 3
2 Melt Index 3
3 Flexural Modulus 5
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
4 Tensile Strength 4
5 ECSR 4
6 HDB NPR
7 Color & UV Code C
Legend: 1 – Minimum carbon black content shall be between 2-3%
The resin shall also meet the following requirements. The test shall be carried out in the form
of a solid wall pipe made from the relevant extrusion.
PROPERTY UNIT VALUE STANDARD

ISO
Resistance to internal MPa 3.9 4427
pressure 80oC water in water
hoop stress tested to 165
hours
Resistance to internal MPa 2.8 4427
pressure 80oC water in water
hoop stress tested to 1000
hours
2.03 PIPE TESTING
Pipe shall be tested for ‘Resistance to Internal Puncture’ in accordance with WIS 4-35-01 as
detailed in Article 6.9 and Appendix B.
On profile wall pipes the point of impact shall be adjusted such that it is in the thinnest
section, typically in the middle of the hollow corrugation.
Pipe shall be tested for ‘Resistance to Water Jetting’ in accordance with WIS 4-35-01 as
detailed in Article 6.10 and Appendix C.
The test shall be modified such that the minimum test pressure shall be 180 Bar.
C. Pipe shall be tested for ‘Resistance to Longitudinal Bending’ in accordance with WIS 4-35-
01 as detailed in Article 6.11 and Appendix D.
2.04 PIPE BEDDING/SURROUND
G. Pipe bedding and pipe surround shall be strictly in accordance with ASTM
D2321-“Undereground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity
Flow Applications”.
1. The backfilling details are shown on the Typical Drawings.
2. All bedding, haunching and backfilling materials shall be placed in accordance with ASTM
D2321.
3. In all cases the bedding, haunching and pipe surround (initial backfill) shall be encased in
geotextile membrane.
4. Where cover to the pipe is less than 1.2 metre, the pipe shall be encased in Class C40
concrete (see Section 03300 of the Specifications).
5. Where pipes are to be laid beneath secondary roads, and material other than Class A1
(ASTM D2321) is used from the top of the pipe surround up to the road subgrade the
backfill up to the road subgrade shall be compacted to a minimum 95% M.D.D.
2.05 CONCRETE
A. Concrete and accessories shall comply with the relevant sections in Division 3 of these
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
specifications.
2.06 PIPELINE WARNING TAPE
A. Pipeline warning tape shall comply with the requirements of Section 02321.
2.07 PIPELINE MARKER POSTS
A. Pipeline marker posts shall comply with the requirements of Section 02321.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Trench excavation, pipe installation and backfill shall comply with Specifications section –
Trench Excavation, Pipe Installation and Backfill, unless this is at variance with the
requirements set out herein, which case the latter shall take precedence.
Haunching and initial backfilling shall be carried out immediately after pipe has been placed in
the trench.
Pipes shall be checked by laser, sight rails or string line, for grade and level at the ends of each
pipe and at intervals not greater than 4 metres.
Where HDPE profile wall pipes are embedded in manhole walls, the minimum embedded length
of pipe shall be 2 x corrugation pitch or the lengths given in the table below, whichever is
the greater. A hydrophilic sealing ring shall be placed around the pipe within the manhole
wall, to ensure a watertight seal.
Nominal Pipe Diameter Minimum Embedded Length

(mm) (mm)
200 75
250 85
300 100
350 120
400 150
500 175
600 200
700 200
900 275
When the pipe is used with lined concrete manholes in sanitary sewers the lining of the manhole
and the pipe shall be connected in such a way as to prevent the deterioration of the
concrete.
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3.02 CCTV INSPECTION
A. CCTV inspection shall be conducted on all completed pipelines in accordance with
Specifications.
3.03 PIPE TESTING

Pipe testing shall be in accordance with Specifications.
Where hydrostatic water testing is undertaken, the pipes shall be tested in accordance with
Sections of these specifications.
3.04 PIPE DEFLECTION
Installed pipes larger than 100mm diameter shall be measured for deflection. The initial
Bedding Acceptance test shall be conducted by a deflectometer for pipe sizes DN 600mm
and below and by manual measurement or deflectometer for pipelines of DN greater than
600.
% Deflection Limits for HDPE Pipe

Maximum Limits
Diameter Pipe Acceptance Bedding Acceptance Installation

(Notes 1 & 2) (Note 3) Acceptance (Note 4)
DN 600mm and 5.0 2.5 3.0
smaller
DN over 600mm 1.25* 0.625* 0.750*
* Numbers shown are the average of the vertical and horizontal deflections individual
measurements of either the vertical or horizontal diameter may show deflections, by
comparison to the reference diameter, of four times the value listed above.
The mandrel shall have a cylindrical cross section, with a diameter not smaller than 1mm
less than the minimum acceptable pipe diameter, given in the table above.
Notes:
1. Pipes whose deflection at any time has exceeded this value will not be accepted for
incorporation into the work. This test may utilise a mandrel and shall be carried out not
less than 1 year after completion of backfilling, but prior to expiry of guarantee period.
2. The Contractor should note that 10 percent of the total installed cost (pipe, bedding, backfill
and testing) shall be withheld until completion of testing of flexible pipe.
3. To be measured after placing of the surround material, and after withdrawal of trench
sheeting to above the crown of the pipe, but before backfilling. For non-pressure pipes, the
permissible percentage deflection will be accepted only as an elongation of the vertical
diameter, and no reduction will be acceptable at this stage.
4. To be measured not less than four weeks after completion of backfilling.
5. The Contractor's attention is drawn to all applicable parts of Specifications- "Sanitary
Sewerage Systems" for details of required tests.
3.05 DISPOSAL OF TESTING WATER
The water used in testing of pipelines shall be disposed of in a manner approved by the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
AND PROTECTION
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02634
POLYMER CONCRETE PIPES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the requirements for the design and manufacture of Concrete
Polymer Pipes and includes but is not limited to the following.
1. Definitions.
2. Description of constituent materials.
3. Manufacture.
4. Joints
5. Performance
A. Summary of Works
B. Submittals
C. Quality Assurance/Quality Control, Inspection and Testing
D. Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
E. Site Safety and Security
F. Field Engineering
G. Trench Excavation, Pipe Installation and Backfill.
H. Tunnelling.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. DIN 16946-2; Table 3 - Unsaturated Polyester Resins

B. DIN 226-1: 1983-04, Table 1 - Mineral Aggregates.
C. DIN 54815 – “Pipes made of Filled Polyester Resin Moulding Material”
D. DIN 16946-2
E. DIN 4226-1
F. DIN 18196
G. ASTM D4161
H. ASTM F477
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Polymer Concrete Pipes are classified as “rigid” for structural purposes and shall comply with the
requirements for minimum proof crushing strengths given in Table 1 below.
B. Rocker Pipes are defined as short lengths of pipe which are installed to increase the allowable
deflection of the pipe and make it more “flexible” near structures and manholes.

A. Pipes:
1. Pipe sizes shall be as shown on the drawings, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
a. The designated sizes on the drawings refer to nominal internal diameters.
2. Pipes shall be suitable for sustained operating temperatures of up to 45°C.
3. Unless noted otherwise, pipe surround shall be as indicated in Specifications for open trench
installed pipe.
B. Joints:
1. All joints shall be shall be sealed with flexible elastomeric sealing rings.
2. All elastomeric sealing rings (rubber gaskets) shall be obtained from the pipe manufacturer.
3. All joints shall be capable of withstanding a minimum external pressure of 100 Kpa without
infiltration, in both the straight and misaligned positions.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02634-1 POLYMER CONCRETE
PIPES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Markings of Pipes and Fittings

1. Each pipe shall be clearly marked at the place of manufacture with the following
information.
d. The nominal diameter and laying length
f. Strength class
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit sufficient information to the Engineer, prior to purchase according to
Specification, in order to verify compliance with the specifications. Such information shall
include at least the following:
1. Manufacturer’s name and literature on the proposed pipe
2. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures
3. Manufacturer’s certification that the pipe was manufactured, sampled, tested and inspected in
accordance with the requirements.
4. Manufacturers drawings showing the pipe designs, dimensions, weights and pipe lengths
5. Manufacturer’s storage instructions
6. Manufacturer’s shipping schedules
7. Structural calculations for the pipe based on the site conditions.
8. Material samples shall be submitted as required in the relevant sections within these
specifications, or as requested by the Engineer.
B. Method Statements
1. The Contractor shall provide method statements meeting the requirements of Specification,
for at least the following activities, or as requested by the Engineer.
2. Pipe testing.
3. Construction of manhole and chamber connections.
C. Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings according to Specification for at least the following
items:
1. Pipeline profile together with details of all joints, manholes etc.
2. Details of handling and jointing.
A. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in sufficient time to
allow the Engineer or his representatives to inspect and test the products, if so desired.
1. All notifications shall be made by written “Inspection Requests” in accordance with “Quality
Control, Inspection and Testing”.

a. 24 hours on site
b. 72 hours for other areas within Kuwait
________________________________________________________________________________________
PIPES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
B. “Inspection Requests” shall be submitted to the Engineer during the onsite installation work prior
to proceeding with the following activities. Minimum notification time shall be 24 hours.
1. Pipe trench backfill
2. Pipeline leakage testing
C. Final Inspection:
Any product found to be fabricated from unapproved materials or incorrectly fabricated,
incorrectly installed, poorly fitted or damaged, shall be rejected and removed from the works.
1. No site repairs will be allowed, unless authorised by the Engineer
2. The Contractor shall bear all costs for replacing unacceptable work.
A. Delivery, storage and handling shall be according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, along
with the following provisions:
1. Transportation, storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a manner to
2. Only nylon slings shall be used for lifting products. Steel chains, clamps or cables
shall not be allowed lifting purposes.
3. Steel Chains or cables may be allowed for securing products during transport or
storage, provided that protective padding or timber blocking is utilised.
4. Do not store products directly on the ground, unless approved by the Engineer.
5. Ensure adequate timber blocking is utilised to provide sufficient support.
6. Special care shall be taken to avoid damage to bell or spigot ends
7. If stored outside, cover products to prevent UV degradation, as recommended by
the manufacturer.
8. Any products found to be fabricated from unapproved materials shall be rejected
and removed from site.
9. Any products found to be incorrectly fabricated shall be marked and set aside
10. Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation, shall be marked by
the Contractor and set aside.
11. Proposals for repair of any damaged or improperly fabricated products shall be
submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval.
12. No repairs to damaged products shall be attempted without the Engineer’s
approval.
13. Any products deemed unsuitable for repair or alteration by the Engineer shall be
removed from site and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A Polymer Concrete:
Polymer Concrete (also known as polyester resin concrete) consists of chemically
stable mineral aggregates embedded in a cured thermosetting resin. The
thermosetting resin shall be unsaturated polyester resin. Additives and curing
agents shall be as recommended by the resin supplier.
2.02 PIPES
________________________________________________________________________________________
PIPES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Polymer concrete (also known as polyester resin concrete) consists of chemically
stable mineral aggregates embedded in a cured thermosetting resin. The laminate
structure shall be uniform throughout the pipe wall. The finished product shall be
suitable for continuous service in a sanitary sewer environment ranging from a pH 1
to pH 10.
B. Materials:
1.
Resin. The thermosetting resin shall be vinylester resin. The resin shall be of type 1130 or
1140 as specified in table 3 of DIN 16946-2. Additives and curing agents shall be as
recommended by the resin supplier.
2. Aggregates. Aggregates and fillers shall be washed and oven dried natural quartzitic
material as in DIN 4226-1. The filler content in the pipe wall shall be 90(+/-3) percent by
mass. Coarse aggregates shall have a maximum grain size limited by the lesser of 16mm or
one-third of the minimum wall thickness. The degree of uniformity, U, and the grading of
the particles, as specified in DIN 18196, shall be at the manufacturer’s discretion.
C. Dimensions and Tolerances:
1. The minimum wall thickness shall be sufficient to support the dead load with a
minimum factor of safety of 2.0 and in the case of jacking pipe the wall thickness
shall be sufficient to support the anticipated jacking loads with a minimum factor of
safety of 3.0 but in no case less than the minimum shown in DIN 54815-1.
2. The dimensions and tolerances of the pipes shall be in accordance with DIN 54815-1.
D. Polymer Concrete Pipes are normally of two types:

1. With GRP (Glass Reinforced Plastic) Lining.
2. Unlined.
Normally, pipes intended for the carriage of sewage shall have an internal GRP liner.
However, unlined pipes may be acceptable, provided that independent Third Party
testing shows that they are suitable for the prevailing conditions in Kuwait.
2.03 LINED PIPES
A. The liner shall have an inner resin-rich layer of at least 1mm thickness and a
minimum overall thickness of 5mm or 0.5% of the nominal pipe diameter,
whichever is the greater. This inner lining shall be manufactured from Vinylester
Resin and ECR Corrosion resistant Glass.
B. The outer surface of pipes shall have a resin-rich coating of 1mm minimum
thickness.
C. The liner and coating shall be thoroughly and uniformly bonded to the polymer
concrete of the main pipe wall.
2.04 UNLINED PIPES
A. Pipes without lining shall be manufactured from Vinylester Resin for the full
thickness of the pipe.
________________________________________________________________________________________
PIPES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2.05 JOINTS
A. Concrete polymer pipes shall be provided with an “elastomeric joint sealing ring” sealed jointing
system of the integral spigot and socket type or the detachable coupling/sleeve type. Seats shall
be formed or ground.
1. Pipes installed in open trenches shall be provided with a jointing system of the integral spigot
and socket type or the detachable coupling/sleeve type.
2. Pipes installed via trenchless methods (i.e. tunnelling or micro-tunnelling) shall be provided
with a jointing system of the detachable coupling/sleeve type with compression discs.
a. Detachable coupling/sleeves shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel. The sleeves
shall be either flush or smaller in outside diameter than the pipe.
b. Compression discs shall conform to the ends of the pipe after the joint is formed to
distribute jacking loads without extending into the inside of the pipe. The discs shall be
factory fabricated from fibreboard or knotless softwood and factory installed.
c. The completed joint shall meet the performance requirements of ASTM D4161.
B. Elastomeric Joint Sealing Rings

1. The term ‘elastomeric joint sealing ring' shall be taken to encompass flat, convex face sealing
rings and finned type sealing rings as well as rings that are circular in cross section.
2. All joints in rings where ends of straight sections are joined to form the ring shall be
vulcanised. Joints made by glues or adhesives will not be permitted.
3. Elastomeric sealing rings for water supply and sewerage pipelines shall be manufactured
from ethylene propylene rubber (EPDM or EPM), styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) will not be
accepted.
4. The configuration and location shall be determined by the pipe manufacturer and shall
provide a watertight joint at allowed deflection angles and after compression from tunnelling
and jacking operations.
5. Sealing rings shall be stored in a clean, cool condition out of direct sunlight and without
being deformed.
2.06 RUBBER SEALING RINGS AND GASKETS
A. Elastomeric Joint Sealing Rings:

1. The term 'elastomeric joint sealing ring' shall be taken to encompass flat, convex
face sealing rings and finned type sealing rings as well as rings that are circular in
cross section.
2. All joints in rings where ends of straight sections are joined to form the ring shall be
vulcanised. Joints made by glues or adhesives will not be permitted.
3. Elastomeric sealing rings for water supply and sewerage pipelines shall be
manufactured from ethylene propylene rubber (EPDM or EPM).
4. Sealing rings for use on sewage pipelines manufactured from styrene butadiene
rubber (SBR) will not be accepted.
5. All sealing rings shall have physical and chemical properties, including hardness
(measured in International Rubber Hardness Degrees - IRHD), compatible with the
pipe material.
6. Sealing rings shall be stored in a clean, cool condition out of direct sunlight and
without being deformed.
7. Sealing rings for use with thermoplastic pipes shall contain no component which
can react with the material of the pipes.
2.07 PIPE CRUSHING STRENGTH
A. Pipes shall be supplied to minimum proof crushing strengths as shown in Table 1

below:
Nominal Minimum Proof Crushing Strength (kN/m)
________________________________________________________________________________________
PIPES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Diam. Class 90 Class 110 Class 130 Class 150
(mm)
100 - - - 15
150 - 17 - 23
200 - 22 - 30
225 - 25 - 34
250 - 28 - 38
300 27 33 39 45
400 36 44 52 60
450 41 55 59 68
500 45 66 65 75
600 54 77 78 90
700 63 88 91 105
800 72 99 104 120
900 81 110 117 135
1000 90 121 130 150
1100 99 132 143 165
1200 108 143 156 180
1300 117 154 169 195
Nominal Minimum Proof Crushing Strength (kN/m)

Diam.
(mm) Class 90 Class 110 Class 130 Class 150
1400 126 165 182 210

1500 135 165 195 225
1600 144 176 208 240
1700 153 187 221 255
1800 162 198 234 270
1900 171 209 247 285
2000 180 220 260 300
The crushing strengths listed above are derived from the following formula: Crushing Strength = Class No. X
Nominal internal pipe diameter in metres.
This formula may be used to obtain the required minimum proof strengths of pipes having Diameters other than
those listed in the table.
2.08 STRESS CORROSION TEST
A. Stress Corrosion Test shall consist of applying a constant load and reaction along
the top and bottom of the test piece (comprising a suitable length of pipe) and
recording the change in deflection with time. The load and reaction shall be
________________________________________________________________________________________
PIPES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
uniformly distributed along the length of the test piece and shall not vary by more
than +2% in total magnitude as the test piece deflects.
B. For the duration of the test, the inside of the pipe shall be filled with a 1.0 Normal
H2SO4 solution, up to a depth equal to one quarter of the pipe diameter, with the
ambient temperature maintained within +2% of 23°C. The test will not be regarded
as complete until the duration has reached at least 10,000 hours.
2.09 TESTING OF JOINTS FOR WATERTIGHTNESS

A. Watertightness testing of joints shall be carried out on an assembly of two complete
pipes, joined together according to the proposed standard jointing system.
B. All types of joints shall be designed to be watertight against the internal and external
hydrostatic pressures shown in Table 2 below:
TABLE 2
Depth to Invert Pressure
Not greater than 8m 1.2 bar
8m - 16m 2.0 bar
Greater than 16m As Agreed
2.10 TESTING OF PIPES FOR WATERTIGHTNESS
A. Testing of pipes for watertightness shall be carried out after allowing the test units
to stand full of water for sufficient time to allow for absorption, as given in the table
below:
Preconditioning Time for Testing
Wall Thickness Minimum Preconditioning Time
Up to 20mm 42 hours
20 - 35mm 66 hours
Greater than 35mm 90 hours
or: By complete immersion in a water pressure tank at ambient temperature for 24

hours at a pressure of 2.5 Bar.
B. The pipes shall be capable of sustaining a constant internal water pressure of 1.4
Bar for 15 minutes without signs of leakage, or of distress in the pipe structure.
________________________________________________________________________________________
PIPES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01A LAYING AND JOINTING IN OPEN TRENCH INSTALLATIONS
A. Laying of pipes shall commence from the lowest point of the line with the socket of the pipe in-
upstream direction. Laser apparatus or high precision levelling instruments shall be used to
control proper alignment and gradient. If accepted and approved by Engineer, boning rods can be
alternatively used for this purpose for small stretches of the work.
B. Socket and spigot ends shall be cleaned by a soft brush before resting on the bed. Approved
lubricant shall be applied on spigot and socket sealing element to facilitate smooth movement of
spigot end into socket. Each successive pipe shall be kept in alignment with the previous pipe.
Small diameter pipes can be pushed into the socket of previous pipe with the help of a crow-bar,
using a piece of wood in between as a buffer to avoid any damage by direct contact of the crow-
bar on pipe socket. Large diameter pipes shall be pushed with the help of mechanical devices.
Proper care shall be taken to maintain true alignment during pushing a new pipe into the socket
of an already laid pipe for ease of installation, as well as to avoid any damage to the sealing
element.
C. Excavator buckets shall not be used to push pipes together.
D. Proper care shall be taken to prevent any debris from falling directly on the pipe while laying is
in progress by protecting the trench sides properly.
E. Pipe class and pipe surround shall be in accordance with the tables and details in the Typical
Drawings.
3.01B LAYING AND JOINTING IN TRENCHLESS INSTALLATIONS
A. Laser apparatus shall be used to control proper alignment and gradient.

B. Coupling sleeves and spigot ends shall be cleaned by a soft brush before assembly.
Approved lubricant shall be applied on spigot and socket sealing element to
facilitate smooth movement of spigot end into socket. Each successive pipe shall be
kept in alignment with the previous pipe. Proper care shall be taken to maintain true
alignment during pushing a new pipe into the socket of an already laid pipe to avoid
any damage to the sealing element.
C. Proper care shall be taken to prevent damage to the spigot ends while lowering the
pipe into the jacking shaft and to prevent any debris from falling directly on the pipe
while the pipe is inside the jacking shaft.
3.02 MANHOLE CONNECTIONS
A. Due to differential settlement in the region of the manhole and adjacent pipe zone, damage to the
pipe structure may occur at this zone. To prevent this damage, additional joints on either side of
the manhole shall be installed by using short pipe pieces or rocker pipes. A minimum of one
rocker pipe shall be installed adjacent to each connection to manholes shall be provided. Other
system achieving this flexibility recommended by the pipe manufacturer and approved by
Engineer may also be used.
3.03 CUTTING PIPES
A. Pipes shall be cut off squarely to the required size, clean and without damage to the pipe by an
abrasive disc cutter.
B. After cutting, all sharp edges shall be smoothened by means of grinding with suitable discs, by
filing, or any other approved means. .
3.04 JOINTING OF CUT PIPES
________________________________________________________________________________________
PIPES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Pipe ends on pipes installed using trenchless methods shall be factory made. All cuts to adjust
pipe-laying lengths shall be made within the manholes.
B. Pipe ends on pipes installed using open trench methods may be field cut provided the spigot is the
same diameter as the pipe wall.
3.05 TESTING
Testing of installed pipelines shall be performed as specified for pipes installed in Sanitary Sewers
and for pipes installed in storm sewers and other applications subject to the following requirements.
A. Air Test
1. Low-pressure air test shall be performed in accordance with ASTM 828.
B. Water Test
1. The part of the pipeline under test shall be filled with water to give an effective minimum
internal water pressure of 6 m. at the highest point and a maximum of 13 m. at the lowest
point.
2. The pressure of 6 m. head of water shall be maintained for one hour to allow initial
absorption of water.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
PIPES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02636
VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the manufacture of vitrified clay pipe, fittings and specials.
1. Installation and field testing requirements will be found in the related sections listed below.
A. Submittals
C. Materials and Equipment
1.03 REFERENCES
unless otherwise stated in the specifications, or unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. BS EN 295 Vitrified Clay Pipes and Fittings and Pipe Joints for Drains and
Sewers
2. ASTM C301-90 Standard Test Methods for Vitrified Clay Pipe
1.04 DEFINITIONS
1. “VC” shall mean Vitrified Clay.
2. “Pipe Specials” shall mean unusual fittings or bends not covered by recognised
manufacturing standards.
A. Pipes:
1. Pipe sizes shall be as shown on the drawings, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
a. The designated sizes on the drawings refer to nominal internal diameters.
2. Where pressure pipe is designated for non-pressure applications, manufacturing shall
conform to the designated pressure class, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3. Pipes and gaskets shall be suitable for sustained operating temperatures of up to 45°C.
4. Unless noted otherwise, pipe surround shall be as indicated in Specifications.
B. Joints:
1. All joints shall be spigot and socket type with flexible elastomeric sealing rings, unless
approved otherwise by the Engineer.
a. Double sockets or slip on sockets may be used adjacent to structures or special
fittings.
2. All elastomeric joint seals (rubber gaskets) shall be obtained from the pipe
manufacturer.
3. All joints shall be capable of withstanding an external pressure of 100 Kpa without
infiltration, in both the straight and misaligned positions.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02636- 1 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Bends and Special Fittings
1. All bends and special fittings, even if manufactured elsewhere, shall be obtained from
the pipe manufacturer, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
2. All bends shall be “long-radius” ,unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3. Additional testing for bends and special fittings may be directed by the Engineer, at the
Contractors expense.
D. Markings of Pipes and Fittings

1. Each pipe, special or fitting shall be clearly marked at the place of manufacture with
the following information.
d. The nominal diameter
f. Strength class
g. The angle of bends or branches
h. Where appropriate, individual reference number
i. Number and mark of independent testing agency (if applicable)
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Pipe and standard joints shall be submitted for all proposed sizes and pressure classes for
the Engineer’s approval
1. The submittal shall clearly indicate or include the following:
a. Pipe manufacturer’s name.
b. Proposed pipe diameters
c. Proposed pipe pressure class or rating
d. Proposed manufactured lengths
e. Proposed joint type
f. Proposed sealing ring material and manufacturer’s name
g. Maximum depth of cover
h. Minimum depth of cover
i. Maximum internal operating pressure
j. Maximum internal test pressure
k. Maximum allowable external pressure
l. Recent type test results according to the relevant standard of manufacture to prove
the adequacy of the products.
B. Fittings, bends and specials for all proposed sizes and pressure classes shall also be
submitted, for the Engineer’s approval.
1. Samples shall be supplied according to the Engineer’s request.
A. Prior to dispatch from the factory, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in sufficient
time to allow the Engineer or his representatives to inspect and test the pipes, if so desired.
1. All notifications shall be made by written Inspection Requests in accordance with
Section 01400.
a. An advance copy may be faxed to the Engineer’s office, but the original must
arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.

a. 24 hours on site
b. 72 hours for areas within Kuwait
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Pipes, fittings and specials shall be delivered, handled and stored according to the
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting pipes and fittings. Steel chains, clamps
or cables shall not be allowed for lifting purposes.
a. Steel chains or cables may be allowed for securing pipes during transport or
storage, provided protective padding or timber blocking is utilised.
4. Do not stack pipes with timber blocking; lay directly on pipe barrels by alternating
socket ends.
5. Cover pipes to prevent UV degradation of sealing rings where sealing rings are
attached to pipes.
a. Any pipes damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked and set
aside.
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged pipes shall be submitted in writing to the
c. No repairs to damaged pipes shall be attempted without the Engineer’s approval.
d. Any damaged pipes deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall be removed
form site and replaced, at the Contractors expense.
7. Elastomeric sealing rings (if they are not a fixed part of the coupling) shall be stored in
closed containers, or out of direct sunlight, until needed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Only manufacturers operating under an accredited ISO 9000 Quality Assurance System
shall be considered.
B. Vitrified Clay pipes and fittings shall be manufactured in metric sizes according to ISO
standards.
C. Routine Testing:
1. The Engineer may ask the Contractor to conduct all tests in his presence or may
appoint a representative to supervise and witness all the tests on the manufacturer’s
premises, all at the Contractor’s cost.
D. Surface Conditions:
1. The inner and outer surfaces of the pipe barrels and fittings shall be ceramic glazed or
unglazed, meeting all the requirements of EN295.
a. The outer surface of the spigot may remain unglazed for a length equal to the
socket depth.
b. The body of pipes and fittings shall be hard and solid and differences in colour, if
any, shall not affect the quality.
E. Dimensional Accuracy:
1. Deviation of pipe barrel from straightness, when measured in accordance with Clause
2.5 of EN 295-1, shall not exceed the values given below:
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Nominal Deviation
Diam.(mm) (mm/m length)
< 150 6
150-250 5
300 and above 4
2. The permissible bore to be within ± 2.5% of the nominal bore

3. Dimensions of bends, junctions, connectors, adaptors, taper pipes, V-rings, insertable
branches, B-rings, stoppers, P-rings, saddles and other fittings, if any, shall comply
with Clause 2.3 of EN 295-1
F. Pipe Strength:
1. Pipes shall have the minimum crushing strengths as shown in Table No.1 below.
G. Impermeability to Water:
1.As EN 295-1, Clause 2.14
H. Wall Roughness:
1.As EN-295, Clause 2.16
I. Abrasion Resistance
1. As EN-295, Clause 2.17
TABLE NO.1
(Crushing Strength
in kN/m)
Nominal EN 295
Size Class Class Number
DN L 95 120 160 200
200 24 32 40
250 30 40 50
300 36 48 60
350 42 56 70
400 38 48 64
450 43 54 72
500 48 60 80
600 48 57 72
700 60 67 84
800 60 76 96
900 60 95
1000 60 95
1200 60
2.02 JOINT SEALING ELEMENTS
A. All joints in vitrified clay pipes shall be designed to withstand a pressure of at least 10m
head of water for pipes up to 800mm diam. and 13m head of water for pipes greater than
800mm diam Such joints shall be constructed by introducing sealing elements between
socket and spigot pipe barrel gaps.
B. Pipes of 200mm diam. and above will have a sealing element fixed on both the spigot and
socket ends. These are called K-type joints. The sealing element on the socket shall consist
of a rigid compensating material and an elastic sealing and compensating material on the
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
spigot end, as described in Clause 3.1 of EN 295-1.
C. Joint material shall be suitable for the environmental conditions in the sewers, which may
include the following:
1. Sewage with BOD levels up to 1000 ppm
2. Sewage dissolved H2S up to 40 mg./l
3. H2S gas concentrations up to 2000 mg./l
4. pH values between 1 and 13 in condensates
5. Sewage temperature up to 40 0C.
2.03 SEALING FUNCTIONS
A. Watertightness:
1. Joint assemblies shall be permanently tight against internal and external hydrostatic
pressure of 0 to 1.0 bar for pipes up to 800 mm diam. and 1.2 bars for pipes greater
than 800 mm diam. The test shall be carried out in accordance with Clauses 3.2.1 and
3.2.2 of EN 295-1
B. Angular Deflection:
1. As EN 295-1, Clause 3.3
C. Shear Resistance:
1. As EN 295-1, Clause 3.4
D. Shear Resistance:
1. As EN 295 - 1, Clause 3.4
E. Mechanical Properties:
1. Tensile Strength and Elongation of Tear
As EN 295 – 3, Clause 15.2
2. Hardness
As EN 295 - 3, Clause 15.3
3. Compression Test
a. As EN 295 - 3, Clause 15.5
4. Long-Term Behaviour
a. Drop in the Restoring Stress (Relaxation)
As EN 295 - 3, Clause 15.4
b. Creep Behaviour
EN 295 – 3, Clause 18.6
F. Chemical Resistance
1. Chemical Resistance of Joint Assemblies:
Joint assemblies tested in accordance with EN 295-1 Clauses 3.7.1 and 3.7.2 shall
remain tight over a period of seven days at a temperature in the pipeline of at least
40°C when exposed to the action of:
a. Dilute sulphuric acid with a pH value of 2.

b. Dilute caustic soda solution with a pH value of 12.
c. Aqueous wetting solution with a concentration of 5% by volume (Nekanil 910
Liquid or another wetting solution of identical composition only for sealing
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
elements bonded to the pipe.
d. The tightness shall then be tested in accordance with Clause 13 of EN 295 - 3.
2. In addition to the above, the chemical resistance to joint assemblies of clay pipes shall
be tested in accordance with BS 65, Appendix (H) using a solution 10% by weight of
Sulphuric Acid.
3. A total of 5 samples each of 200mm diam., 300 mm diam. and 500mm dia. pipes to be
filled with the sulphuric solution, maintained at a temperature of 50 0C for a period of
100 days, with the longitudinal axis of the pipe in the vertical position.
4. Subsequently, water pressure tests (impermeability and internal pressure) shall be
performed on each test sample as per B.S. 65 Appendix D. The samples shall
withstand an internal pressure of 100 KPa for a duration of 5 minutes without any
apparent failure or leakage.
5. The tests shall be performed by an independent, approved and certified Laboratory.
a. Chemical Resistance of Materials
As EN 295 - 3, Clause 22.
G. Thermal Stability and Resistance to Aging:

1. Thermal Cycling Stability
As EN 295 - 1, Clause 3.8
2. Long-Term Thermal Stability
As EN 295 - 1, Clause 3.9
3. Resistance to Aging
As EN 295 - 3, Clause 15.6
2.04 TESTING
A. Pipes and Fittings:

1. Visual Inspection
On arrival at the site and before acceptance all the pipes and fittings shall be inspected
for some visible defects, damage, and cracks. Fine cracks can be detected by dusting
with talcum powder. Any pipe or fitting damaged or having defects or cracks shall be
rejected.
2. Dimensions
For conformity with specified requirements, dimensions of the pipes and fittings shall
be measured as follows:
a. Internal diameter inside the barrel at a distance of about 50 mm from the socket
level.
b. External diameter of socket outside pipe at the middle of socket.
c. External diameter of spigot outside pipe at spigot end.
d. Average of the wall thickness shall be measured at several points of the barrel.
e. Deviation of the pipe barrel from straightness shall be determined using a straight
gauge rod having a length of about 4/5ths of the pipe length. The gauge rod shall
be kept outside or inside the pipe barrel approximately equidistant from spigot end
and socket shoulder. Distance at the centre of the rod, between the rod and pipe
barrel, shall be measured and related to the length of gauge length. This ratio shall
be within the permissible deviation as mentioned in Clause 2.01 D above.
3. Crushing Strength Test

As EN 295-3, Clause 4 complying with table No.1, Clause 2.01 E of these
specifications.
4. Bending Tensile Test
As EN 295 - 3, Clause 5
5. Impermeability to Water
As EN 295 - 3, Clause 1
6. Abrasion Resistance
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
As EN 29S - 3, Clause 12
7. Chemical resistance tests for pipes and fittings as B.S 65:1981, Appendix E or its
latest revision.
8. Water absorption and acid resistance tests as B.AS. 65:1981, Appendix F or its latest
revision.
9. Internal pressure test per BS 65: 1981 Appendix D or its latest revision.
10. Joint Sealing Elements:
a. Dimensions – Shall be determined by actual measurement up to 0.1 mm in the case
of diameters and up to 0.5 mm for other dimensions.
b. Watertightness - The watertightness shall be tested on a joint assembly subjected to
internal pressure. A test with the assembly subjected to external pressure shall be
carried out, if this is required by the design of the seal.
Join two pipes horizontally and fill slowly with water venting the assembly at the
same time. Filling with water may be limited to the area of the pipe joint. A sleeve
completely surrounding the pipe joint shall be filled with water when testing using
external pressure.
The clearance in the joint shall lie within the upper third of the range of possible
values.
Pressures of 0, 0.05 and 1.0 bar shall be maintained successively for periods of
five minutes each. The pressure shall be related to the pipe crown.
c. Angular Deflection - EN 295 - 3, Clause 18.2

d. Shear Resistance - EN 295 - 3, Clause 18.4 and 18.5
11. Mechanical Properties

a. Tensile Strength and Elongation at Break - As EN 295 - 3, Clause 15.2
b. Compression Set - As EN 295 - 3, Clause 15.5
c. Long-Term Behavior - As EN 295 - 3, Clause 15.4
(i) Relaxation - As EN 295 - 3, Clause 15.4.1
(ii) Creep - Per EN 295 - 3, Clause 18.6
12. Chemical Resistance

a. Joint Assemblies - As EN 295 - 3, Clause 20
b. Materials - As EN 295 - 3, Clause 20
13. Thermal Stability and Resistance to Ageing

a. Thermal Cycling - As EN 295 - 3, Clause 21.1
b. Long-Term - As EN 295 - 3, Clause 21.2
c. Resistance to Aging - As EN 295 - 3, Clause 15.6
2.05 INSPECTION
A. General:
1. As EN 295-2, Clause 1.4
B. Internal Control
1. As EN 295-2, Clause 1.4.2
C. Third Party Inspection

1. As EN 295 - 3, Clause 1.4.3
All tests shall be supervised and certified by a third party inspection agency named and
engaged by the Engineer. All costs for inspection agency shall be born by the Contractor
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
and deemed to be included in his tender price.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LAYING AND JOINTING
A. Laying of pipes shall commence from the lowest point of the line with the socket of the
pipe in the upstream direction. Laser apparatus or high precision levelling instruments shall
be used to control proper alignment and gradient. If accepted and approved by Engineer,
boning rods can be alternatively used for this purpose for small stretches of the work.
B. Socket and spigot ends shall be cleaned by a soft brush before resting on the bed. Approved
lubricant shall be applied on spigot and socket sealing element to facilitate smooth
movement of spigot end into socket. Each successive pipe shall be kept in alignment with
the previous pipe. Small diameter pipes can be pushed into the socket of previous pipe with
the help of a crow-bar, using a piece of wood in between as a buffer to avoid any damage
by direct contact of the crow-bar on pipe socket. Large diameter pipes shall be pushed with
the help of mechanical devices. Proper care shall be taken to maintain true alignment
during pushing a new pipe into the socket of an already laid pipe for ease of installation, as
well as to avoid any damage to the sealing element.
C. Proper care shall be taken to prevent any debris from falling directly on the pipe while
laying is in progress by protecting the trench sides properly.
3.02 MANHOLE CONNECTIONS
A. Due to differential settlement in the region of the manhole and adjacent pipe zone, damage
to the pipe structure may occur at this zone. To prevent this damage, it is necessary to
install joints on either side of the manhole by using short pipe pieces as indicated in the
Drawings. Any other system achieving this flexibility recommended by manufacturer and
approved by Engineer may also be used.
3.03 CUTTING PIPES
A. Cutting of pipes may be necessary to lay the pipe to the required length. Pipes shall be cut
off squarely to the required size, clean and without damage to the pipe by approved means
as under:
1. Cutting ring for DN 100 to 150
2. Cutting chain for DN 100 to 450
3. Disc cutter for all other diameters
B. After cutting, all sharp edges shall be smoothened by means of grinding with suitable discs,
by filing, or any other approved means. .
3.04 JOINTING OF CUT PIPES
A. For small size pipes where the seal is located only in the socket, no extra arrangements are
required to join cut pipes. However, for large sized pipes having k-joints, a P-ring shall be
affixed on the cut end to replace the spigot end seal which is lost with the discarded piece
of cut pipe.
3.05 SUBSEQUENT CONNECTIONS AND REPAIRS
A. When carrying out repairs in a line, or installing a junction or fitting, a make-up piece,
between two existing manholes, using M-seals or BT-couplings, shall be made to ensure a
watertight yet flexible connection.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3.06 TESTING
A. Testing shall be in accordance with Specifications
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02638
CONCRETE MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labour, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install concrete manholes
and chambers, frames and covers, and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
D. Dewatering
A. General Earthworks and Site Preparation
B. Trench Excavation & Backfill Pipelines
E. Sanitary Sewers (Open Cut Method)
F. Cast-In-Situ Concrete
G. Grout
H. Metal Fabrications
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer complete shop drawings showing typical details of construction,
reinforcing, joints, pipe connections to manholes and chambers, manhole rungs, ladders, and
frames and covers.
B. Prior to shipment of any materials required by this Section, submit certified test reports that
the material was manufactured and tested in accordance with all applicable standards
specified herein.
A. The quality of all materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished sections shall be subject to
inspection and acceptance by the Engineer. Such inspection may be made at the place of
manufacture, at the work site after delivery, or at both places, and the materials shall be subject to
rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the Specification requirements; even
though samples have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. Material rejected
after delivery to the work site shall be marked for identification and shall be removed from the work
site at once. All materials, which have been damaged after delivery, will be rejected.
B. At the time of inspection, the materials will be carefully examined for compliance with the
latest ASTM designation specified below, and with these Specifications, and with the
manufacturer's Drawings. All manhole and chamber sections shall be inspected for general
appearance, dimensions, "scratch-strength", blisters, cracks, roughness, soundness, etc. The
surface shall be dense and close-textured.
C. Imperfections in manhole sections may be repaired, subject to the acceptance of the Engineer,
after demonstration by the manufacturer that strong and permanent repairs result. Repairs
shall be carefully inspected before final acceptance. Cement mortar used for repairs shall
have a minimum compressive strength of 270 kg/cm2 at 7 days and 330 kg/cm2 at 28 days,
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02638-1 CONCRETE MANHOLES AND
CHAMBERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
when tested in 75 mm by 150 mm cylinders stored in the standard manner Epoxy mortar may
be utilized for repairs subject to the acceptance of the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS
A. Concrete shall be as specified and per MPW standard details shown on drawings. Portland
Cement shall be Type V, high sulphate resistant conforming to ASTM C150.
2.02 MANHOLE COVERS, FRAMES AND FITTINGS
A. The covers and frames for all manholes under areas of vehicular traffic shall be Grade (a)
Heavy Duty Sanitary Cover and Frame as manufactured by Kuwait Foundry Company. The
covers and frames for manholes in landscaped areas (other than traffic areas) shall be
medium duty Heavy duty gas tight covers and frames shall be of ductile iron (ISO grade
1083 500-7) to the dimension on the Kuwait Foundry Company drawing numbered KF
6293/PR651, or later revision and shall conform to BSEN 124:1994. Medium duty gas tight
frame and covers shall be of ductile iron (ISO 1083 grade 500-7) to the dimensions of
Kuwait Foundry Company drawing KF 6289/PR647 or later revision and conform to BSEN
124-1994. The covers shall be provided with a locking mechanism as shown on the Kuwait
Foundry Company drawing numbered KF 619/533, or later revision. The covers shall be of
sealed type (non-ventilating) accepting where shown on the drawings or instructed by the
Engineer. The covers shall have closed type keyhole.
B. The covers, frame and fittings shall be cleaned of oil and grease by swabbing with an
emulsion cleaner. Immediately after degreasing the surfaces of the covers, frames and
fittings and they shall be sand blasted to conform to the recommendations of BS 5493 and in
accordance with the paint manufacturers instructions. The prepared surfaces will be painted
in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. A primer and two coats each with a Dry
Film Thickness (DFT) 125 microns will be applied to each surface, the primer and each coat
being of a different colour.
C. Sealing Plate: The frame shall also be suitable for installing a sealing plate.
GRP sealing plate to access covers shall be designed to provide a push-fit, gas-tight seal with
the cover frame. The sealing plate shall be in the form of a plug with a flange to prevent the
plate passing into the manhole.
The seal shall be achieved by means of an approved integral synthetic rubber gasket
mechanically looked into the periphery of the plate. The gasket shall be suitable for the
service temperature range 0" C 60oC and possess good weathering and ozone resistance. Any
lubricant used on the seal shall be silicone based. The underside of the plate shall have a
resin-rich finish and there shall be no exposed fibres. Cut and/or drilled faces shall be sealed
with resin.
The plate shall have a minimum thickness of 5 mm and be capable of withstanding a static
load of 150 Kg. applied centrally over a 150 mm square surface area with a deflection,
measured at the centre of the plate, and exceeding 25mm.
A minimum of two numbers reinforced plastic lifting handles shall be provided per plate.
They shall be of the same materials as the plate and securely laminated to the plate or fixed
by stainless steel blind rivets.
The complete seal plate shall be resistant to 10% sulphuric acid at 50 oC for 100 days.
________________________________________________________________________________________
CHAMBERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2.03 CAST IRON AND STEEL WORK
A. All manhole Covers and Frames shall be of ductile iron with locks as per MPW
requirements.
B. Prising and Lifting Bars

All as specified in Clauses 600.44 of the General Specifications.
The contractor, with each twenty manhole covers and frames, shall supply One (1) prising
and lifting bar, manufactured to BS 1452.
2.04 MANHOLE AND CHAMBERS
A. The Proposed manholes and chambers shall be either polycrete manhole system or reinforced
concrete with GRP liner/ epoxy mortar for benching.
2.05 GRP LINER
A. The interior face of new manholes chamber shall be formed from GRP pipe (stiffness 2500
N/m2 or greater as shown on details drawings) used as permanent lining. The pipe shall
withstand all loads imposed during concrete emplacement (with the standard approved
bracing) and any future ground water pressure (without bracing). Suitable GRP formers shall
be provided for cover and reducing slabs. For details regarding the GRP material, refer to
Specifications.
2.06 PROTECTION TO CONCRETE
A. The exterior faces of all concrete structures shall be fair faced and shall be treated with three
coats of coal tar compound as approved by the Engineer with a minimum thickness of 450
microns.
2.07 BENCHING
A. Benching shall be formed in Class C 280 concrete with a 12 mm thick approved epoxy mortar
as specified or 7mm GRP laminate. Channels for pipes of diameter less than 900 mm shall
be formed from vitrified clay channel sections with epoxy mortared joints.
All concrete work for benching shall be thoroughly cured and dry prior to the application of
epoxy mortar.
2.08 EPOXY MORTAR
A. Epoxy mortar shall be a mixture of silica aggregates and two-component epoxy resin and
hardener, and shall be free from any solvent. The two-component epoxy changes to a gel
upon mixing and, together with the chemically resistant aggregate, forms a thixotropic mix
for easy application by trowel to floors, walls and slabs. The epoxy mortar shall have
enough flexibility to bridge minor cracks and shall have good adhesion to dry and damp
concrete surfaces. Primer and sealing coats for the epoxy mortar layer shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer.
The epoxy mortar shall have a strong resistance to a wide range of chemicals prevalent in the
sewage at a temperature of 40 oC. Such as bleach, detergents, sodium chloride solutions
(20%), sodium hydroxide (20%), sulphuric acid solution (17%) w/w. Change of weight shall
not exceed 5%.
________________________________________________________________________________________
CHAMBERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
The epoxy mortar shall be supplied in sealed containers marked at the factory with the date
of manufacture. Any material that has exceeded the recommended shelf life shall not be
used.
The epoxy mortar shall be handled, stored, and used in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall demonstrate the use of the material on site before approval will be
given. The Contractor shall also have the material tested and certified in an independent
laboratory by running tests on the samples to ensure that the material complies with the
specifications. All tests shall be performed at 23oC and 40oC temperatures.
The material shall have the following properties:
Tensile strength per ASTM C 307 at 7 days > 5N/mm2
Concrete strength per ASTM C 579 at 7 days > 60N/mm2
Flexural strength per ASTM C 580 at 7 days > 28N/mm2
Modulus of Elasticity at 7 days <8000N/mm2
Water Absorption per ASTM C 413 < 3%
Bond Strength to Brick Damp and Wet ASTM C 321 > 1.5N/mm2
Chemical resistance per ASTM C 267:
After immersion for 100 days in 17% (w/w) solution of sulphuric acid at 20oC
- Change in weight < 5%
- Loss of compressive strength < 7%
After immersion for 100 days in 17% (w/w) solution of sulphuric acid at 40oC
- Change in weight < 5%
- Loss of compressive strength < 20%
The test specimen, 3 sets for each test, shall remain sound after acid immersion and shall not
exhibit any surface cracking, etching, pitting, or softening of the exposed surface.
2.09 REPLACEMENT MANHOLE
A. Where an existing manhole is to be removed prior to the construction of a new manhole, the
existing manhole shall be demolished and the debris removed to an approved location. The
concrete cover slab shall be carefully broken to recover the frame and cover. Clean frame
and cover shall be delivered to MPW storage yard as directed by the Engineer.
2.10 BACKDROPS TO MANHOLE (PIPES & FITTINGS)
A. These shall be constructed vertically adjacent to the external face of the manhole shaft in
order to reach the invert level inside the manhole. The material shall be vitrified clay pipe for
pipe diameter upto 800mm manufactured to EN 295, Class 240 latest revision. For pipe
________________________________________________________________________________________
CHAMBERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
diameter above 800mm use concrete pipe with GRP liner or polymer concrete pipe with or
without GRP liner
The method of testing shall be as instructed by the Engineer and the backdrop to the manhole
shall be constructed as shown on the drawings
2.11 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement for concrete shall be as defined on the drawings and shall be fusion-bonded
epoxy coated to BS 7295 or ASTM A775/A775 M. Coating shall be of approved resins
factory applied in accordance with the approved standard.
2.12 PIPE CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLE
A. Manhole pipe connections shall be accomplished in the following ways:

1. For making connection to existing manholes, tapered hole shall be filled with
waterproof grout after the pipe is inserted. The grout shall be placed carefully to
completely fill around the pipe. If this method is used, place concrete encasement
outside manhole wall as shown.
2. For cast-in-place sewer manhole bases, the bell and spigot pipelines shall be cast
integrally with the base and encased or cradled to the limits shown on the Drawings.
3. Pressure pipe passing through chambers shall be provided with anchorage flanges cast
in wall.
4. Where no anchorage flange is detailed for ductile iron pipe passing through the cast-in-
place wall, provide integral water stop.
2.13 SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide for the exclusive use of the Engineer, safety equipment,
protective clothing, rubber boots and labour required for checking the setting out of the
works, testing, inspection and for any other attendance, as follows:
Item Quantity
Oxygen deficiency and toxic gas monitor complete with carrying

case, rechargeable batteries and battery charger, all to the
approval of the Engineer. Monitor must be capable of detecting
combustible gas, hydrogen sulphide and oxygen deficiency or
excess in confined work spaces, and be provided with adequate
extension cords for use in 30m deep manholes. 6
Full safety portable access motorized winching equipment

complete withgenerator as specified below 6
Ventilation blower, with portable generators and flexible trunking

hoses of adequate length all to the approval of Engineer 6
Positive pressure face mask with associated portable compressors

and air hoses all to the approval of Engineer 6
One piece waterproof suit with hood 9
Check wader sets with non-ferrous studded soles 9
________________________________________________________________________________________
CHAMBERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Thick and thin rubber glove sets 12 sets of each 24
The above listed items are for entire project and shall be handed over by the contractor to
MPW in working conditions at the end of substantial completion.
B The Contractor is required to provide cranes with safety landing gears and operators for the
working personnel and the Engineers’ safe access to inspect the shaft, tunnelling, manhole,
deep excavation, construction operation.
C. The contractor shall engage safety Engineer during the period of contract for ensuring proper
safety measures during construction and operation maintenance to satisfaction of the
Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1.1 INSTALLATION
A. Manhole and Chamber Construction

1. Manholes and chambers shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the Drawings
and as specified in these Specifications.
2. The blinding shall be made of C-70 sulphate resisting concrete and shall be protected
with membrane tanking systems. Necessary period for setting, as recommended by the
manufacturer, shall be allowed prior to commencing other works to complete the
construction of the manhole.
3. Bases and standard shafts shall be of C-280 reinforced sulphate resisting concrete.
4. Shaft extensions (cast monolithically with standard shaft up to 25cm higher than the
water table or crown of main or secondary sewer connected to the manhole) shall be of
C-280 reinforced sulphate resisting waterproof concrete.
5. Benching shall be of C-280 sulphate resisting concrete. They shall be finished with a
GRP laminate coating, or epoxy mortar
6. The cast-in-place bases of manholes shall be placed and bedded as shown on the
Drawings. The manhole shall be set at a grade to ensure that a minimum of 100 mm
of concrete block and a maximum of 200 mm thickness of concrete block will bring the
manhole frame and cover to final grade. Cast-in-place bases and/or cast-in-place
manholes shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Division 3 and
the details shown on the Drawings.
7. Transition chambers shall be built into the pipelines where shown on the Drawings and
shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. Where fittings proposed by the Contractor are larger than
those detailed, a minimum clearance of 300 mm shall be provided around all fittings
and flanges and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to redesign and construct the
chamber to suit.
8. All manholes and chambers shall be protected externally with either 3 coats of epoxy
coating or waterproofing membrane and protection board systems as indicated in the
drawings. The total dry film thickness of the paint layers shall be a minimum of 450
microns. A specialist firm approved by the Engineer shall carry out all epoxy coating
work. The application and the safety precautions shall be according to the approved
manufacturer's specifications.
9. Manhole shall be protected internally with GRP liner.
10. Where pipes are installed by non-disruptive method (NDM), manholes shall be
constructed in locations shown in drawings within shafts and the annular space
between manhole and shaft shall be backfilled in accordance with specification.
________________________________________________________________________________________
CHAMBERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3.02 REPLACEMENT MANHOLE
A. Where an existing manhole is to be removed prior to the construction of a new manhole, the
existing manhole shall be demolished and the debris removed to an approved location. The
concrete cover slab shall be carefully broken to recover the frame and cover. Clean frame
and cover with wire brush, sand blast to remove any corrosion product, paint with two coats
of coal tar paints, and deliver to Owner's storage yard.
3.03 BACKDROPS TO MANHOLES (PIPES & FITTINGS)
A. These shall be constructed vertically adjacent to the external face of the manhole shaft in
order to reach the invert level inside the manhole.
3.04 CLEANING
A. All new manholes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all silt, debris and foreign matter of any
kind, prior to final inspection.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
CHAMBERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02740
ROADS
PART 1-GENERAL
A. These Particular Specifications are to be used in conjunction with the General Specifications.
The General Specification, separately bound, consists of the following document:
B. State of Kuwait, Ministry of Public Works (MPW), Roads Administration, General

Specifications for Kuwait Motorway/Expressway system, September 1987. A copy of this
Document is available with MPW.
C. This Specification modifies, adds to, or supersedes part of the General Specification. If there
is any conflict or inconsistency between the documents, the requirements of this Specification
shall prevail.
1.02 LOCATION OF THE SITE
A. The Contractor shall be deemed to have based his tender on the information with respect to
the hydrological, physical and climatic conditions of the site and have inspected the site and
surroundings and satisfied himself before submitting his tender as to the nature of the ground
and sub-soil.
1.03 DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall make his own inspection and investigation to determine the existing
conditions and shall make due allowance for this while tendering. No claim will be
entertained for any inaccuracy in the information contained on any of the Drawings.
1.04 EXISTING DEVELOPMENT
A. The Contractor must ascertain the nature of development by his own inspection and
investigation and make due allowance for this when tendering. Potential development as
indicated may or may not be constructed during the contract period.
1.05 AS BUILT-RECORDS
A. The Contractor shall maintain, during the progress of the work, an up-to-date copy of all
drawings, specifications, supplementary data, and revisions.
B. The Contractor shall maintain a continuous record of all field deviations from the drawings, if any,
as approved by the Engineer. At the completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a set of the latest revisions of all plans to show the works "as built".
C. The Contractor shall prepare a set of as-built drawings of the work as newly
constructed/replaced including preparation of schedules giving details, all to be presented in a
form approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the amendment
of utility routes and manholes locations if found to differ from those shown on the Drawings.
1.06 GENERAL WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. The climate is severe in summer. Between May and September, very high ambient
temperatures are experienced. Maximum record shade temperature is 50 o C. Rainfall is
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02740-1 ROADS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
sparse but the intensity of the precipitation may be considerable. Storms during which 25
mm of rain falling is one hour have been recorded. Lightning and thunderstorms also occur.
Relative humidity as high as 100 % has been recorded.
Average barometric pressure is 746.5 mm Hg. The prevailing winds are from the northwest
sector (shamal winds) with secondary winds from the southeast. Velocities are usually below
6 to 7 per second (13.4 to 15.6 mph) but winds of over 40 m per second are likely to occur.
Violent sand and dust storms lasting several hours are common and, even on comparatively
still days, fine dust is carried in suspension in the atmosphere.
1.07 PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS
A. The Contractor shall ensure that the progress of the Works is in accordance with the
approved programme(s).
B. The Contractor shall allow for serving "Notices of Intent" obtaining all necessary
permissions to proceed with the works, and complying with all laws.
C. The Contractor's attention is brought to the presence of other contractors working in the
vicinity on other construction and pipe-laying contract. The Contractor shall programme and
carry out the works accordingly.
D. The Contractor shall allow in his programme and tender for the following:
1. The Contractor will have to work in more than one location on site. The Contractor
shall identify these work locations on his working program.
1.08 WORK INCLUDED
A. Earthwork cutting and filling for road formation gully lines.

B. Subgrade preparation.
C. Subbase.
D. Asphaltic concrete paving.
E. Heavy Duty Interlock Paving.
F. Kerb stone setting.
G. Pavement marking.
1.09 RELATED WORK
A. - Earthworks.
B. - Storm water drainage
C. - Cast-In-Situ Concrete.
D. - Precast Concrete Specialties.
1.10 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M140 - Emulsified Asphalt

B. AASHTO T 27 - Sieve analysis of fine coarse aggregate.
C. AASHTO T168 - Sampling bituminous paving mixtures.
D. AASHTO T211 - Determination of cement content in cement treated aggregate by the
methods of titration.
E. ASSHTO T230 - Determination degree of pavement compaction of bituminous
aggregate mixtures.
F. BS 812 - Methods of sampling and testing mineral aggregate sands and
fillers.
G. Asphalt Institute - M S - 2 Marshal Methods of Mix Design.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
H. MPW - Standard Test procedure for measuring and stripping and heat
stability on Bitumen Aggregate mixture in the presence of water.
I. MPW - Test procedure for detection of Hydrated lime in loose asphalt mixes
or cores.
1.11 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall submit with his Tender, a detailed list of plant and equipment, which he
undertakes to provide on site to carry out the Works. This list shall be as complete as
possible and shall satisfy the Engineer as to type, manufacturer, model identification number,
and year of manufacture, and time required at the site.
B. The Contractor shall bring on the site all items listed and in no case thereafter shall the
Contractor remove from the site any item of plant and equipment, or portions thereof,
without the written consent of the Engineer.
C. All plant and equipment necessary for the construction of and type or section of the work
must be on site and inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of
that particular type or section of the work. Any plant or equipment or portion thereof, which
becomes worn or defective shall be immediately repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall submit original catalogues specific to the requirement for all the
proposed equipment complying with the Specification at the time of submitting his tender.
The catalogue shall be in English. All equipment to be provided for sewer work and
earthwork shall be able to withstand the prevailing climate of Kuwait and the corrosive
environment.
E. The Employer reserves the right to visit the place or places of manufacture of all plant,
equipment, and materials for the purpose of inspection and testing. The Contractor shall
arrange for all reasonable tests and demonstrations to be performed or other evidence to be
provided to satisfy the Engineer of the quality of the items being inspected at no cost to the
Client.
1.12 SUFFICIENCY OF MEANS EMPLOYED
A. The Contractor shall take upon himself the full and entire responsibility for the sufficiency of plant,
labour, machinery, tools or implements, and generally for all means used for the fulfilment of the
Contract.
1.13 STANDARD INTERNATIONAL UNITS
A. Standard metric international units of measurement shall be used throughout this Contract.
1.14 TRAFFIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Where temporary roads closures, road diversions or construction detours are required, the
Contract shall:
1. Execute the work at the time when the traffic is least congested. If, in the opinion of
the Engineer, the work may result in unacceptable inconvenience to traffic, the work
shall be carried out during the night time.
2. Carry out his various activities at such times and in such a manner that no disturbance
is cause to the public.
3. Provide safe pathways not less than 1.20 m wide for pedestrians and traffic lanes not
less than 3.5 m wide for vehicles.
4. Provide in all cases, fencing, signs, light signals, floodlights, and watchmen to ensure
that no mishaps will befall the public or properties in locations.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Reinstate to original condition and make good without delay.
1.15 UTILITIES
A. Definitions: “Utilities" shall mean services ranging from the water, gas and oil supply
networks, electrical and telephone networks, poles, pylons, lighting columns and traffic
signals, storm water drainage and sewerage networks as well as roads, gardens, squares,
trees and other public or private services.
B. Services Coordination
The Contractor shall notify other ministries and authorities whose services might be affected
by the Works regarding his programme.
The Contractor shall curtail his activities in areas where if the services are being relocated by
others until the relocation work is complete.
C. Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities
The Contractor shall refer to and comply with the current regulations and specifications of
the service authorities before commencing any works adjacent to other utilities. This
requirement will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for taking every precaution to
avoid damage to these utilities and he shall be held responsible for the cost of repair of all
damage and other liability claims in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and the
Specification.
A. The Contractor shall not deposit the earth obtained from excavation and/or store up or
deploy equipment, tools and plant necessary in locations that will affect the safety of the
public, public services, or properties and/or in such a way that impedes traffic or pedestrians
and any other works or public authorities or private concerns.
B. The Contractor shall backfill promptly all trenches and open cuttings to the standards
required by the Engineer.
C. The Contractor will be held responsible for the sufficiency of his safety measures and will be
liable for keeping the Works safe at all times.
A. The Contractor shall keep the construction site neat and clean to the satisfaction of the
Engineer by daily removal of unwanted material arising from demolished pipes and
manholes, sewer cleaning, and excavations, rubbish, temporary installations, and daily
cleaning to remove wind blown sand and other debris. All debris shall be removed from the
site to a public disposal location approved by the Municipality. The disposal may be at any
distance from the project site, and may be changed by the Municipality during the time of
construction. The Contractor shall determine any requirements for the disposal of
construction material at the approved location. The Contractor shall allow for this in his
rates.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
B. Upon final completion of the Works, the Contractor shall clear away and remove from the
site all remaining constructional plant, surplus materials, rubbish and temporary works of
every kind and leave the whole of the site clean to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.19 WORKS TO BE KEPT DRY
A. The Contractor shall pump out underground water and/or percolating water that is
encountered in the excavations using well-point dewatering system or as directed by the
Engineer and dispose of such water to places indicated by the Engineer. The Engineer may
allow the disposal of such water in rainwater gullies provides there is no technical hindrance.
The Contractor shall not dispose of water into sewer pipes, roads, private property, or open
areas such as parks or undeveloped lots.
A. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all open excavations and other hazardous areas
shall be totally enclosed from all sides by temporary fencing.
B. In all cases, locations of the temporary fencing proposed by the Contractor shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. The Contractor shall not
commence any works until the associated temporary fencing is erected and the installation
has been approved by the Engineer.
C. Damaged sections of temporary fencing shall be repaired or replaced promptly to maintain at

all times the standard of fencing and installations as initially approved at no cost to the
Client. Temporary fencing shall not be removed from any location without the prior written
approval of the Engineer. The name of the Contract and Contractor shall be affixed at
regular intervals on these temporary fences.
1.21 TEMPORARY WORKS
A Protection of Streets and Sidewalks:

The Contractor shall protect streets and sidewalks and shall repair damage caused by
construction activity. The Contractor shall comply with local rules and regulations in
connection with the use of streets.
1. The Contractor shall protect all private roads and walks and shall maintain them
during the course of the work. He shall repair all damage to them caused by
construction activity.
B. Existing Services: The Contractor is to include for all temporary works to maintain and
protect existing power, lighting, water and telephone services while the Works are being
executed. Temporary shutdown of the services shall only be made with the prior approval of
the Engineer and the owner of the services.
C. Weather Protection: The Contractor shall provide protection against weather rain, wind,
storms, or heat to maintain the works, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or
damage. Work likely to be damaged shall be covered at the end of each day's work.
D. Workmanship: The Contractor shall ensure that all temporary electrical, water, and other
temporary installations are executed in accordance with the requirements of the authorities
concerned.
All temporary works are to be properly and adequately maintained and on completion of the
Contract or when directed by the Engineer shall be cleared away by the Contractor and all
disturbed Works damaged by failure to provide proper protection shall be removed and
replaced with new work at the Contractor's expense.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. The works covered by this Section shall be executed in conformance with the requirements of
the latest editions of the codes, ordinances, rules and regulations of the State of Kuwait and
its lawful enforcement agencies such as the Ministry of Public Works (MPW).
B. The works covered by this Section shall be executed by a contractor, engaged in the similar
job as primary business for at least five (5) immediately preceding years.
C. Materials incorporated in the work covered by this Section shall be unused, new products in
good condition, manufactured to the latest edition of the reference standards. Materials
spoiled due to improper storage or mishandling shall be rejected.
D. Materials of similar nature shall be products of the same manufacturer. Mixing up products
of different standards or those of different manufactures shall not be permitted for the same
service.
E. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the source of materials from the Engineer and should
arrange and pay for the testing of representative samples, under supervision of the Engineer,
to ascertain their compliance with the specified requirements, prior shipment of the material
to the site. The Contractor shall also furnish the manufacturer's test certificate(s) along with
every consignment.
A. Products shall be delivered to site (near the place of installation, where appropriate), stores
and protected under provisions of the General conditions of Contract.
1.24 UTILITIES
A. The extent, position, size, and type of services shown on the Drawings are shown for
information only and was based on information derived from exploratory trenches or existing
information issued by the various services authorities. Not all utilities are indicated or shown
on the Drawings and those shown are not necessarily in the exact location or are complete.
The Contractor shall contact the service authorities to determine the extent and locations of
utilities affected by the Contractor's work. Confirmation of the exact location of utilities will
be the responsibility of the Contractor where necessary by hand digging, silt trenching, and
trial pits. Electronic detectors may be sued for preliminary investigation only. This work
shall be carried out in consultation with various service authorities.
The locations, depths, and spacings of smaller utility trenches, services, vaults, valve boxes,
manholes, jointing boxes, ducts, duct banks, thrust blocks, and the like are not shown
on the Drawings. the Contractor shall make his own determination on the existence
and locations of such utility facilities.
B. Existing Utilities: The Contractor shall, prior to commencement of the work, obtain
information and drawings required from service authorities whose facilities might be affected
by the works.
1. It should be emphasized that all the locations of services where shown on the Drawings
are for guidance only and do not necessarily show the exact locations, depths and
spacings, nor the smallest branches of services which are not normally indicated on
such drawings. The Contractor shall uncover by hand digging and verify locations of
all services where necessary in accordance with any special requirements of the service
authority concerned.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2. It should be noted that the Contractor shall not be allowed to work in any area where
services are still not located. The Engineer shall have the right to stop work in part of
the works where the Contractor fails to take the necessary measures to locate these
services and the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim for compensation in time or
money.
C. Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities: The Contractor shall be responsible for the
care and protection of all existing utilities or other facilities and structures which may be
encountered in or near the area of work. Temporary support, adequate protection and
maintenance of all underground and surface utilities encountered in the progress of the work
shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense and under the direction of the Engineer
and the service authority. Any structures that have been disturbed shall be restored
immediately.
D. Damage to Utilities and Properties: In the event of any damage to utilities or properties
during the progress of the works due to the Contractor's failure to exercise the proper
precautions, or the failure of the Contractor or his agents, employees, the Subcontractor or
his agents, or employees, the Contractor will be held liable for the cost of repairs, penalties
enforced by the authorities and protection of all such utilities or property. The decision of the
Employer regarding responsibility for any damage or interruption of any utility or service
lines shall be final.
1. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Employer and the Engineer and the Contractor shall cooperate with the
Employer and the owner or such utility or service lines and take whatever steps necessary to repair and restore such utility
or service.
2. The Employer shall have the right to deduct the actual costs charged to the Employer
from monies due to the Contractor without it being necessary to serve a notice or
warning or to take any legal action and the Contractor shall not be entitled to object,
refrain from, or suspend the work on account of such deduction.
3. The actual costs charged will be those received in any claim by individuals or
companies which relate to the damage of private property or those assessed for the
damage of utilities.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK
A. The work shall consist of performing all operations necessary to remove unsuitable
materials; excavate earth and rock from the roadway or adjacent thereto; excavate selected
material from the roadway and borrow pits for use as specified; the placing of selected
material; the compaction of said material and doing all the earthwork that may be required to
construct and maintain the roadway facilities.
1. This work shall be carried out as per General Specification, Section II Clauses 200.01
to 200.39 and also in accordance with the drawings.
2. The top soil which is treated as unsuitable material, shall be removed as indicated and
as directed by Engineer.
3. If during the progress of the work the soil encountered has characteristics, as
determined by tests conducted under the direction of the Engineer, that render it
unsuitable for incorporation in the road embankment, the Contractor shall excavate
and remove such unsuitable material to the extent directed by the Engineer.
4. The resulting excavated material shall be removed and carted away to the approved
dumping area referred to or shall be deposited elsewhere on Site as directed or
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
5. The Contractor shall replace this unsuitable material by other suitable surplus or
imported material in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness to the density
specified and to meet other requirements as provided for in the General Specification
and drawings.
B. Payment: Payment for earthwork shall be for cubic metre at the rate inserted in the bill of
quantities which rate shall include for all labour, plant and materials and everything
necessary for the proper execution of the work including all incidental works in connection
with the construction.
3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATIONS
A. This work shall consist of the preparation of the graded road bed to a compacted thickness
mentioned in drawings upon which asphaltic concrete is to be placed all in accordance with
General Specification, Section II, Clauses 200.01 to 200.39 and as shown in the drawings.
B. Payment: Payment for subgrade preparation shall be for square metre at the rate inserted in
the bill of quantities which rate shall include for all labour, plant and materials and
everything necessary for the proper execution of the work including all incidental works in
connection with the construction.
3.03 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
A General: The asphaltic concrete work shall consist of constructing an asphaltic concrete
paving course on a prepared subgrade in accordance with the requirements of the General
Specifications and in conformity with the lines grades, thickness and typical cross section
shown on the drawings.
B. The work shall be carried out as per General Specification.
C. Payment: Payment for asphaltic concrete works for the full thickness of various layers shall
be for square metre at the rate inserted in the bill of quantities which rate shall include for all
labour, plant and materials and everything necessary for the proper execution of the work,
etc, complete.
3.04 KERB STONE
A. General: This work shall consist of constructing Precast Curbstone, complete and in place, in
accordance with the plans, specifications and instructions of the Engineer. This work shall
include the construction of raised Precast Curbstone as well as the transitional Curbstone and
Sunken Curbstone together with all preparation, formwork, materials, foundations, backing,
curing, etc.
B. The work shall be carried out as per MPW General Specification, Section V-4, Clauses
504.01 to 504.08.
C. Payment: Payment shall be for metre run at the rate inserted in the bill of quantities which
rate shall include for all labour, plant and materials and everything necessary for the proper
execution of the work, etc, complete.
3.05 TRAFFIC MARKINGS AND SIGNS
A. General: This Section covers the Specifications of materials, testings, equipment, method of
execution of the works.
B. The work shall be carried out as shown in drawings and in accordance with MPW General
Specification, Section VII, Clauses 700.0 to 707.25 and the Kuwait Traffic Signs Manual.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Payment: Payment shall be for the units/metre run and at the rates inserted in the bill of
quantities which rate shall include for all labour, plant and materials and everything
necessary for the proper execution of the work, etc, complete.
PART 4 - MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC
4.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall maintain and protect traffic through areas of construction and shall
furnish and maintain temporary traffic control devices including barriers, barricades, cones,
drums, warning signs and lights, flashing arrows and flagmen in conformance with this
submittal and Specifications.
1. The Contractor shall keep all existing roads and accesses affected by the project
construction open at all times. The roads and accesses shall be maintained in a
condition that traffic will be adequately and safely accommodated. The Contractor
shall pay particular attention to the maintenance of access whether by vehicle or
pedestrian to parking lots, residences and other facilities whether public or private.
These requirements shall apply throughout the entire contract period.
2. Any road closure, whether partial, total, or temporary, or any work that may cause an
obstruction to the traffic, must be carried out outside the traffic peak hours.
3. No claim will be considered by the Engineer for payment of additional expenses in
respect of work out of sequence, additional work, idle time, or work outside normal
hours.
4.02 LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS
A. The Contractor's operations shall be limited as follows:

1. No work shall be performed during the hours of darkness unless authorized in writing by
the Engineer.
2. Night-time construction operations, where authorized by the Engineer, shall be
illuminated by a lighting system approved by the Engineer. The lighting system shall be
positioned and operated to preclude glare to approaching vehicles.
3. Private vehicle, belonging to the Contractors employees, shall be parked in areas
approved by the Engineer and at no time shall private vehicles belonging to the
Contractor's employees be parked within 10 m of traffic lanes.
4. The Contractor shall schedule operations to minimize potential traffic backups.
4.03 MAINTENANCE OF ACCESS
A. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate access is maintained at all times to properties and
facilities affected by the Works.
B. Such properties and facilities shall include, but shall not be limited to, all public and private
buildings, houses, parking areas, gardens, services (manholes, pipelines, and valve
chambers), or any other facility as indicated by the Engineer.
C. As a minimum, accesses shall be replaced with the same width, standard, and surface type as
the existing access facilities but, in all cases, a minimum width of 3 m shall be provided.
D. The locations of accesses to be maintained are not shown on the Drawings and the Contractor shall
understand that any existing accesses, whether public or private, paved or unpaved, shall be
maintained at all times during the Contract period unless specifically authorized otherwise by the
Engineer in writing.
4.04 TEMPORARY, TOTAL, OR PARTIAL CLOSURE OF ROADS
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. General: With the approval of the Engineer and all relevant authorities, the Contractor may
temporarily, totally or partially close existing roads to traffic. Approval shall not normally
be given to total closure or partial closure of lengths in excess of 500 m.
1. Unless agreed otherwise in writing by the Engineer accesses shall be maintained at all
times in accordance with Specification.
B. Definitions:
1. A temporary total closure of a road shall comprise the closure of a road to all through
vehicular and, if approved by the Engineer, all pedestrian traffic movements.
2. A temporary partial closure of a road shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:
a. Closure of a lane or lanes of one or both carriageways of a dual carriageway
b. Reduction in width of lanes of dual carriageways
c. Closure of lanes of two-way roads
d. Reduction in width of two-way roads
4.05 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for this work and work in this section will be considered
as included in the costs for the applicable items listed in the Bill of Quantities.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02750
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Particular Conditions and Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior portland cement concrete paving for the following:
1. Roadways.
2. Driveway entrances.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to

this Section:
1. "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading and subbase course.
2. "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.
3. "Paving Joint Sealants" for joint fillers and sealants within concrete paving
and at joints with adjacent construction.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and
forming accessories, admixtures, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake
finish materials, and others if requested by Engineer.
C. Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics
of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant
adjustments.
D. Laboratory test reports for evaluation of concrete materials and mix design
tests.
E. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by

Engineer. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor
certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds requirements.
Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content
complies with requirements.
F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
A. Concrete Standards: Comply with provisions of the following standards,

except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02750-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Concrete for Buildings."
2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
B. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete

products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform materials evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
D. Field-Constructed Mockup: Cast mockup of size indicated or as required to

demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of
workmanship.
1. When Engineer determines that mockup does not meet requirements,
demolish and remove it from the site and cast another until the mockup is
accepted.
2. Keep accepted mockup undisturbed during construction as a standard for
judging completed paving. Undamaged mockup may be incorporated into
the Work.
3. Demolish accepted mockup and remove from site when directed by
Engineer.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements of "Project Meetings" and the following:
1. Before installing portland cement concrete paving, meet with representatives
of authorities having jurisdiction. Owner, Engineer, consultants,
independent testing agency, and other concerned entities to review
requirements. Notify participants at least 3 working days before conference.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required
for other construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other acceptable

panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed
surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100-foot or less radius.
B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-release agent with a

maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.
C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185.

________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer.
D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497.
E. Fabricated Bar Mats: Welded or clip-assembled steel bar mats, ASTM A 184. Use
ASTM A 615, Grade 60 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
G. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design
hook bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position
during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete
or hook bolt.
H. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other
devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire
fabric, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI
specifications.
1. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will
not support chair legs.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type V.

1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to
Engineer.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4, and as follows. Provide

aggregates from a single source.
1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause
spalling.
3. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to
produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or
actual service may be used when acceptable to Engineer.
D. Water: Potable.
2.04 ADMIXTURES
A. Refer to Specifications for Cast-in-place Concrete.
2.05 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.

1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. White burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C

________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
309, Type I, Class A or B, wax free.
D. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I,

Class B.
1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC)
rating of 350 g/L.
E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:
1. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
a. Clear Cure; Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.
b. Spartan-Cote; The Burke Co.
c. All Resin; Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co.
d. Sealco 309; Cormix Construction Chemicals.
e. Day-Chem Cure and Seal; Dayton Superior Corp.
f. Diamond Clear; Euclid Chemical Co.
g. #64 Resin Cure-Clear; Lambert Corp.
h. L&M Cure R; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
i. Masterkure; Master Builders, Inc.
j. 3100 Series W.R. Meadows, Inc.
k. Seal N Kure Metalcrete Industries.
l. Kure-N-Seal Sonneborn-Chemrex.
m. Horn Clear Seal; Tamms/A.C. Horn.
n. Or approved equal.
2. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:

a. Clear Cure Water Base; Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.
b. Spartan Cote WB; The Burke Co.
c. W.B. Resin Cure; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
d. Seaico VOC; Cormix Construction Chemicals.
e. Safe Cure and Seal (J-18); Dayton Superior Corp.
f. Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Co.
g. Aqua Kure-Clear; Lambert Corp.
h. Dress & Seal #22 WB; L&M Construction Chemicals,Inc.
i. Masterkure 100W; Master Builders, Inc. j. 1100 Clear Series; W.R.
Meadows, Inc. k. Metcure; Metalcrete Industries. 1. Kure-N-Seal WB;
Sonneborn-Chemrex. m. Horncure 100; Tamms/A.C. Horn. n. Or
approved equal.
3. Evaporation Control:
a. Aquafilm; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
b. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc.
e. Waterhold; Metalcrete Industries.
f. Or approved equal.
2.06 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Boiled Linseed Oil Mixture: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits,
complying with AASHTO M-233.
B. Traffic Paint: Alkyd-resin ready-mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type S.

1. Color: White.
2. Color: Yellow.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2.07 CONCRETE MIX
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete by
either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301.
For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
1. Do not use the Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the

independent testing agency.
2. Flash is not permitted.
B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal-weight
concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28-Day): 300 kg/cm2
2. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio at Point of Placement:0.40.
3. Slump Limit at Point of Placement: 75mm.
C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in

concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows with a tolerance of
plus or minus 1-1/2 percent:
1. Air Content: 2.5 to 4.5 percent.
D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by

Contractor when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test
results, or other circumstances warrant.
2.08 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg
C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;
when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C) , reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Proof-roll prepared sub-base surface to check for unstable areas and verify need
for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions
have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.
B. Remove loose material from compacted sub-base surface immediately before

placing concrete.
3.02 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed
guides for paving to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow
continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24
hours after concrete placement.
B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following
tolerances:
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to
ensure separation from concrete without damage.
3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended

practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-
reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement
in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining

pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining
widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units

to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other
irregularities or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a
minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats.
3.04 JOINTS
A. General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints true to

line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse
joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise.
1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously
placed joints, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as shown on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a
depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints in fresh concrete by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint with a radiused jointer tool.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into hardened concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
development of random contraction cracks.
3. Inserts: Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard,
or fiberboard strips into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with
paving surface. Radius each joint edge with a jointer tool. Carefully remove
strips or caps of two-piece assemblies after concrete has hardened. Clean
groove of loose debris.
C. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving
and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour,
unless paving terminates at isolation joints.
1. Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or
bulkhead forms with keys, unless indicated otherwise. Embed keys at least
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1-1/2 inches into concrete.
2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise.
Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip paving unless
indicated.
3. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.
4. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with
fresh concrete.
D. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting
concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed
objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more
than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealant is indicated. Place
top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface when no joint
sealant is required.
3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever
possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler
sections together.
4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal,
plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after
concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.
E. Installation of joint fillers and sealants is specified in "Joint Sealants."
F. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt-coat one half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side
of joint.
3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,

reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to
permit installation of their work.
B. Remove frost from subbase surface and reinforcing before placing concrete. Do
not place concrete on surfaces that are frozen.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is

placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are
at the required finish elevation and alignment.
D. Comply with requirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting,
and placing concrete.
E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints.

Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into
place. 1. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a
construction joint.
F. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against

hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-

spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
concrete complying with ACI 309R.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints
with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies,
reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-
spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating
reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
H. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or
darbies to form a smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water
appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to
beginning finishing operations.
I. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of
placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire
fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of
concrete, strike off, and screed. 1. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer
of concrete that have been placed more than 15 minutes without being covered
by top layer or use bonding agent if acceptable to Engineer.
J. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for paving, submit
revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.
Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as
required for formed paving.
1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent
displacement of paver machine during operations.
K. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate
equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day
compressive strength.
L. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows.

Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be
caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4
deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a
concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not
more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze
agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
M. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified
when hot weather conditions exist.
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C) . Mixing water may be chilled or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent
of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractors option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so
that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature
immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing
concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft
spots, or dry areas.
3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING

________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface
with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to
power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet
as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in
any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately
to a uniform granular texture.
1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom
across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform
fine line texture finish.
B. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints formed in fresh
concrete with a jointing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges and
joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
1. Radius: 6mm.
3.07 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold
weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from
rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-
control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and
bull floating, but before floating.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared
from concrete surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover

curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days
with the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet.
Cover concrete surfaces and edges with a 12-inch lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
2. Moisture Retaining Cover Curing: Cover concretesurfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with
sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using
cover material and waterproof tape.
3 Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power

spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
E. Boiled Linseed Oil Treatment: Apply boiled linseed oil mixture no sooner than 28
days after placement to clean dry concrete surfaces free of oil, dirt, or other
foreign material. Apply in 2 sprayed applications at rate of 40 sq. yd. per gallon for
the first application and 60 sq. yd. per gallon for the second application. Allow
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
complete drying between applications.
3.08 TRAFFIC PAINT
A. Traffic Paint: Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical
equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's
recommended rates to provide a 15-mil minimum wet film thickness.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
A. Employ a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample

materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement as
follows:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to
comply with ASTM C 94.
a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each
compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's
pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when
concrete consistency changes.
b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each
compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's
pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air
temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27
deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength
specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard
cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless directed
otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test
specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.
e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour
of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd.,
plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7
days, test two specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen in
reserve for later testing if required.
2 When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a
given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
3 When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd..
Engineer may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory
strength is provided.
4 When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide
corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
5 Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of
sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified
compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below
specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
B. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall
contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,
name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete
batch in paving, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
both 7-day and 28-day tests.
C. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive

device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for
acceptance or rejection.
D. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete
when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing agency may
conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying
with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective,

or does not meet the requirements of this Section.
B. Drill test cores where directed by Engineer when necessary to determine

magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory
pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy
adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days
after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as
clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they
occur.
D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign
material. Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date
scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02770
PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
To be read with General Requirements
A. This Section includes precast concrete curbs and edgings.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Design, Engineer, fabricate, and install precast concrete

units to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional

engineer detailing fabrication and installation of precast concrete units. Indicate
member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, and
types of reinforcement.
1. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices that are to be embedded
in other construction.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver precast concrete units to Project site in such quantities and at such times to
ensure continuity of installation. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking,
distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are
visible.
B. Lift and support units only at designated lifting or supporting points shown on
Shop Drawings.
1.05 SEQUENCING
A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without

delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions,
as required, for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MOLD MATERIALS
A. Forms: Provide forms and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic,
wood, or another acceptable material that is nonreactive with concrete and will
produce required finish surfaces.
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02770-1 PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 400), deformed.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type II. White cement to be used where white
concrete is required.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates meeting

Class 5S and MNL-117 requirements.
C. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect colour stability,
setting, or strength of concrete.
D. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
2.04 CONNECTION MATERIALS
A. Steel Shapes and Dowels: ASTM A 36.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Accurately position steel dowels and other anchorage hardware for attachment of
loose hardware and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate
anchorage hardware where it does not affect the position of the main
reinforcement or the placing of concrete.
B. Supply steel dowels, and other anchorage hardware shapes not provided by other
trades necessary for securing precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent
members.
C. Cast-in holes, and other accessories in precast concrete units to receive dowels
and other similar work as indicated. Coordinate with other trades for installation of
cast-in items.
D. Reinforcement: Comply with the recommendations of CRSI's "Manual of

Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.
1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials
that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete.
2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement
during concrete placement and consolidation operations. Completely
conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces. Do not
use plastic-coated or uncoated metal chair supports.
3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 19-mm minimum cover after
finishing. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold
reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away
from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,

true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of
precast concrete units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
conditions have been corrected.
B. Do not install precast units until supporting concrete has attained minimum
allowable design compressive strength.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install precast concrete units plumb, level, and in alignment. Provide temporary
supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as
units are being permanently connected.
B. Anchor precast concrete units in position. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and
spacers as soon as possible after anchoring are completed.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02783
INTERLOCKING PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions

and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes precast concrete pavers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for the following:

1. Concrete pavers.
2. Mortar and grout materials.
3. Edge restraints.
B. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's colour charts consisting
of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and
patterns available for type of unit paver indicated.
C. Samples for verification in full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in
sets for each colour, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of
variations expected in these characteristics.
D. Shop drawings including unit pavers colour, pattern, and interface with other
paving units.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed unit

paver installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mock-up: Prior to installing unit pavers, construct mockups for each form and
pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under sample submittals
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and
execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for final unit of Work, including same base construction,
special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as indicated.
A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soilage
or contamination from earth and other materials. Wrap pavers in plastic or use
other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from steel strapping.
B. Protect grout and mortar materials from deterioration by moisture and

________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02783-1 INTERLOCKING PRECAST CONCRETE
PAVERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
temperature. Store in a dry location or in waterproof containers. Keep containers
tightly closed. Protect liquid components from freezing.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 UNIT PAVERS - PV-2
A. Precast Concrete Pavers: Interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936, locally

manufactured, heavy duty type. Obtain each type of unit paver from one source
produced in a single batch to ensure products of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties.
1. Colour and texture to Engineer's approval.
2. Shape and size : 200 x 100 x 60 mm or as per drawings
2.02 SAND SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Graded Aggregate for Sub-base: ASTM D 2940.
B. Graded Aggregate for Base: ASTM D 2940.
C. Sand for levelling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone
complying with gradation requirements of ASTM C-33 for fine aggregate.
D. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100
percent passing No. 16 (1.18mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No.
200 (0.075mm) Sieve.
2.03 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINT

A. Provide control and expansion joint at distance of maximum 4
metres both sides. Locate joints as per approved drawing.
Metal joints will be of galvanised steel used as a functional
element.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of unit pavers. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose
particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond,
including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas
requiring additional compaction. Do not proceed with installation of unit pavers
until deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase
for unit pavers.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discoloration’s, and other defects
that might be visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform
________________________________________________________________________________________
PAVERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
blend of colors and textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work
neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.
1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
B. Joint Pattern: Match field-constructed mock-up.
3.4 SAND SETTING-BED PAVER APPLICATIONS
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557

laboratory density.
B. Place sand base in thickness indicated. Compact by tamping and screed to depth
required to allow setting of pavers.
C. Place graded sand for subbase over compacted subgrade. Provide compacted
thickness of base and subbase indicated. Compact subbase to 100 percent of
ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density.
D. Place sand for levelling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 25 to 38 mm,

taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and
constant until pavers are set and compacted.
E. Treat levelling base with soil sterilizer to prohibit growth of grass and weeds.
F. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of
1/8 inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb levelling base. Use string lines to
keep straight lines.
G. Vibrate pavers into levelling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of
a 3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at
least 3 passes across paving with vibrator.
H. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into levelling
course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then
remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
I. Sprinkle sand over surface and sweep into joints. Recover joints with additional
sand until firm joints are achieved. Remove excess sands.
3.05 REPAIR, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or
otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide
new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units,
with same joint treatment to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Cleaning: Wash and scrub clean exposed paver surfaces.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to

Installer that ensures that unit paver work is without damage or deterioration at the
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
PAVERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02786
STONE PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Stone paving
2. Stone coping.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For variety of stone, stone accessory, and other manufactured products
specified.
1. For stone varieties proposed for use on Project, include data on physical properties
required by referenced ASTM standards.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation of stone paving , including
dimensions and profiles of stone units; arrangement and details of jointing; and details
showing relationship with, attachment to, and reception of related work.
C. Stone Samples: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required; not less
than 300 mm square. Include 2 or more samples in each set showing the full range of
variations in appearance characteristics expected in completed Work.
D. Grout Samples: For each color required, showing the full range of exposed color and
texture expected in completed Work.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed stone paving
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in producing stone paving similar to

that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a
single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties and to cut and finish material without delaying the Work.
D. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of cementitious material, grout,
admixture, stone accessory, sealant, and other material from a single manufacturer for
each product.
E. Mockups: Before installing stone paving , construct mockups to verify selections made
under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials
and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for completed Work.
1. Locate mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
2. Build mockups as follows:
a. Approximately 2400 mm square.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02786-1 STONE PAVERS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, or other
causes.
1. Store stone on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to
distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to
prevent condensation.
2. Store cementitious materials off ground, under cover, and in dry location.
3. Store aggregate materials covered and in dry location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STONE PAVING PV-1
A. Contractor is damaged to visit the Engineer’s office, where an approved sample of the
stone is available for inspection.
B. Generally: Stone for each type shall be supplied for the project from a single quarry. If
there exists a distinguishable texture, stone shall be cut in one direction unless otherwise
directed by Engineer. Stone shall be sound, hard, durable and of uniform strength, colour
and texture, free of quarry sop, flaws, seams, sand holes, iron pyrites, harmful quantities of
radiation or other mineral or organic defects. Stone shall be polished, flamed, honed, as
indicated on drawings. Stone for skirting will be any of the below mentioned. Stone to
comply with the following characteristics.
C. Stone shall have the following Characteristics:

1. Name : Rosa Porrino
2. Origin : Spain
3. Compressive breaking load : 1719 kg/cm2
4. Ultimate tensile strength : 115 kg/cm2
5. Water absorption : 0.31%
6. Impact : 61 cm
7. Bulk density : 2583 kg/m3
8. Color : As per sample with Engineer
9. Size : As shown on drawings
D. Finish : As detailed on Drawings
2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II; natural color, white, or a blend to produce mortar
color required.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as indicated below:

1. For joints narrower than 6 mm, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural, white sand or ground, white stone.
3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural, colored sand or ground marble, granite, or
other sound stone, as required to match Engineer's sample.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in stone
mortars.
E. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.
F. Water: Potable.
G. Adhesive: Adhesives formulated for stone and recommended by their manufacturer for the
application indicated. Adhesive shall be factory mixed and mixing at site shall not be
permitted.
1. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A 118.3.
2.03 GROUT
A. Grout Colors: Provide colors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Provide Engineer's selection from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Dry-Set Grout (Unsanded): ANSI A118.6, for joints 3-mm and narrower.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, composed as follows:

1. Factory-Prepared Dry-Grout Mixture: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement;
dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to produce
the following:
a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3 mm and narrower.
2. Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared dry-grout

mix and latex additive to comply with the following requirements:
a. Unsanded Dry-Grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A118.6, for
materials described in H-2.3, for joints 3 mm and narrower.
b. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Control and Dividing Joints Material

1. Flexible PVC push fit compressible infill with a gap width of 8mm and a finish depth
of 50mm.
2.05 STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone paving in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated, including details on Shop Drawings.
B. Cut stone to fit stone pattern as indicated on Design Drawings and Shop Drawings.
Produce units to minimize field cutting for thickness, face sizes, and within fabrication
tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone source. Do
not execute field cutting except to those edges of stones invisible under wall claddings or
any other finishings.
C. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural
markings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings
occur.
2. Arrange units with veining as indicated on Drawings.
D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements
for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place.
Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range
of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved samples and
mockups.
2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions
for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures needed to produce mortar and grout of uniform quality and with optimum
performance characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates
in a mechanical batch mixer, unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar and grout
when they have reached initial set.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive stone paving and conditions under which stone will be
installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of stone paving .
1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including
curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Clean stone surfaces that have become dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and
foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes
and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no
caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set stone to comply Design Drawings. Match for color and pattern by using units
numbered in sequence as indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce tight and neat joints.
3.04 INSTALLING STONE DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE
A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply cement-paste slush coat over surface of concrete before placing setting bed. Limit
area of slush coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not exceed 1.5-
mm thickness for cement-paste slush coat.
C. Apply mortar setting bed over cement-paste slush coat immediately after slush coat has
been applied. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations
required for accurate setting of stone to finished grades indicated.
D. Mix and place only as much mortar setting bed as can be covered with stone before initial
set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting-bed material that has reached
initial set before placing stone.
1. Place reinforcing wire fabric, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and supported
so mesh becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Do not butt edges against
vertical surfaces.
E. Place stone before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing stone on
setting bed, apply uniform 1.5-mm- thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each stone
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
unit with a flat trowel.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting
bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single
operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone
for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
G. Point joints after setting. Fill full with mortar type and color indicated. Tool joints flat,
uniform, and smooth, without visible voids.
3.5 GROUTING STONE PAVING
A. Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Do not use sanded grout for polished stone.
B. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into joints,
taking care not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces. After initial set of
grout, finish joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave polished joint, free from drying
cracks.
C. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for 7 days, except as otherwise

recommended by latex additive manufacturer.
3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stone paving of the following description:

1.Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if
methods and results are approved by Engineer.
2.Defective joints.
3.Stone paving, and joints not matching approved samples and mockups.
4.Stone paving not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in a manner that results in stone paving matching approved samples and
mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone paving as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.
D. Clean stone paving after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures recommended
by stone fabricator for types of application.
E. Apply sealer to cleaned stone according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
B. Protect stone paving during construction with nonstaining kraft paper. Where adjoining
areas require construction work access, cover stone paving with a minimum of (19-mm)
untreated plywood over nonstaining kraft paper.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02810
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Irrigation Heads
B. Pipes, Fittings and Valves
C. Remote Control Valves and Automatic Controllers
D. Wiring and Related Electrical Works
E. Connection to External Utilities
F. Booster Pump Set
A. Earthwork
B. Landscape Planting
C. Electrical Works in connection with Mechanical Services
D. Plumbing Services
E. Electrical Services
1.03 REFERENCES STANDARDS
A. ASTM D 1785.......Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipes, Schedules 40, 80 and 120
B. ASTM D 2241.......Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR series)
C. ASTM D 2466.......Socket type PVC Pipe-fittings, Schedule 40
D. ASTM D 2564.......Solvent Cement for PVC Pipes and Fittings
E. ASTM D 2855.......Standard Practice for Making Solvent Cemented Joints with PVC Pipes
and Fittings
F. ASTM D 2239.......Polyethylene (PE) Pipe - SDR-PR
G. ASTM D 2737.......Polyethylene (PE) Tubing
H. ASTM D 2609.......Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe
I. NEMA 1 - CS........Enclosures for Electrical Appliances
J. BS 6004.................Copper Conductors, PVC Insulated and PVC Sheathed (Suitable for

Direct Burial)
A. Landscape irrigation system shall be executed by a contractor, engaged in the installation and
maintenance of such systems as primary business for at least five (5) immediately preceding
years in Kuwait and approved for the purpose by the Public Authority for Agricultural Affairs
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02810-1 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
and Fish Resources (PAAFR).
B. Equipment used in the system shall have local agents, certified by the manufacturer to check,
test, adjust, commission and maintain the same.
C. Materials
1. Materials incorporated in the work covered by this Section shall be unused, new
products in good condition. Materials spoiled due to improper storage or
mishandling shall be rejected
2. Materials of similar nature shall be products of the same manufacturer. Mixing up
products of different standards or those of different manufactures shall not be
permitted for the same service
3. System components shall be of the type and construction, capable of withstanding
the local ambient conditions and shall be resistant to deterioration from high
incidence of ultra violet rays
4. Materials to equivalent British (BS), German (DIN), or Japanese (JIS) or other
international standards shall be acceptable, provided that the Contractor
substantiates their equivalence and ensures their compatibility with other
components of the system. Copies of current version of reference standards shall be
submitted for comparison, if required by the Engineer.
5. Test certificates for materials used in the work covered by this Section, from
approved independent laboratories or testing agencies shall be furnished at no extra
cost if required by the Engineer
6. Copper alloys used in the construction of valves etc., which comes in contact with
water, shall be dezincification resistant type.
7. Products are listed in documents for the purpose of defining the requirements and
these shall be construed to mean “or approved equal”
D. Irrigation system and the system components described herein and detailed in the drawings are
intended to supply adequate amount of water to the various kinds and configurations of planting, for
their sustained growth, throughout the seasons. Contractor shall, in his tender, high light and allow
for alterations / modifications to the system or the system components; which in his opinion are
necessary to accomplish the intended purpose.
E. Requirements and recommendations of the following organisations shall be conformed to in

respect of equipment:
1. National Sanitation Federation (NSF)

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
3. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
F. Equipment shall have labels attached permanently, indicating:
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Model number and serial number
3. Certified ratings
4. Maximum operating parameters
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data and shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the General
Conditions of Contract:
1. Manufacturers printed brochures and catalogues (one original and three copies) with
relevant information high lighted (or irrelevant information struck out), along with
write up of selection criteria
2. General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:200
3. Irrigation piping layout plans of planted areas to a scale not smaller than 1:50,
clearly indicating the throw / area of coverage of each individual head.
4. Builder's work layout plans to a scale of 1:200 with details to a scale not smaller
than 1:20
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Installation details of Irrigation heads, valve boxes etc to a scale of 1:10
6. Electrical wiring diagrams (NTS) and controller installation details (1:20)
7. Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings
8. Manufacturer's / independent laboratory's test certificates confirming that the
equipment construction and performance meet or exceed the specified requirements
9. Data on equipment dimensions, service connections, operating weight etc.
B. Copies of irrigation heads and valves ordering schedules shall be submitted for approval,
prior to ordering the same.
C. Project record documents of all works installed under this section shall be submitted in
accordance with the General Conditions of Contract.
D. Three (3) hard bound copies of Operation and Maintenance Manual" shall be submitted in
accordance with the General Conditions of Contract, with complete data for each piece of
equipment installed, as detailed below:
1. Manual shall contain:
a. Table of contents
b. Irrigation system material submittal with the Engineer's and local
authorities approval
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions
d. Manufacturer's internal wiring diagrams
e. Manufacturer's assembly details
f. Replacement, parts number listings and description
g. Preventive maintenance schedules listing frequency of service and or
replacement
h. Name and addresses of manufacturer, sales and service agency and local
representative / distributor including telephone and Fax numbers
i. Names and address of Contractor's maintenance department, including
emergency contact telephone numbers
2. Contents of the manual shall be arranged in sections with tags, grouping each class
of equipment as piping, valves, irrigation heads, controls, etc. Contents of each
section shall be arranged in sequence as listed above
E. Review of Submittals: Time expended for repetitive reviewing (more than twice) due to Contractor’s
inability to comply with the requirements of the Contract shall be billed to the Contractor at the
Engineer’s standard hourly rates.
A. One (1) nos. packaged, pressure controlled booster pump set draw water from the tanks and
supply under pressure to the irrigation system.
B. Automatic, self-cleaning, screen filter of 200 mesh filtration fineness filtration fineness will
be installed at the system side.
C. A pilot operated, diaphragm type pressure reducing / sustaining valve is installed on the
irrigation water supply mains, at the discharge side of the screen filter, so as to:
1. Maintain constant system pressure irrespective of varying demand and / or filter

conditions, and
2. To shut-off the line in runaway conditions (rupture of piping)
D. Pop up type spray and sprinkler will generally be used for irrigating turf.
E. Drip system will be used for ground cover and trees.
F. Drip System will be used for narrow strips, trees in paved areas and seasonal planting beds
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
irrespective of the type of planting.
G. Quick coupling valves will be provided at reasonable intervals, all over the area, for manual
watering.
H. Flush valves will be provided in each zone, as appropriate.
1.07 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Products shall be delivered to site, stored and protected under provisions of the General
Conditions of Contract.
B. Products shall be stored in manufacturers original packing in a neat and orderly manner,
with labels on each container.
C. Plastic and rubber products shall be stored out of direct sunlight.
D. Pipes shall be stored on elevated racks only.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Irrigation System Components

1. Rainbird, USA
2. Hunter, USA
3. Torro, USA
4. Approved alternatives / substitutions under provisions of the General Conditions of
Contract
B. Booster Pumps
1. Grundfos, Denmark
2. DP Pumps, Germany
3. Biral Pumps, Switzerland
Contract
C. Valves
1. Nibco, USA
2. Crane, USA
3. Kitz, Japan
Contract
2.02 PIPING - GENERAL
A. PVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin Polyvinyl Chloride compound to
ASTM D 1784 type 12454-B (PVC 1120) or approved equal.
B. Threads of fittings shall be side gated injection moulded type. Nipples shall be standard
weight, moulded type.
C. Pipes shall have the following, continuously printed on them.
1. Manufacturer's name
2. Nominal pipe size
3. Schedule or class
4. Pressure rating
5. Date of manufacture
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Service Location Type
A. Pressure lines From POC to uPVC
All sizes control valve schedule 40
B. Distribution lines for all systems From control uPVC

Other than drip valves onwards schedule 40
C. Distribution lines for From control PE

Drip systems valve onwards tubing
D. Supply laterals for From emitter PE

Drip system onwards capillary
2.04 PIPE JOINTS
A. uPVC - Socket type: Solvent cemented joints. Threaded adapters / flanges shall be used as
appropriate.
B. PE: Plastic insert (compression) type joints. Threaded adapters / flanges shall be used as
appropriate.
C. Joints shall be rated for 1034 kPa (150 psig) working water pressure at ambient temperature.
2.05 VALVES
A. General
1. Valves from same manufacturer shall be provided throughout the project, where
possible
2. Pressure Rating
a. Valves shall be rated for 1379 kPa (200 psig) working water pressure at
ambient temperature, unless otherwise indicated or dictated by selection
b. Contractor shall allow for selecting higher pressure rated valves to meet the
valve construction features
3. Valve Operators
a. Hand wheels / operating levers shall be provided for valves as appropriate.
Hand wheels for gate and globe valves 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and
smaller, shall be non-ferrous metal (die cast zinc / aluminium alloy etc.)
b. One key / wrench of appropriate size shall be provided for each lever
operated valve installed
B. Gate Valves
1. Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, non-rising stem and union bonnet,
solid wedge or disc, threaded ends
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), outside screw
and Yoke (OS&Y), solid wedge, renewable seats, flanged ends
C. Globe Valves
1. Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, rising stem, union bonnet, renewable
composition disc, threaded ends
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), rising stem ,
OS&Y, renewable seat, flanged ends
D. Ball Valves
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and
stuffing box ring, lever operated, threaded ends
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Cast steel body; stainless steel, full bore, floating
ball; Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever or key operated flanged ends
E. Check Valves
1. Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze, in-line, resilient seat and disc, spring
loaded, screwed ends
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded, renewable
composite disc and seat, flanged ends
F. Drain Valves: Bronze angle globe pattern, key operated, threaded inlet and hose connection
outlet with cap and chain.
G. Flush Valves: Ball valves of uPVC construction, with solvent weld / compression ends.
Ref. : Rain Bird
H. Combination Pressure Reducing and Pressure Sustaining Valves:
1. Combination pressure reducing and pressure sustaining valves shall meet the
requirements for Globe Style pressure regulating valves and shall include the
following additional components.
a. The valves shall maintain a pre-set downstream pressure providing the
inlet-upstream pressure is above a predetermined setpoint.
b. The valve shall close when inlet-upstream pressure drops below the setting
of the sustaining pilot.
c. Pressure sustaining valves used in combination with variable speed
pumping systems shall be equipped with a solenoid valve such that the
main valve will remain closed regardless of upstream pressure unless the
solenoid is energized by the DCS. Solenoid valves shall be of the bronze
or stainless steel construction and of size, type and class as recommended
by the manufacturer.
2.06 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. For Spray/Drip Zones (Pressure Reducing Type)
1. Type...................................Globe pattern, normally closed, electrically operated

2. Construction......................Heavy cast brass with nylon reinforced rubber diaphragm
and stainless steel / brass trim
3. Connections.......................Threaded inlet / outlet
4. Inlet Pressure.....................1034 kPa (150 psig)
5. Outlet Pressure..................100 to 1034 kPa (15 to 100 psig)
6. Accessories........................Grit Strainer, manual open / close facility, pressure
reducing module
7. Electrical Power supply....24 volts / 1 phase / 50 Hz
Ref. : Rain Bird EFB-CP-PRS-D series
2.07 IRRIGATION HEADS
A. Schedules / legend on drawing shall be referred to for details of selection and performance of
respective heads.
2.08 VALVE BOXES
A. High density polystyrene body and locking type cover, of approved colour and size and
appropriate size. The valve boxes shall have approved identification code lettering stencilled
on them.
Ref. : Carson
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
2.09 QUICK COUPLING VALVE
A. Red brass construction with 3/4 inch female threaded inlet, key operated retracting stop,
quick coupling outlet with self closing thermoplastic rubber cover and coupling adapter (key)
and swivel elbow with 3/4 inch hose threaded outlet.
Ref. : Rain Bird 33 DRC with 33 DK and SH - 0
2.10 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A. Electro-mechanical or independent station computer type, with appropriate no. of stations, capable of
fully automatic or manual operation; as appropriate. Details of selection shall be as follows:
1. Housing: Weather proof, heavy duty, lockable, steel cabinet

2. No. of programs: Two (2)
3. No. of valves per station: 3 (as appropriate)
4. Station timing: 0 to 99 minutes
5. Automatic starts: Any quarter hour (up to 4 per day per station)
6. Programming schedule: 14 days dial for every day, every other day starts etc. for a
two-week period
7. Interruption facility: Master on / off switch (with out loss of program)
8. Electrical supply: 240 v / 1 ph / 50 Hz input and 24 v / 1 ph / 50 Hz output
9. Overload protection:
a. Circuit breaker with manual reset for the controller
b. Value output surge protection
10. Accessories:
a. Wall mounting bracket for controller # ..
b. Pedestal for controller # ..
Ref. : Rainbird
2.11 WIRING CABLES
A. Solid copper, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed, single conductor cables, rated for 600 volts
and suitable for direct burial. The cable shall have a minimum sectional area of 1.5 mm2.
2.12 WIRE CONNECTORS
A. Water proof and corrosion resistant housing with 3 # flapped openings for insertion of wires;
copper crimp sleeves and snap on cover, UL listed for this application.
Ref. : Rain Bird ST - 03
2.13 BOOSTER PUMP SETS
A. Pumps: Vertical, multistage, centrifugal type of 2900 rpm speed. Materials of construction
shall be as follows:
1. Impellers...........................Stainless steel
2. Shaft..................................Stainless steel
3. Stage pieces.......................Stainless steel
4. Base and head...................Cast iron
5. Seal....................................Mechanical
B. System piping: uPVC with solvent welded joints; with flanged manifold ends.
C. Valves: All bronze gate valves at suction and discharge of each pump and bronze wafer type
self closing (non-slam) check valve at discharge of each pump.
D. Base frame: Fabricated steel, with resilient mounting for pumps, where required.
E. Pressure vessel (for pressure controlled sets only): Welded steel construction with
polypropylene lining on wetted areas, butyl rubber diaphragm, hooded charging valve etc.
suitable for 1600 kPa (232 psig) working pressure, pre-charged with nitrogen. Capacity to be
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
suitable for limiting the number of pump starts to 15 per hour.
F. Relief Valve: Suitable bypass pressure relief valve, provided between discharge and suction
manifolds to prevent pump operation at shutoff head.
G. Accessories: Compound gauge at suction manifold and pressure gauge at discharge manifold,
flexible connections at suction and discharge connections.
H. Finishing: The assembly shall be given two (2) coats of primer and one (1) coat of gloss
enamel at the factory.
I. Capacity: Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for types and capacities.
J. Pump motor and control panel: shall be referred to for details.

Ref. : Grundfos CP / CR series
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CO-ORDINATION
A. Contractor shall study all drawings and specifications and familiarise with the structural and
architectural details and the work of other trades.
B. Contractor shall ensure that the work under this section will not interfere with those of other
trades and are compatible with the surrounding finishes; prior to placing orders, fabrication
and installation.
C. Contractor shall co-ordinate with the electrical trade for the exact power requirements and
the location and type of interface(s). Information as required by MEW for obtaining
approvals shall be furnished.
D. Necessary templates, patterns, setting out plans and other items shall be furnished to relevant
trades for incorporation or leaving necessary provisions in the work.
E. Contractor shall resolve conflicts in requirements with other trades. Only those, which
cannot be solved without changes to structure or those, which involves major changes to
system design, shall be referred to the Engineer.
F. Acceptability of sizes and locations of the points of connection (POC) shall be checked and
confirmed to the plumbing trade.
G. Piping layout and the installation of the irrigation heads shall be co-ordinated with the
planting plans; accomplishing changes / modification necessary to attain a harmonious
installation.
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Piping shall be routed in an orderly manner, maintaining gradient.
B. Factory manufactured fittings shall be used where changes in pipe direction occur. Bending
or forming of rigid piping shall not be permitted (flexible polyethylene lines for drip system
excluded).
C. During progress of work, the ends of piping shall be kept closed with factory-manufactured
plugs to prevent the entry of foreign matter.
D. Piping, control valves, quick coupling valves and other system components shall be installed
within the planting bed, unless otherwise noted or directed by the Engineer.
E. Threaded pipe-fittings shall be assembled using Teflon thread sealing tapes.
F. Piping trenches shall be wide enough to allow a minimum of 100 mm (4 inch) between
parallel pipelines. The depth of the same shall be to provide a minimum cover from finished
grade as follows:
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Pressurised supply lines.....................450 mm (18 inch).
2. Non-pressurised distribution lines.....300 mm (12 inch).
G. Piping shall not be installed one over the other, in the same trench.
H. Trenches shall be back-filled with clear agricultural soil and manually compacted, to a dry
density equal to that of the adjoining soil, to the adjoining finished grade. If settlement
occurs after completion of the work, necessary adjustments shall be made to piping and the
system components, as directed by the Engineer.
I. Schedule 40 galvanized steel sleeves / uPVC duct shall be used for irrigation piping crossing
roads and similar areas subjected to traffic loading.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION - PARTICULAR FOR uPVC PIPING
A. Only approved (recommended by the piping manufacturer) solvent cement shall be used for
making the joints.
B. Solvent joints shall not be made in humid or dusty atmosphere.
C. Prior to making the joint, the required penetration and fitting alignment shall be marked in a
clearly visible manner on the pipe end, for later verification.
D. Pipelines shall be filled only after allowing a minimum period of twenty-four (24) hours from
the time of making the joint.
3.04 VALVES
A. Valves shall be same size as pipeline, except where shown otherwise on the contract
drawings.
B. Valves with flanged ends shall be used in valve pits, irrespective of size.
C. Valves shall be installed with stem upright or horizontal, not inverted; except with written
permission of the Engineer for each location.
D. Ball / gate valves shall be used for shutoff and to isolate equipment, part of systems or risers.
E. Appropriate valve gland packing, sealing and gasket materials shall be selected for the
temperature, pressure and chemical properties of the water encountered.
3.05 ELECTRICAL CABLING - PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS

A. Low voltage cables shall be installed in the same trench as the pressure supply lines or in a
separate trench as approved by the Engineer.
B. When more than one cable is placed in a trench, these shall be bound together with dead
locking type plastic cable ties at intervals not exceeding 1000 mm (40 inch).
C. 300 mm (12 inch) of extra length of cable shall be provided at each termination.
D. Continuous single length of cable shall be used between controller and the control valves.
Where splices are essential (generally not permitted), the same shall be executed only after
obtaining written approval of the Engineer, providing a valve box with identification at the
splice. Connector housing shall be filled with jelly (sealant) after connections are made.
E. Grounding wires for the controllers / control valves shall be coloured green / green and
yellow.
F. Crimped on brass terminal lugs shall be used for termination of cables and terminals shall be
numbered with slip-on ferrules for quick identification.
G. Cables shall be sized such that the voltage available at the valve shall be within 24  2 volts.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
3.06 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS

A. Internal transformer shall be selected to suit the local system power supply parameters and to
furnish the power supply at the control valve at 24  2 volts.
B. Two (2) nos. keys shall be furnished for each of the controllers along with an identification
tag, registered with the suppliers.
C. Power supply to the controller shall be obtained from the building standby power supply
system, where possible.
3.07 IRRIGATION HEADS
A. Irrigation heads shall be located and adjusted to minimise splash of water on non-planted
areas.
B. Spacing recommended by the manufacturer shall not be exceeded, in respect of irrigation

heads, under any circumstance.
C. Turf sprinkler and rotor heads shall be set to finished grade.

D. Schedules and details on drawings shall be referred to for the installation details of other
types of heads.
E. Irrigation heads shall be installed on branches with offsets, swing joints etc. even if they are
not specifically indicated in the drawings.
F. Approved type spikes or similar rigid supports shall be provided for all irrigation heads.
G. Irrigation heads shall not be installed, until after the complete piping system has been
thoroughly flushed.
3.08 VALVE BOXES
A. Co-ordinated valve identification schedule shall be submitted for the approval of Engineer.
The approved schedule shall be used for locating the control stations in the as-built drawings.
B. Approved, identification codes shall be painted on the valve boxes in 50 mm (2 inch) high
lettering with white, resin based epoxy paint.
3.09 INSPECTION, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. During the manufacture (at Contractor's premises only), installation and after completion of
works; the system, sections of the system or its components shall be tested by the Contractor /
specialist Subcontractor in the presence of the Engineer, as directed below or else where. The
Contractor shall procure all testing instruments and accessories and bear all costs in
connection with the same.
1. Basic materials for conformity with the specified standards

2. Controller for start time, operating period and cut off; tolerances, alarms etc.
3. Control valves for water tightness; cut-in and cut-out; pressure and flow
4. Electrical wiring for continuity and dielectric resistance
B. Following shall be balanced and regulated:
1. Irrigation program - flow matched with the source capacity

2. Control valve discharge pressure
3. Irrigation heads throw and direction
4. All of the above should be completed prior to the planting
3.10 TESTING OF SUPPLY PIPING
A. Irrigation water supply piping starting from the booster pump set up to the control valve,
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
shall be pressure tested by this section.
B. Piping shall be filled with clean water, leaving all high points open to allow purging of air.
C. System shall be pressurised using manual pumps in increments of 25 % of the test pressure.
A standing period of 10 minutes shall be allowed after each pressure increment. Pressure
testing using motor driven pumps will not be permitted.
D. System shall not be over-pressurised under any circumstance. If the test pressure is close to
the maximum permissible working pressure of any of the system components, calibrated
pressure relief valves shall be installed in the tested circuit.
E. Piping system shall be tested with water at a pressure of 1034 kPa (150 psig) for a minimum
period of 4 hours. Circuit temperature shall be recorded along with the pressure readings and
pressure fluctuations due to temperature variations allowed for in computations.
F. Joints shall be checked for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure to the order
of 10 kPa (1.5 psig) per hour shall be considered as acceptable.
G. Leakage through the seat shall be considered as reasonable grounds for rejecting the control
value.
3.11 TESTING OF DISTRIBUTION PIPING
A. Because of the limitations in conducting a pressure test on the piping system, this
requirement is waived; but the piping shall be tested for line and gradient.
B. Integrity of the pipe joints, in respect of pressure tightness, shall be subject to scrutiny and
piping with leaking joints shall be repaired / replaced.
3.12 SYSTEM FLUSHING
A. On completion of the piping, but prior to the installation of the heads, the complete system
shall be thoroughly flushed to remove all debris.
3.13 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
A. Plant watering shall preferably be done before sunrise and after late in the evening to
facilitate the optimum use of the landscaped areas. This restriction shall not be applicable to
systems which do not have surface sprays and which are watering areas not used for sitting.
B. Alternate programs shall be furnished for summer and winter so as to economise the water
use without sacrificing the basic intent.
3.14 SYSTEM DEMONSTRATIONS
A. Services of a competent engineer shall be provided by the Contractor to supervise the

commissioning of all equipment and to train the Owner's personnel in all aspects of the same
during a five (5) working days period, during normal working hours. All expenses in
connection with the above shall be allowed for by the Contractor.
B. System demonstrations shall be conducted only after the substantial completion of the
project. A minimum of one week's written notice shall be given and the Owner's written
consent obtained, prior to such demonstrations.
3.15 GUARANTEE (Defect Liability) AND MAINTENANCE
A. Requirements of the General Conditions of Contract shall be referred to and complied with
as appropriate.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02815
WATER DISPLAYS
PART - GENERAL
1.01 WORKS INCLUDED
A. Pumps.
B. Filters.
C. Pipes, Fittings and Valves.
D. Water Display Specialities.
E. Cleaning Equipment.
F. Control Panels and Electrical Works.
A. Liquid Applied Waterproofing.

B. CeramicTiles.
C. Supports and Hangers.
D. Vibration Isolation.
E. Mechanical Identification.
F. Meters and Gauges.
G. Electrical Works in connection with Mechanical Services.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI B 2.1 - Pipe Threads.

B. BS 7786 - PTFE Tape for Pipe Thread Sealing Application.
C. ASTM B 88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
D. ANSI B 16.18 - Cast Bronze Solder Joints Pressure Fittings.
E. ANSI B 16.22 - Wrought Copper Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
F. ASTM D 1785 - UPVC Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
G. ASTM D 2466 - Socket Type PVC Fittings, Schedule 40.
H. ASTM D 2467 - Socket Type PVC Fittings, Schedule 80.
I. ASTM D 2564 - Solvent Cement for PVC Pipes and Fittings.
J. ASTM D 2855 - Making Solvent Cemented Joints with PVC Pipes and
Fittings.
K. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
L. AWS A 5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
M. ANSI B 16.21 - Non-metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges.
N. API STD 600 - General Design Specifications for Gate, Globe and Check
Valves.
O. ANSI B 16.34 - Pressure Temperature Ratings for Valves.
P. ANSI B 16.10 - Face to Face Dimensions of Cast Iron Gate, Globe and
CheckValves.
Q. ANSI B 16.24 - End Flange Dimensions of Bronze Valves.
R. ASME B 16.1 - End Flange Dimensions of Cast Iron Valves.
S. AWS B 2.1 - Standard for Building Services Piping.
T. AWWA C 651 - Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Waste Water.
U. ANSI B 31.1 - Power Piping.
V. ASTM A 74 - Coated Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings with Bell and Spigot
for Drainage Services (BS 437).
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02815-1 WATER DISPLAYS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
W. ASTM C 564 - Neoprene Gasketed Joints for Cast Iron Drainage Piping
(BS 6087).
X. ISO 2531 - Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings (BS 4772, AWWA C 151
and AWWA C 110).
Y. AWWA C 111 - Rubber Gasketed Joints for Ductile / Gray Iron Pipes and
Fittings.
Z. BS 1710 - Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems (ANSI A 13.1).
AA. ASHRAE - Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves.
A. Conform to the requirements of the Uniform Swimming Pool, Spa and Hot tub
Code of the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
(IAPMO) as appropriate.
B. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Ministry of Public Health and other
governmental agencies of the State of Kuwait.
C. Materials incorporated in the works covered by this Section shall be unused, new
products in good condition. Materials spoiled due to improper storage or
mishandling shall be rejected. Materials which comes in contact with the pool
water shall be resistant to corrosion by excessive free chlorine, which may appear
in the pool water.
D. The works covered by this section shall be executed by a contractor, engaged in

the installation and maintenance of fountains (water displays) as primary business
for at least five (5) immediately preceding years.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with the General
Conditions of Contract.
1. Manufacturers printed brochures and catalogues (one original and three

copies) with relevant information high lighted (or irrelevant information struck
out), along with write up of selection criteria.
2. General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:100.
3. Equipment installation and piping layout, double line drawings of plant
rooms, sumps, pumps etc. clearly indicating all fittings, supports, valves etc.
to a scale of 1:20. Submit sections and wall elevations as appropriate.
4. Builder's work layout plans to a scale of 1:100 / 1:50 as above.
5. Installation details of:
a. Pool inlet fittings, drains, make up assembly, nozzles, under water
lights, sleeves and penetrations, all types of drains and clean outs,
interceptors and items of similar nature to a scale of 1:5.
b. Equipments like filters, pumps chlorinators etc. to a scale of 1:10.
6. Electrical wiring diagrams (NTS) and panel installation details (1:20).
7. Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings and test and
performance certificates of equipment, where required.
B. Submit project record documents of all works installed under this section, in
accordance with the conditions of contract.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Submit three (3) hard bound copies of "Operation and Maintenance Manual", in
accordance with the conditions of contract, with complete data for each piece of
equipment installed, as detailed below:
1. The Manual shall contain:
a. Table of contents.
b. Fountainm equipment / material submittal with the Engineer's and local
authorities approval.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's internal wiring diagrams.
e. Manufacturer's assembly details.
f. Replacement, parts number listings and description.
g. Preventive maintenance schedules listing frequency of service and or
replacement.
h. Water treatment chemicals, commercial equivalents and schedules of
use.
i. Lubrication materials, equivalents and schedules of use.
j. Names and addresses of manufacturer, sales and service agency and
local representative / distributor including telephone, telefax and telex
nos.
k. Names and address of Contractor's maintenance department, including
emergency contact telephone numbers.
2. Arrange the contents of the manual in sections with tags, grouping each
class of equipment as pumps, fittings, filters, controls, etc.
3. Arrange contents of each section in sequence as listed above (Item 2).
A. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Specifications.
B. Retain protective covering on polished surfaces, until after the commissioning.
C. Deliver chemicals in sealed, approved containers with appropriate warning labels.
A. Water Treatment
1. Self priming pump is used to draw the water from the fountain basin via anti
vortex suction fittings and circulate it through a sand filter then return it back
to the basin via anti vortex discharge fitting.
B. Water Display Generation

1. Water display generation is accomplished by drawing the water from the
basin by a submersible pump and discharge it back through a double ring
nozzles..
C. WATER MAKE UP: Domestic fresh water is supplied through a valved make up
line to fill the basin when the water level drops.
D. CLEANING OF BASINS: Brushes are used to loosen the dirt embedded on the
walls and floors; which in turn shall be collected and removed by the filter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Refer to schedules on drawings for selection of equipment.
2.2 FILTER PUMP
A. Type: Self –priming centrifugal pump made of corrosion resistant materials,

complete with prefilter.
B. Pump Motor and control panel: See Specifications for details.
C. Accessories: Air bleed of valve, pressure gauges and flexible connections at

suction and discharge.
D. Capacity: Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for selection and capacity

ratings.
2.03 FOUNTAIN PUMP
A. Type: Submersible pump constructed of corrosion resistant materials.
B. Pump Motor and Control Panel: See Specifications for details.
C. Accessories: Pressure gauges, gate valve, etc.
D. Capacity: Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for selection and capacity

ratings
2.04 FILTER
A. Type: High density polymeric sand filter.
B. Capacity: Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for selection and capacity

ratings.
2.05. WASTE WATER PUMP
A. Type: Free Standing, submersible centrifugal pump with integral floor switch,
suitable for directly plugging into mains of speed not exceeding 2900 RPM.
Materials of construction shall be as follows:
1. Impeller - Stainless Steel
2. Shaft - Stainless Steel
3. Casing - Stainless Steel
4. Seal - Mechanical
B. Valves: External lever and weight, self closing check valve and gate valves.
C. Pump Motors: Specifications shall be referred to for details of construction and
selection of motors. The motors shall have integral thermal cut-out embedded in
stator windings for overload protection.
D. Capacity: Schedule on drawings shall be referred for capacity ratings.
2.06 PIPES AND FITTINGS:

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE LOCATION TYPE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Fountain pump All UPVC
suction and discharge schedule 40.
B. Automatic make-up. All Copper

________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
connection Type K.
C. Pool drainage and All UPVC

over flow Schedule 40.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.07 PIPE JOINTS
A. UPVC: Solvent welded joints. Use threaded adaptors / flanges etc. where
required.
B. Copper: B cup-5 brazed joints. Use threaded adaptors / flanges for connection to
PVC piping, nozzles etc. as appropriate.
C. Pipe joints shall be rated for 1034 KPa (150 Psig) working water pressure at
121oC (250oF)
2.08 VALVES
A. GENERAL
1. Provide valves from the same manufacturer throughout where possible.
B. GATE VALVES
1. Upto 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, non-rising stem and union
bonnet, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends.
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), outside
screw and Yoke (O.S.&Y), solid wedge, renewable seats, flanged ends.
C. GLOBE VALVES
1. Upto 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, rising stem, union bonnet,
renewable composition disc, threaded ends.
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), rising
stem , O.S&Y, renewable seat, flanged ends.
D. BALL VALVES
1. Upto 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, Teflon
seats and stuffing box ring, lever operated, threaded ends.
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Cast steel body; stainless steel, full bore,
floating ball; Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever or key operated flanged
ends.
E. CHECK VALVES
1. Upto 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze, in-line, resilient seat and disc, spring
loaded, screwed ends.
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded,
renewable composite disc and seat, flanged ends.
3. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze trim, swing type with
external lever and weight, renewable seat and disc, flanged ends.
F. DRAIN VALVES
1. Bronze angle globe pattern, key operated, threaded inlet and hose connection
outlet with cap and chain.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
G. PRESSURE RATINGS
1. Unless otherwise indicated all valves shall be rated for 1034 Kpa (150 psig)
working water pressure at 121 deg.C (250 deg.F)
2. Contractor shall allow for selecting higher pressure rated valves to meet the
valve construction features.
H. VALVE OPERATORS
1. Provide hand wheels / operating levers for valves as appropriate. Hand
wheels for gate and globe valves 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size and smaller, shall
be non-ferrous metal (die cast zinc / aluminium alloy etc.).
2. Provide one key / wrench of appropriate size per lever operated valve
installed.
3. Provide chain operated sheaves for valves located more than 2 Ms (7 feet)
above floor. Extend chains to about 150 cm (5 feet) above floor and hook to
clips in order to clear walk ways and equipment.
4. Provide geared operators for valves 200 mm (8 inch) nom. and larger in size.
I. AUTOMATIC AIR RELEASE VALVE: Bronze body with non-ferrous float and
internal working parts. Construction shall be take-apart type for easy
maintenance. Outlet shall be tapped for connection to drain.
J. AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES: bronze body with stainless steel

cartridges. The valve shall be factory set to the required capacity and shall
operate within + or - 5 % over an operating pressure differential of at least 14
times the minimum required for control. Valve body shall be rated for minimum
1034 Kpa (150 psig) wwp and shall have threaded/flanged ends. Each valve shall
be furnished with a set of nipples, quick disconnect valves and other fittings
suitable for use with the measuring instrument specified.
K. FLOW MEASURING INSTRUMENT: Pressure gauge with -100 to 1034 Kpa (-14.7
to 150 psig) range, dual 150 cm (5 feet) long connection hoses with vent and shut
off valves, flow conversion charts and carrying case.
2.09 SPECIALITIES
A. Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for selection of specialties.
2.10 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. Refer to and comply with Section 15060.
2.11 FLASHING AND SEALING
A. Provide sheet lead (minimum 3 mm thick) flashing of minimum (3 feet) diameter at

all drains and flashing sleeves in the fountains.
B. Use age proof, water compatible, poly sulphide sealant at the joint of nozzles’
stand pipes with the flashing sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Study and familiarize with the structural and architectural details and the work of
other trades.
B. Ensure that the work under this section will not interfere with those of other trades
and are compatible with the architectural finishes, prior to placing orders,
fabrication and installation.
C. Inform the electrical contractor of the exact power requirements and location and
type of the interface. Furnish all information as required by the MEW for obtaining
approvals.
D. Furnish the civil works contractor with necessary templates, patterns, setting out
plans and other items for incorporation in his works or for leaving necessary
provisions for the work. Ensure timely placement of sleeves, inserts and the like.
E. Where work is installed in close proximity to or will interfere with work of other
trades, assist in working out satisfactory space arrangements. Prepare composite
shop drawings to a suitable scale, showing how the work is installed in relation to
the work of other trades.
F. Ensure the sufficiency of dimensions of plant areas, door ways etc. and suitability
of slabs and other structural members for placement, operation and maintenance
of equipment.
G. Provide hooks, rails or other items to allow for hoisting or movement of equipment
in technical areas.
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
B. Install piping in a way that conserves building space and does not interfere with
the use of space.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe joints or
connected equipment.
E. Install exposed piping parallel or at right angles to the building walls.
F. Where changes in pipe sizes occur, install tapered reducer fittings. Use of
bushings is not permitted except with the written permission of the Engineer.
Install eccentric reducer fittings with level crown. Provide steel fittings coated with
food grade epoxy, where standard PVC fittings are not available as for reducing
fittings.
G. Where changes in pipe direction occur install factory manufactured fittings.

Bending or forming of pipe is not permitted without Engineer's written permission.
H. Provide adequate clearance for access to valves and fittings.
I. Provide minimum clearances between piping covered by this Section and other
services.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
J. Provide access doors where valves and fittings are not exposed.
K. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at system low points.
L. During progress of work keep the ends of all piping closed with factory
manufactured plugs or blind flanges to prevent entry of foreign matter. Ensure the
removal of such plugs or flanges on completion of the works. All blind flanges shall
have integral indicating flags.
M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted, except with written
permission of the Engineer for each location.
N. All valves shall be same size as pipeline.
O. Provide flanges / unions on horizontal pressure piping at spacing not exceeding
18.0 Ms (60 feet).
P. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
Q. Install unions or flanges downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus

connections.
R. Install dielectric unions or flanged fittings wherever joining dissimilar metals.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION - PARTICULAR FOR UPVC
A. Use only approved (as recommended by the manufacturer) solvent cement for
making the joints.
B. Do not make solvent joints in humid or dusty atmosphere.
C. Prior to making the joint, mark the required penetration and fitting alignment, in a
clearly visible manner, on the pipe end for later verification.
D. Allow a minimum period of twenty four (24) hours from the time of making the
joint, before filling the line.
3.04 VALVES - SELECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install full bare ball valves for isolation purposes and for drainage of pools.
B. Install self closing (spring loaded) type check valves at the discharge of pumps.
C. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
3.05 SUPPORT AND ANCHORS
A. Refer to and comply with requirements of Specifications.
3.06 PUDDLE FLANGES
A. Install puddle flanges on all pipe penetrations on walls and floors of water holding
structures.
B. Erect puddle flanges in the form work, perpendicular to the wall face and rigidly to
resist displacement during pouring of concrete.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Seal the openings around, so as to avoid leakage (and resultant honey combing)
and undesirable formation of concrete.
D. Check alignment immediately after pouring of concrete. Make adjustments, where

necessary.
3.07 VIBRATION ISOLATION

3.08 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS AND ELECTRICAL WORKS
3.09 PUMPS AND MOTORS
A. Select all pump motors for the maximum loading of the selected impeller.
B. Select the pumps with operating points within 20 % on either side of the maximum
efficiency point.
C. Do not select the maximum and minimum impeller sizes, as far as possible.
D. Provide anti-condensation heaters in windings of all motors.
3.10 INSPECTION, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. During the manufacture and installation and after completion of works; the
system, sections of the system or its components shall be tested by the
Contractor / specialist Subcontractor in the presence of the Engineer, as directed
below or elsewhere. The Contractor shall procure all testing instruments and
accessories and bear all costs in connection therewith.
1. Basic materials for conformity with the specified standards.
2. Supports and anchors for ability to withstand required loads.
3. Pumping equipment for the specified flow, head, controls, safety interlocks
and alarms, vibration and noise criteria etc.
4. Filtration equipment for flow, head loss, filtration fineness, controls and
alarms, regeneration etc.
B. BALANCE AND REGULATE THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, SYSTEMS:

1. Globe valves on pump discharge for design flow.
2. Balancing valves in circulating system for equal or proportionate flow.
3. Water level sensors for cut out level or range.
4. Float control assembly for opening and closing levels.
3.11 TESTING OF PIPING
A. The pipes shall be jointed, plugged and shall have been in position for at least 24
hours, before the tests are carried out.
B. The piping shall be tested for line, gradient and water tightness. The Contractor
shall furnish all labour, and necessary testing instruments such as gauges, pumps
etc. as directed by the Engineer. A minimum of Two (2) nos identical pressure
gauges shall be installed at extremities of the piping circuit to be tested.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Fill the piping with clean fresh water, leaving all high points open to allow for
purging of air.
D. Pressurize the system using manual pumps in increments of 25 percent of the test
pressure. Allow a standing period of 10 minutes after each pressure increment.
Pressure testing using motor driven pump is not permitted.
E. Do not over pressurize the system under any circumstance. If the test pressure is
close to the maximum permissible pressure of any of the system components,
install calibrated pressure relief valves in the tested circuit.
F. Prior to testing keep all valves and control devices in open position. After
completion of pressure test, close each valve one at a time starting from the
pressure release end, so as to ensure tightness of the valve.
G. The piping shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 690 Kpa (100 psig) or
1.5 times the system working pressure, whichever is greater, but limited to 1034
Kpa (150 psig). The pressure shall be maintained for at least 4 hours.
H. Check for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure to the order of 10
Kpa (1.5 psig) per hour shall be considered as acceptable.
I. Piping shall be tested in segments during the progress of the work. Maintain an
official log book for recording the tests carried out on sections of piping, including
test pressure, date of test and approval signature of Engineer's representative
witnessing the test.
3.12 SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide the services of a competent engineer to supervise the commissioning of

all equipment and to train the Owner's personnel in all aspects of the same during
a five (5) working days period, in normal working hours. Allow for all costs in
connection with the above.
B. This shall only be done on completion of all tests to the Engineer's approval. Give
minimum one weeks written notice and obtain Owner's written consent prior to
such demonstrations.
3.13 GUARANTEE (defined in General Conditions as Defects Liability) AND

MAINTENANCE.
A. Refer to conditions of contract for requirements.
B. Allow for the following activities in respect of the complete system, for a period of
two calendar years from the date of substantial completion.
1. Defect liability / breakdown maintenance, inclusive of replacement parts.
2. Preventive maintenance as scheduled, inclusive of replacement parts, water
treatment chemicals and consumables.
3. Attending to emergency situations, which may damage property or endanger
lives, even outside normal working hours.
C. Provide a written report to the Owner, detailing the maintenance work performed;
including dates, parts replaced etc.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02815-10 WATER
DISPLAYS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
D. The Owner's personnel shall be allowed to witness or participate (without
damageous interference) in the above activities.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02815-11 WATER
DISPLAYS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02826
MOTORIZED GATE
PART 1 - GENERAL
To be read with General Specifications
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide motorized gate and accessories as indicated and specified.
A. Gate fabrication and installation.

B. Electromechanical works.
C. Hot dip galvanization.
D. Enamel painting.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM/A 120 Pipe steel block and hot dipped zinc coated (galvanised)
welded and seamless for ordinary use.
B. ASTM/A 126 Zinc (hot galvanized) coating on products fabricated from
rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and
strips.
C. ASTM/A 143 Safeguarding against embrittlement of hot dip galvanized
structural steel products and proceudre for detecting
embrittlement.
D. ASTM/A 153 Zinc coating (hot dip) on iron and steel hardware.
E. ASTM/A 385 Providing high quality zinc coatings (hot dip) on assembled
products.
F. ASTM/A 505 General requirements for steel sheet and strip.
G. ASTM/A 558 Welding electrodes.
H. ASTM/A 559 Welding electrodes.
A. Manufacturer: Company specialized in commercial quality motorized gate with

five years experience.
B. Installation: In accordance with manufacturer's installation procedure.
C. Work to be performed to comply with specifications and to the satisfaction of the

Engineer.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data.

B. Include plan layout, grid, spacing of components, accessories, fittings, hardware, anchorages,
height elevations of the same and schedule of components.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.06 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples.
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02826-1 MOTORIZED
GATE
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The gate shall have a clear width of 6.0M, 5.0M and 0.86M for vehicular and
pedestrian entrances respectively and height of 2.11M from finished grade.
B. The frame, verticals and bracings shall be of mild steel hollow sections as detailed
in the drawings.
C. The MS sections, accessories and other components shall be hot dip galvanized.
D. The finished fabricated product shall be painted using approved quality primer and
enamel paint, black colour.
E. Gate must be motorized remote controlled and horizontally sliding type.

1. System shall be suitable to be operated under local power supply system
240/415V, 50Hz.
2. The assembly shall consists of photo-electric cells and the pressure switches
connected together in series with contacts normally closed for remote
operation.
3. Heavy gauge steel frame for pad mounting.
4. All-weather hinged cover with provision for padlocking.
5. Adjustable safety friction clutch.
6. Adjustable limit switches, rotary type.
7. Magnetic solenoid locking brake.
8. Emergency disconnect for manual operation in case of power failure.
9. Magnetic reversing starter (size "1" contactor type) with overload and
undervoltage protection.
10. Factory pre-wired electrical system.
11. Permanent lubricated heavy-duty bearings and heavy-duty roller chain.
12. The motor shall be provided with removable hood.
13. Operator shall be suitable to withstand the local weather conditions IP54.
14. Motor shall meet the international standards, IEC and shall be suitable for
remote operation.
F. Electric gate operator to consist of the following:

1. Electric gate operator to be located as indicated. Operator to have parallel three-
button illuminated control stations ("OPEN," "STOP," AND "CLOSE").
2. Provide electrical conduit, switches, wiring and connections specified under the
applicable electrical sections of Division 16.
G. Pedestrian gates shall be of manually operated.
PART 3 - ERECTION
The motorized gates shall be erected in accordance with the standards and
to comply with the details shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02826-2 MOTORIZED
GATE
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPING WORKS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. All labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install all landscape
works.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS.

A. Submittals
C. Plant Procurement and Delivery
D. Planting Procedures and Materials
E. Planting Soil Mix
F. Lawns
G. Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Ground Covers
H. Landscape Maintenance.
1.03 ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS

A. All local ministry, municipality, State of Kuwait laws and rules and regulations governing or
relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these
specifications and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Nothing contained in
the specifications shall be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations or
requirements of same. However, when the specifications and/or drawings call for, or describe
materials, workmanship or construction of a better quality, higher standard or larger size,
specifications and/or drawings shall take precedence over the requirements of said rules and
regulations.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Prior to any landscape work, locate all existing underground installations and protect same.
Repair any damage to these installations, at no cost to the Ministry.
B. Coordinate all work with other trades so that conflicts will not exist nor delay the work in any
way.
1.05 GRADING
A. At all landscaped areas, the Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for providing final
grades in accordance with the requirements of the drawings, soils report and site work
specifications.

A. Work must be performed with personnel experienced in the landscape work required. The
Contractor must show proof of the qualifications and experience of all personnel proposed
for this contract. The following items must be included within each individual's curriculum
vitae in addition to experience and/or education.
1. Major Landscape and Irrigation Projects on which the person has worked, the respective
client, construction cost of each project and the specific responsibility and position of the
person in question.
2. Three referees who can attest to the ability of the person. This information must be
submitted to the Engineer for review and approval, at least six weeks prior to start of
landscaping work.
B. Personnel: This Contract will require a minimum of the following personnel:
________________________________________________________________________________________
TENDER NO. SE/100 02900-1 LANDSCAPING WORKS
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Horticulturist/Arborist must have a B.Sc. degree in Ornamental Horticulture and a minimum of
three years field experience. Five years additional field experience in Ornamental Horticulture
may be substituted for B.Sc. degree. Forestry or agriculture degrees or experience may not be
substituted. The experience must be in an arid climate similar to Kuwait.
2. Landscape Foreman
Must be skilled in the installation of planting and associated landscape elements with a
minimum of 10 years experience in Landscape Construction. A minimum of three years of
this ten years experience must have been in arid climates similar to Kuwait. Experience in
the handling and planting of phoenix dactylifera palms and specimen plants.
3. All Landscape Labourers must be skilled in the installation of planting and associated
Landscape Elements with a minimum of 2 years experience in Landscape Construction.
C. Equipment:
1. The Contractor must show proof of his ability to mobilise the following list of equipment
(or a list which has been previously approved by the Engineer) and have it on site before
beginning a particular part of the work for which that piece of equipment is necessary.
a. Air Compressor
b. Back Hoes
c. Mini Loaders
d. Bus and Minibus
e. Concrete Mixer
f. Dumper
g. Dump Trucks
h. Earth Compactor
i. Jack Hammer
j. Loaders
k. Pick up
l. Rotovator
m. Sedan Cars
n. Trenchers - sizes as needed
o. Truck
p. Tractor with Disk Harrow
q. Augers of required sizes
r. Water Tanker with Spray Mister Hose Attachment
s. Rotary Type Mowers
t. Pruning Equipment
u. Tractor Trailer for Transporting Large Palms
v. Crane for Loading and Planting Large Palms and Trees
w. A penalty of KD 300/- (Three Hundred Kuwaiti Dinars) per day may be levied on
the Contractor, should he fail to provide the previously approved equipment, when
beginning a particular part of the works, for which that piece of equipment is
required.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. The guarantee period for all plant material shall begin at the date of acceptance of the
planting operations by the Ministry.
B. Planting operations will be accepted as complete when the Contractor receives a Notice of
Substantial Completion from the Engineer.
C. All plant material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor, for a period of 2 (two) years from
the date of notice of substantial completion to be in good, healthy and flourishing condition.
D. When the work is accepted in parts, the guarantee periods shall extend from each of the
partial acceptances to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee
periods terminate at one time.
E. The Contractor shall replace, immediately and without cost to the Ministry, all dead plants
and all plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition. The plants shall be free of dead or dying
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
branches and branch tips and shall bear foliage of a normal density, size and colour.
Replacements shall match adjacent specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be
provided immediately and shall be subject to all requirements stated in this Specification.
F. The Contractor shall make all necessary repairs due to plant replacements. Such repairs
shall be done at no extra cost to the Ministry and within a reasonable time as determined by
the Engineer.
G. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend until the end of the two year guarantee
period.
H. Any plant not found in an acceptable condition during the guarantee period will be replaced
immediately and if said replacement occurs within 120 days of the end of the guarantee
period this period will be extended by 120 days from the date on which the last plant was
installed.
1.08 ACCEPTANCE
A. Substantial Completion:
1. The Engineer will inspect all work for substantial completion upon written request of the
Contractor. The request shall be received at least 10 (ten) working days before the
anticipated date of inspection.
2. Acceptance of plant material by the Engineer will be for general conformance to specified
size, character and quality and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full
conformance to the contract documents including correct species.
3. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary, in the judgement of
the Engineer, the Engineer will recommend to the Ministry that the work be accepted as
substantially complete.
4. The work may be accepted as substantially complete in parts when it is deemed to be in the
Ministry’s best interest to do so and when permission is given to the Contractor in writing to
complete the work in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Ministry shall not
waive any other provisions of this contract.
5. The guarantee period shall commence upon acceptance of substantial completion.
B. Final Acceptance:
1. At the end of the maintenance and guarantee periods, the Engineer will inspect all work for
Final Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at
least 30 (thirty) calendar days before the anticipated date for Final Inspection.
2. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement
of the Engineer, the Engineer shall certify in writing to the Ministry as to the Final
Acceptance of the work.
1.09 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall keep reproducibles of the drawings exclusively for the purpose of
recording all changes and deviations in the locations of plants or materials. All changes
shall be indicated thereon as the job progresses. The Contractor shall deliver these modified
Mylar reproducibles and CD’s of same to the Engineer upon completion of the work.
1.10 CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall clean up all areas on a regularly scheduled basis or whenever deemed
necessary by the Engineer, as well as upon completion of the work before acceptance and
during the guarantee period.
B. Waste materials shall be removed daily. The Contractor shall restore previously established
grade elevations caused by irrigation equipment, rainfall, or other natural or man made
causes, such as contour grading. Prepared planting soil mix and mulch top dressing shall
also be restored to levels and conditions shown on the plans and in the specifications. This
work shall be incidental to all other work, and no additional compensation shall be made for
it.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
C. The Contractor shall protect new plants from injury during installation and until acceptance
of the work as specified herein.
D. Adjacent walks, paved surfaces and road shoulders shall be kept clean during the
installation of landscape works.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not Used.
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________________
Sep. '05

09 1HAZOPStudyTrainingCourse

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

09 1HAZOPStudyTrainingCourse

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Study, Design, Construction, Operation & Maintenance of Pumping

Station, Waste Water Treatment Plant and Pressure Mains in South of

Section 02210 Sub-surface Investigation 1

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS

1.04 SCOPE OF WORK

1.05 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.06 MATERIALS TO BE SALVAGED

1.07. VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

2.01 BACKFILL MATERIAL

C. Concrete and Masonry

3.04 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

4. All dewatering shall be performed by well-point systems, unless otherwise approved

8. If the Contractor fails to maintain the excavations in dry conditions (acceptable to

5. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for:

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

B. Well-point systems shall be installed sufficiently in advance of excavation activities to allow

3.02 WELL-POINT SYSTEMS

3.03 SUMP PUMPING

A. Sump pumps may not be used, unless approved by the Engineer.

3.04 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING WATER TABLE LEVEL

3.05 WATER TREATMENT

A. The Contractor shall treat contaminated water to meet EPA of Kuwait

3.06 DISPOSAL OF WATER

3.07 REMOVAL OF DEWATERING SYSTEMS

A. No dewatering system shall be removed without the approval of the Engineer.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

To be read with General Specifications.

1.02 RELATED WORK:

A. AWPA: American Wood Preservers Association.

A. Design Responsibility for Temporary Excavation Support Systems.

1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA:

A. Design excavation support system to support earth pressures, equipment and

B. Design of excavation support systems to include penetration to depth below

C. Design support system to furnish sufficient reaction to maintain stability in

E. Selection and design of the temporary excavation support techniques to be by

A. General: All materials free of defects.

B. Install excavation support systems in accordance with prepared working drawings.

C. Monitor performance of excavation support system with inclinometers, settlement

A. Remove all portions of excavation support systems except where in physical

C. Removal of sheeting protecting vertical trench sides shall conform to requirements

D. Preparation of as-built drawings showing locations and cut off elevations of

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

6. Slopes shall be smooth and uniform upon completion of the work.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.09 SITE INVESTIGATION

A. Soil Investigation Report

2.01 EXISTING GROUND

2.02 FILL MATERIAL

SUITABLE FILL MATERIAL

TEST STANDARD BEARING BEARING

 Compacted to 95% MDD and soaked for 96 hours.

3.02 CONTROL OF WATER

A. Comply with all requirements in Section 02240 “Dewatering”.

3.04 EXISTING GROUND PREPARATION

A. Placement of fill materials shall comply with the following requirements:

3.06 INSTALLATION OF GEOTEXTILES

NON-DISRUPTIVE METHOD OF PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION